Owner’s Manual
Thank you, and congratulations on your choice of the Roland JUNO-D.
201a
Before using this unit, carefully read the sections entitled: “USING THE UNIT SAFELY” (p.
2–3) and “IMPORTANT NOTES” (p. 4–5). These sections provide important information
concerning the proper operation of the unit. Additionally, in order to feel assured that you
have gained a good grasp of every feature provided by your new unit, Owner’s manual
should be read in its entirety. The manual should be saved and kept on hand as a conve-
nient reference.
202
Copyright © 2004 ROLAND CORPORATION
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form without
the written permission of ROLAND CORPORATION.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
011 Do not allow any objects (e.g., flammable material,
101b
•
•
The unit and the AC adaptor should be located so
their location or position does not interfere with
their proper ventilation.
coins, pins); or liquids of any kind (water, soft
drinks, etc.) to penetrate the unit.
..........................................................................................................
102d
•
Always grasp only the output plug or the body of
the AC adaptor when plugging into, or
unplugging from, this unit or an outlet.
..........................................................................................................
•
012cImmediately turn the power off, remove the AC
adaptor from the outlet, and request servicing by
your retailer, the nearest Roland Service Center, or
an authorized Roland distributor, as listed on the
“Information” page when:
..........................................................................................................
103b
•
At regular intervals, you should unplug the AC
adaptor and clean it by using a dry cloth to wipe
all dust and other accumulations away from its
prongs. Also, disconnect the power plug from the
power outlet whenever the unit is to remain
unused for an extended period of time. Any
accumulation of dust between the power plug and
the power outlet can result in poor insulation and
lead to fire.
• The AC adaptor or the power-supply cord has
been damaged; or
• If smoke or unusual odor occurs
• Objects have fallen into, or liquid has been
spilled onto the unit; or
• The unit has been exposed to rain (or otherwise
has become wet); or
..........................................................................................................
•
104 Try to prevent cords and cables from becoming
• The unit does not appear to operate normally or
exhibits a marked change in performance.
..........................................................................................................
013 In households with small children, an adult
entangled. Also, all cords and cables should be
placed so they are out of the reach of children.
..........................................................................................................
•
•
106 Never climb on top of, nor place heavy objects on
should provide supervision until the child is
capable of following all the rules essential for the
safe operation of the unit.
the unit.
..........................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................
014 Protect the unit from strong impact.
107d
•
Never handle the AC adaptor body, or its output
plugs, with wet hands when plugging into, or
unplugging from, an outlet or this unit.
•
(Do not drop it!)
..........................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................
108b
•
015 Do not force the unit’s power-supply cord to share
•
Before moving the unit, disconnect the AC
adaptor and all cords coming from external
devices.
an outlet with an unreasonable number of other
devices. Be especially careful when using
..........................................................................................................
extension cords—the total power used by all
devices you have connected to the extension
cord’s outlet must never exceed the power rating
(watts/amperes) for the extension cord. Excessive
loads can cause the insulation on the cord to heat
up and eventually melt through.
109b
•
Before cleaning the unit, turn off the power and
unplug the AC adaptor from the outlet (p. 16).
..........................................................................................................
110b
•
Whenever you suspect the possibility of lightning
in your area, disconnect the AC adaptor from the
outlet.
..........................................................................................................
•
016 Before using the unit in a foreign country, consult
with your retailer, the nearest Roland Service
Center, or an authorized Roland distributor, as
listed on the “Information” page.
..........................................................................................................
•
118 Should you remove the ground terminal screw,
make sure to put it in a safe place out of children’s
reach, so there is no chance of them being
swallowed accidentally.
..........................................................................................................
023 DO NOT play a CD-ROM disc on a conventional
•
audio CD player. The resulting sound may be of a
level that could cause permanent hearing loss.
Damage to speakers or other system components
may result.
..........................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMPORTANT NOTES
291a
In addition to the items listed under “USING THE UNIT SAFELY” on page 2–3, please read and observe the following:
Power Supply
Maintenance
301
401a
• Do not connect this unit to same electrical outlet that is
• For everyday cleaning wipe the unit with a soft, dry cloth
being used by an electrical appliance that is controlled by
an inverter (such as a refrigerator, washing machine,
microwave oven, or air conditioner), or that contains a
motor. Depending on the way in which the electrical
appliance is used, power supply noise may cause this unit
to malfunction or may produce audible noise. If it is not
practical to use a separate electrical outlet, connect a
power supply noise filter between this unit and the
electrical outlet.
or one that has been slightly dampened with water. To
remove stubborn dirt, use a cloth impregnated with a
mild, non-abrasive detergent. Afterwards, be sure to wipe
the unit thoroughly with a soft, dry cloth.
402
• Never use benzine, thinners, alcohol or solvents of any
kind, to avoid the possibility of discoloration and/or
deformation.
302
Repairs and Data
• The AC adaptor will begin to generate heat after long
hours of consecutive use. This is normal, and is not a
cause for concern.
452
• Please be aware that all data contained in the unit’s
307
memory may be lost when the unit is sent for repairs.
Important data should always be backed up in another
MIDI device (e.g., a sequencer), or written down on paper
(when possible). During repairs, due care is taken to avoid
the loss of data. However, in certain cases (such as when
circuitry related to memory itself is out of order), we
regret that it may not be possible to restore the data, and
Roland assumes no liability concerning such loss of data.
• Before connecting this unit to other devices, turn off the
power to all units. This will help prevent malfunctions
and/or damage to speakers or other devices.
Placement
351
• Using the unit near power amplifiers (or other equipment
containing large power transformers) may induce hum.
To alleviate the problem, change the orientation of this
unit; or move it farther away from the source of inter-
ference.
Additional Precautions
• Never turn off the power while the display indicates
“KEEP POWER ON!” If you turn off the power while this
message is displayed, the internal user data will be lost.
352a
• This device may interfere with radio and television
551
reception. Do not use this device in the vicinity of such
receivers.
• Please be aware that the contents of memory can be
irretrievably lost as a result of a malfunction, or the
improper operation of the unit. To protect yourself against
the risk of loosing important data, we recommend that
you periodically save a backup copy of important data
you have stored in the unit’s memory in another MIDI
device (e.g., a sequencer).
3•52Nb oise may be produced if wireless communications
devices, such as cell phones, are operated in the vicinity of
this unit. Such noise could occur when receiving or initi-
ating a call, or while conversing. Should you experience
such problems, you should relocate such wireless devices
so they are at a greater distance from this unit, or switch
them off.
552
• Unfortunately, it may be impossible to restore the contents
of data that was stored in the unit’s memory or in another
MIDI device (e.g., a sequencer) once it has been lost.
Roland Corporation assumes no liability concerning such
loss of data.
354a
• Do not expose the unit to direct sunlight, place it near
devices that radiate heat, leave it inside an enclosed
vehicle, or otherwise subject it to temperature extremes.
Excessive heat can deform or discolor the unit.
553
• Use a reasonable amount of care when using the unit’s
355b
buttons, sliders, or other controls; and when using its jacks
and connectors. Rough handling can lead to malfunctions.
• When moved from one location to another where the
temperature and/or humidity is very different, water
droplets (condensation) may form inside the unit. Damage
or malfunction may result if you attempt to use the unit in
this condition. Therefore, before using the unit, you must
allow it to stand for several hours, until the condensation
has completely evaporated.
554
• Never strike or apply strong pressure to the display.
556
• When connecting / disconnecting all cables, grasp the
connector itself—never pull on the cable. This way you
will avoid causing shorts, or damage to the cable’s
internal elements.
358
• Do not allow objects to remain on top of the keyboard.
558a
This can be the cause of malfunction, such as keys ceasing
to produce sound.
• To avoid disturbing your neighbors, try to keep the unit’s
volume at reasonable levels. You may prefer to use
headphones, so you do not need to be concerned about
those around you (especially when it is late at night).
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
559a
• When you need to transport the unit, package it in the box
(including padding) that it came in, if possible. Otherwise,
you will need to use equivalent packaging materials.
561
• Use only the specified expression pedal (EV-5; sold
separately). By connecting any other expression pedals,
you risk causing malfunction and/or damage to the unit.
985
• The explanations in this manual include illustrations that
depict what should typically be shown by the display.
Note, however, that your unit may incorporate a newer,
enhanced version of the system (e.g., includes newer
sounds), so what you actually see in the display may not
always match what appears in the manual.
Handling CD-ROMs
563
• Unauthorized duplication, reproduction, hiring, and
lending of the software included in the applied CD-ROM
is prohibited.
801
• Avoid touching or scratching the shiny underside
(encoded surface) of the disc. Damaged or dirty CD-ROM
discs may not be read properly. Keep your discs clean
using a commercially available CD cleaner.
*
204Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation.
*
206Wj indows® is known officially as: “Microsoft®
Windows® operating system.”
*
207Apple and Macintosh are registered trademark of Apple
Computer, Inc.
*
209MacOS is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.
*
220All product names mentioned in this document are trade-
marks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Panel descriptions................................................................................10
Front panel................................................................................................................................................. 10
Rear panel.................................................................................................................................................. 13
Getting ready.........................................................................................14
Try out the sounds................................................................................20
Basic structure................................................................................................................................ 40
Performance mode........................................................................................................................ 42
Editing parameters................................................................................................................................... 42
Assigning a name.......................................................................................................................... 43
When one page contains two or more settings......................................................................... 43
Inputting numbers and numerals.......................................................................................................... 43
Creating a patch (Patch mode)............................................................44
How to make the patch settings............................................................................................................. 44
Changing the way that the tones are sounded (Key Mode) ................................................... 44
Editing the patch parameters ...................................................................................................... 44
Making settings that apply to the entire patch (Patch Common parameters)..................... 45
Making settings for an individual tone (Patch Tone parameters) ......................................... 46
Saving a patch........................................................................................................................................... 48
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(XFER to MIDI).............................................................................................................................. 51
Editing the rhythm set parameters............................................................................................. 52
Making settings that apply to the entire rhythm set (Rhythm Common parameters) ....... 52
Saving a rhythm set (User Rhythm Set)................................................................................................ 53
Copying effect settings from a rhythm set (RHY PRM COPY).............................................. 53
Choosing a part and selecting the sound.............................................................................................. 55
Editing the part settings of a performance (Part Setup).......................................................... 56
Convenient functions for performance editing (Performance Utility)............................................. 59
Transmitting performance settings from the MIDI OUT connector (XFER to MIDI)......... 61
Adding effects.......................................................................................65
The effect signal path............................................................................................................................... 66
Settings common to all modes (System Function) ...........................88
How to make the system function settings........................................................................................... 88
Functions of the system parameters ...................................................................................................... 89
Settings common to the entire system (GENERAL) ................................................................ 89
Settings related to controllers (CONTROLLER)....................................................................... 89
Settings related to MIDI (MIDI).................................................................................................. 90
Making scale tune settings for a patch (PATCH SCALE) ....................................................... 91
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
MIDI messages used by the JUNO-D.................................................................................................... 92
Making settings before recording............................................................................................... 96
Listening to the recorded performance...................................................................................... 97
Transposing playback of performances (Master Key Shift).................................................... 98
Backing-up (saving) all JUNO-D settings on your external MIDI sequencer.................................. 98
Playing back General MIDI/General MIDI 2 music data....................................................... 98
Troubleshooting..................................................................................102
Patch list..............................................................................................111
Rhythm guide list................................................................................120
Multi-chord set list..............................................................................122
MIDI implementation chart.................................................................124
Specifications......................................................................................125
Index.....................................................................................................126
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Main Features
A broad range of new, high-quality sounds
Careful attention has been paid to refining the most important
sounds for a live keyboard, such as piano, organ, strings, and brass.
In addition, the latest cutting-edge sounds are also included.
The General MIDI score conforming to General MIDI /General MIDI
2 is also supported with high-quality sounds.
General MIDI
General MIDI is a set of recommendations which seeks to
provide a way to go beyond the limitations of proprietary
designs, and standardize the MIDI capabilities of sound
generating devices. Sound generating devices and music files
that meet the General MIDI standard bear the General MIDI
Quick and easy sound editing
logo (
). Music files bearing the General MIDI logo can be
To edit the sounds (patches) of the JUNO-D, you simply choose from
the wide range of “tones” (pre-programmed instrumental sounds)
and edit them. Editing is easy; you can adjust the brightness (filter),
attack and decay, modulation (LFO), and effects, or layer two tones
to create a rich sound.
played back using any General MIDI sound generating unit to
produce essentially the same musical performance.
General MIDI 2
The upwardly compatible General MIDI 2 (
)
recommendations pick up where the original General MIDI left
off, offering enhanced expressive capabilities, and even greater
compatibility. Issues that were not covered by the original
General MIDI recommendations, such as how sounds are to be
edited, and how effects should be handled, have now been
precisely defined. Moreover, the available sounds have been
expanded. General MIDI 2 compliant sound generators are
capable of reliably playing back music files that carry either the
General MIDI or General MIDI 2 logo.
Numerous phrase/arpeggio templates
In addition to an arpeggio function, the instrument also features
“phrase templates,” which allow you to activate performance
techniques geared toward a particular sound as well as typical
phrases simply by pressing a key---great tools for music production.
Multi-chord memory function
The Chord Memory function lets you play a registered chord by
In some cases, the conventional form of General MIDI, which
does not include the new enhancements, is referred to as
“General MIDI 1” as a way of distinguishing it from General
MIDI 2.
pressing a single key.
You can register different chord forms to each key, and recall
multiple chords together.
Several sets of chord progressions that typically appear in one song
have been registered as presets.
Compact and easy to carry
The JUNO-D is compact, light, and easy to carry. It’s an instrument
with great sounds and professional-level functionality that can be
easily carried between your bedroom and the stage or studio.
Dedicated sound editor is included
The dedicated sound editing program “JUNO-D Editor” (Mac and
Windows versions on a hybrid CD-ROM) is included, allowing you
to use your computer to create and rearrange sounds quickly and
easily.
D Beam controller
The D Beam controller gives you control over a variety of effects,
simply by moving your hand. In conjunction with the visual
element, this can be a powerfully impressive addition to a live
performance.
Rhythm Guide function
As an alternative to the metronome, you can use more realistic
rhythm patterns as enjoyable backing for your playing.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Panel descriptions
Front panel
fig.04-01.l
A
B
E
C
D
F
I
A
EDIT Section
D BEAM CONTROLLER
[PARAM] (Parameter) button
You can apply a variety of effects to sounds simply by moving your
hand (p. 31).
This button accesses sound or performance settings (parameters).
The settings that are accessed will depend on the selected mode
(Patch/Performance) or state.
[SOLO SYNTH] (Solo Synthesizer) button
the keyboard.
This button switches effects (MFX, chorus, reverb) on/off, and
accesses effect-related settings.
[ACTIVE EXPRESS] (Active Expression) button
[UTILITY] button
This lets you use the D Beam controller for Active Expression.
In Patch/Performance modes, this button accesses various utility
functions, such as those for copying data or initializing sound
generator settings.
[ASSIGNABLE] button
This lets you assign a desired function to the D Beam controller (p.
33).
Others
B
[VOLUME] knob
This button accesses settings that affect the entire JUNO-D, such as
tuning, display contrast, and MIDI message reception.
Adjusts the overall volume that is output from the rear panel
OUTPUT jacks and PHONES jack (p. 15).
[PART SELECT] button
When this button is lit in Performance mode, you can use the direct
C
access buttons to select a part to play from the keyboard or to edit (p.
43).
MODE Section
[AUDITION] button
[PATCH] button
You can repeatedly listen to an audition phrase for the currently
selected patch (p. 22).
Switches the JUNO-D into the Patch mode (p. 42).
[PERFORMANCE] button
Switches the JUNO-D into the Performance mode (p. 42).
[DEMO] button
Accesses the demo playback function (p. 18).
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Panel descriptions
fig.04-01.r
G
H
[WRITE] button
F
Saves patch/performance settings or system settings.
[-/+OCT] (Octave Shift) / [-/+TRANSPOSE]
(Transpose) buttons
numeric keypad. This lets you directly input or specify a numerical
value for the displayed item (patch number or parameter).
- /+OCT:
These buttons adjust the pitch of the keyboard
[0]–[9] (DIRECT ACCESS buttons)
- /+TRANSPOSE: Pressing either of these buttons while holding
down [SHIFT] allows you to transpose the
In Patch mode, use these buttons to switch between the sound
categories printed on the panel (p. 20). In Performance mode, use
these buttons to directly select a performance by specifying the
lowest digit of the performance number (p. 55). However, if the
[NUMERIC] or [PART SELECT] buttons are lit, the [0]–[9] buttons
will change to the corresponding function.
keyboard in semitone steps (-5–+6) (p. 31).
[PHRASE/ARPEGGIO] button
Switches phrase/arpeggio function on/off. To make settings for the
phrase/arpeggio, make this button light and then press [PARAM]
(p. 23).
G
[CHORD MEMORY] button
[VALUE -/+] buttons
Switches chord memory function on/off. To make settings for the
chord memory function, get this button to light and then press
[PARAM] (p. 24).
Use these buttons to switch the number of an item (patch,
performance, various parameters, etc.) in the display, or to increase/
decrease a value. While one of these buttons is first held down and
the other is pressed, the value then changes rapidly. Or, if you hold
down [SHIFT] while using these buttons, the value will change in
larger steps.
D
DISPLAY
This displays information regarding the operation you are
performing.
E
[RHYTHM GUIDE] button
Switches Rhythm guide function on/off (p. 36).
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Panel descriptions
PAGE/CURSOR [ ]/[ ] /
JUMP [ ]/[ ] buttons
• If balance/LFO is selected (BALANCE/LFO
indicator lit)
PAGE/CURSOR: Use these buttons to move between pages or to
move the cursor (p. 42).
[BALANCE] knob
JUMP:
In grouped pages, you can hold down [SHIFT]
and use these buttons to move between groups
(p. 42).
Adjusts the LOWER and UPPER volume balance (p. 26).
[LFO RATE] knob
While one of these buttons is first held down and the other is
pressed, the page or cursor then moves rapidly.
Adjusts the rate of the LFO effect, such as vibrato (p. 27).
[LFO DEPTH] knob
[EXIT] button
Press this button to return to the main screen of a mode, or when you
want to cancel the current operation.
[KEY MODE] button
Switches the Key Modes (p. 44).
[ENTER] button
Use this button to finalize a value or execute an operation.
[FILTER LFO] button
This determines whether the LFO changes the filter cutoff frequency
(ON), or the pitch (OFF) (p. 27).
[SHIFT] button
By holding down this button and pressing another button, you can
access a secondary function of that button (printed below the button
in square brackets).
[CUTOFF] knob
Changes the tone’s Cutoff Frequency value (p. 29).
[TAP TEMPO] button
[RESONANCE] knob
Adjusts the tempo according to the timing at which you tap this
button. You can also use VALUE [-]/[+] to adjust the tempo if
desired (p. 37).
Changes the tone’s Resonance value (p. 29).
I
H
Pitch bend/Modulation lever
This allows you to control pitch bend or apply vibrato (p. 29).
PATCH MODIFY section
[DESTINATION TONE] button
Selects either UPPER or LOWER as the tone to be edited.
Patch Modify select button
Selects whether the three knobs located at the right will edit the
envelope or the balance and LFO.
[ATTACK] knob
[DECAY] knob
Adjusts the speed at which the sound decays while you
continue holding the key (p. 28).
[RELEASE] knob
Adjusts the length of the release after you take your finger off
the key (p. 28).
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Panel descriptions
Rear panel
fig.04-02
A
B
C
D
E
F G H
A
E
MIDI connectors (IN, OUT)
Cord hook
These connectors can be connected to other MIDI devices to receive
and transmit MIDI messages (p. 92). Use MIDI cables (sold
separately) to make connections.
To prevent the inadvertent disruption of power to your unit (should
the plug be pulled out accidentally), and to avoid applying undue
stress to the DC IN jack, anchor the power cord using the cord hook,
as shown in the illustration.
fig.CordHook.e
IN:
MIDI messages from an external device are received at this
connector.
OUT: MIDI messages are transmitted from this connector to an
external device.
Cord Hook
The cord of
the supplied
AC Adaptor
B
PEDAL jacks
To the Power Outlet
CONTROL:
An optional expression pedal (such as the EV-5), pedal switch (the
optional DP-2 or DP-8), or foot switch (the optional BOSS FS-5U) can
be connected to this jack (p. 14).
F
DC IN jack
HOLD:
Connect the AC adaptor here (p. 14).
An optional pedal switch (such as the DP-2 or DP-8) or foot switch
(the optional BOSS FS-5U) can be connected to this jack for use as a
hold pedal (p. 14).
Be sure to use only the supplied AC adaptor.
G
POWER switch
If you are using DP-8, set the DP-8’s function switch to “Switch.”
This switch turns the power on/off (p. 15).
C
H
OUTPUT jacks
Ground terminal
These jacks output stereo (L/R) audio signals to your amp or mixer.
For mono output, use the L jack.
927
Depending on the circumstances of a particular setup, you may
experience a discomforting sensation, or perceive that the surface
feels gritty to the touch when you touch this device or the metal
portions of the devices connected to it. This is due to an infinitesimal
electrical charge, which is absolutely harmless. However, if you are
concerned about this, connect the ground terminal (see figure) with
an external ground. When the unit is grounded, a slight hum may
occur, depending on the particulars of your installation. If you are
unsure of the connection method, contact the nearest Roland Service
Center, or an authorized Roland distributor, as listed on the
“Information” page.
D
PHONES jack
This is the jack for connecting headphones (sold separately) (p. 14).
Unsuitable places for connection
• Water pipes (may result in shock or electrocution)
• Gas pipes (may result in fire or explosion)
• Telephone-line ground or lightning rod (may be dangerous in
the event of lightning)
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting ready
Connecting the JUNO-D to external equipment
The JUNO-D does not contain an amp or speaker. You’ll need to listen to it through
powered monitors, a mixer and connected monitors, a stereo system, or through
headphones.
•
To prevent malfunction
and/or damage to
speakers or other
Connect as follows when using the JUNO-D as a stand-alone device.
fig.q01-01.e
devices, always turn
down the volume, and
turn off the power on all
devices before making
any connections.
Stereo headphones
•
To prevent the
inadvertent disruption
of power to your unit
(should the plug be
pulled out
accidentally), and to
avoid applying undue
stress to the AC adaptor
jack, anchor the power
cord using the cord
hook, as shown in the
illustration.
•
Use only the specified
expression pedal (EV-5;
sold separately). By
connecting any other
expression pedals, you
risk causing
AC adaptor
Audio
cable
Pedal switch (DP-2, DP-8)
or foot switch
(BOSS FS-5U)
malfunction and/or
damage to the unit.
Audio cables, MIDI
cables, and stereo
Roland
•
headphones are not
included. You will need
to purchase these items
from your dealer.
Expression pedal (EV-5)
or pedal switch
•
In order to take full
Monitor speakers
Audio set etc.
advantage of the JUNO-
D’s performance, we
recommend using a
Mixer etc.
(powered)
stereo amp/speaker
system, If you are using a
mono system, make you
connections to the
Power amp
921, 924, 925
OUTPUT jack L (MONO).
CONTROL PEDAL jack
can also accommodate
pedal switches.
1. Before starting the connection procedure, make sure that the power to all
•
devices has been turned off.
2. Connect the supplied AC adaptor to the JUNO-D, and then plug its other
end into a power outlet.
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting ready
3. Connect the JUNO-D and the external device as shown in the figure.
If you want to know how to make the connections with another external device, refer
to:
Using the JUNO-D to play an external MIDI sound module (p. 93)
Playing the JUNO-D’s sound generator from an external MIDI device (p. 94)
Recording to an external sequencer (p. 96)
Turning on/off the power
Turning on the power
Once the connections have
been completed (p. 14),
turn on power to your
various devices in the order
specified. By turning on
devices in the wrong order,
you risk causing
1. Before turning on the JUNO-D’s power, check the following:
• Are all devices connected properly?
• Are the volume controls of the JUNO-D and any other connected equipment
turned to the minimum position?
• Is the AC adapter correctly connected to the JUNO-D?
941, 942
2. Press the power switch on the rear panel of the JUNO-D to turn on the
malfunction and/or
power.
damage to speakers and
other devices.
fig.q01-02
This unit is equipped with
a protection circuit. A brief
interval (a few seconds)
after power up is required
before the unit will operate
normally.
3. Turn on the power of the connected audio devices.
4. Play the JUNO-D’s keyboard and gradually raise the volume controls of
the JUNO-D, or the connected audio equipment to an appropriate volume
level.
fig.q01-03
Turn up the JUNO-D’s
volume level carefully.
Excessive volume can
damage connected audio
devices, your hearing, or
annoy your neighbors.
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting ready
Turning off the power
1. Before you turn off the power, make sure of the following points.
• Are the volume controls of the JUNO-D and the other connected equipment
turned to the minimum position?
• Have you saved the sounds or other data you’ve created? (p. 48, p. 53, p. 59)
2. Turn off the power for all connected audio devices.
3. Turn off the JUNO-D’s power switch.
Adjusting the display contrast
(LCD CONTRAST)
The characters in the display may be difficult to view immediately after turning on
the power or after extended use; this may also be because of where and how the
display is situated. Follow the steps below to adjust the display’s contrast.
fig.q01-04
1
2
3
1. Press [SYSTEM] so it is lit.
2. Use PAGE/CURSOR [ ]/[ ] to select “LCD Contrast.”
fig.q01-05
The LCD CONTRAST
setting is saved
automatically, and is
retained even while the
power is off.
3. Use VALUE [-]/[+] to set the value (1–10).
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reset to default factory settings (Factory Reset)
This restores all data in the JUNO-D to the factory-set condition (Factory Reset).
fig.q02-01
1
2
3
4, 5
If there is important data
you’ve created that’s stored
in the JUNO-D’s internal
memory, you must note
that all such data will be
discarded when a Factory
Reset is performed. If you
want to keep the existing
data, save it using an
Be sure not to turn off the power while Factory Reset is being performed.
If the power is turned off or interrupted while data is being written to memory,
the internal data may become corrupted.
1. Press [PATCH] so it is lit and you are in Patch mode.
2. Press [UTILITY] so it is lit.
3. Use PAGE/CURSOR [ ]/[ ] to select “5:FACTORY RESET.”
external sequencer (p. 98).
fig.q02-02_40
Press [EXIT] to cancel the
factory reset.
4. Press [ENTER].
fig.q02-03_40
5. Press [ENTER] again to execute the Factory Reset.
Factory Reset can be
When the display indicates “COMPLETED,” the factory reset operation has been
completed.
executed not only from
Patch mode, but also from
the Utility functions of
Performance mode (p. 61).
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the demo songs
The JUNO-D contains Demo songs.
Here’s how to listen to the demo songs and experience the superb sounds and effects
of the JUNO-D.
fig.q03-01
1
2
3
4
1. Press [DEMO].
fig.q03-02_40
2. Use VALUE [-]/[+] to select the song that you wish to hear.
If you want to listen to all of the songs played in order, select “All Songs.”
3. Press [ENTER] to start demo song playback.
The selected song is played back repeatedly.
When “All Songs” is selected, the entire selection of song is played back repeatedly.
While the demo songs are
playing back, playing the
keyboard will not produce
sound.
4. Press [EXIT] to stop playback.
To return the keyboard to performance mode, press [EXIT] again or press [DEMO]
again so the indicator goes out.
981a, 982
•
Unsaved settings changes may be lost when you start Demo Play. Carry out
the write procedure as required to save such data before listening to the
demo songs (p. 48, p. 53, p. 59).
•
•
All rights reserved. Unauthorized use of this material for purposes other
than private, personal enjoyment is a violation of applicable laws.
No data for the music that is played will be output from MIDI OUT.
Demo songs list
The JUNO-D comes with 3 demos.
“T”
Roland Corporation
Short, sweet
Roland Corporation
Catch Me
Roland Corporation
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Try out the sounds
Selecting a patch
On the JUNO-D, the sounds you use for normal playing are called patches. A patch
is analogous to an instrument held by a member of an orchestra.
Each patch consists of two tones; an upper tone and lower tone. You can assign the
two tones to their own region of the keyboard (p. 44), and make independent settings
for each tone (p. 46).
■ Selecting a patch by category
The JUNO-D allows you to rapidly select and call up a patch by specifying the type
of patch. All the patches are organized into 10 category groups.
Button Category
Group
Category
Contents
[1]
PIANO (Pf)
PNO AC.PIANO
Acoustic Piano
Electric Piano
EP
EL.PIANO
[2]
KBD &
ORGAN (Ky)
KEY
KEYBOARDS
Other Keyboards
(Clav, Harpsichord, etc.)
Bell, Bell Pad
BEL
BELL
MLT MALLET
Mallet
ORG ORGAN
ACD ACCORDION
HRM HARMONICA
Electric and Church Organ
Accordion
Harmonica, Blues Harp
Acoustic Guitar
Electric Guitar
Distortion Guitar
Strings
Orchestra Ensemble
Orchestra Hit, Hit
Winds (Oboe, Clarinet, etc.)
Flute, Piccolo
[3]
[4]
GUITAR (Gt) AGT AC.GUITAR
EGT EL.GUITAR
DGT DIST.GUITAR
STR STRINGS
ORC ORCHESTRA
HIT HIT&STAB
WND WIND
ORCH (Oc)
FLT
WORLD (Wr) PLK
FLUTE
PLUCKED
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
Plucked (Harp, etc.)
Other Ethnic
ETH ETHNIC
FRT
BRS
SBR
SAX
BPD
SPD
FRETTED
AC.BRASS
SYNTH.BRASS
SAX
BRIGHT PAD
SOFT PAD
Fretted Inst (Mandolin, etc.)
Acoustic Brass
Synth Brass
BRASS (Br)
Sax
VOCAL &
PAD (Vo)
Bright Pad Synth
Soft Pad Synth
Vox, Choir
Hard Synth Lead
Soft Synth Lead
VOX VOX
SYNTH (Sy) HLD HARD LEAD
SLD
TEK
PLS
FX
SYN
BS
SOFT LEAD
TECHNO SYNTH Techno Synth
PULSATING
SYNTH FX
OTHER SYNTH
BASS
Pulsating Synth
Synth FX (Noise, etc.)
Poly Synth
Acoustic & Electric Bass
Synth Bass
[9]
[0]
BASS (Bs)
SBS
SYNTH.BASS
RHYTHM & DRM DRUMS
Rhythm Set
SFX (Rh)
PRC
SFX
BTS
PERCUSSION
SOUND FX
BEAT&GROOVE Beat and Groove
Percussion
Sound FX
CMB COMBINATION Other Patches
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Try out the sounds
fig.q04-02
1
2
3
1. Press [PATCH] so it is lit and you are in Patch mode.
2. Use [0]–[9] to specify the category group of the patch you want to select.
The rhythm sets are
included in [0] (p. 22).
3. Use VALUE [-]/[+] to select sounds within the category group.
You can turn [NUMERIC]
numeric keys to input a
patch number directly.
Press [ENTER] to finalize
the number (p. 43).
Selecting sounds by category
In Patch mode, the direct access buttons [0]–[9] act as category select buttons.
Since the patches you select for [0]–[9] (each category) will be remembered even
when the power is turned off, you can select ten favorite patches from the panel and
recall those patches instantly just by pressing [0]–[9].
Patch list (p. 111)
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Try out the sounds
■ Selecting patches while listening to phrases
(Patch Audition)
Without playing keyboards, you can audition the sounds using phrases that have
been pre-programmed to be suitable for the character of each patch.
fig.q04-03
1
3
1. Press [AUDITION].
The currently selected patch will begin sounding.
2. Select patches as described in Selecting a patch by category (p. 20).
3. Press [AUDITION] once again or press [EXIT] to stop the patch audition.
Selecting a rhythm set
The JUNO-D provides rhythm sets that let you play different percussion instrument
sounds or special effects from each key.
fig.q04-04
1
2
3
1. Press [PATCH] so it is lit and you are in Patch mode.
2. Press [0] to select “RHYTHM & SFX.”
3. Use VALUE [-]/[+] to switch rhythm sets.
With [0] pressed, you can
use the [0]–[9] buttons to
input a rhythm set number
directly. Press [ENTER] to
finalize the number (p. 43).
There are patches other than rhythm sets in the Rhythm & SFX category group.
Rhythm sets have “KIT,” “MENU,” or “GM2” in their names.
Rhythm set list (p. 116)
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Try out the sounds
Playing arpeggios (Phrase/Arpeggio)
An arpeggio is a “broken chord” where each note is played separately. The Phrase/
Arpeggio function lets you produce an arpeggio simply by holding down a chord,
and is also a convenient way to input a performance into an external sequencer.
Since the JUNO-D provides arpeggio templates that are suitable for the various
sounds you select, you can produce appropriate arpeggios immediately.
You can also select Phrase Template which allows you to play arpeggio using only
one key, without pressing a chord (p. 62).
fig.q04-05
1
2, 6
4
5
1. In Patch mode, press [1] to select piano sounds.
2. Press [PHRASE/ARPEGGIO] so it is lit.
3. Play the keyboard.
The instrument will play an arpeggio, according to the notes you have just voiced.
■ Changing the way in which the arpeggios are sounded
Then, try to change the way in which the arpeggios are sounded.
Settings that specify how arpeggios are sounded are provided as templates.
By switching templates, you can change the way in which the arpeggios are
sounded.
4. Press [0]–[9].
fig.q04-06_40
Play a phrase
Play an arpeggio
by pressing one key.
by pressing a chord.
It switches to an arpeggio template suitable for the selected sound.
Pressing [0] will select the user template.
User template (p. 24)
fig.q04-07a
Arpeggio template list (p.
120)
Preset (Arpeggio/Phrase) templates
User templates
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Try out the sounds
5. When you press [EXIT], the Arpeggio function will remain on and you will
return to the previous screen.
If you want to select an arpeggio template once again, press [PHRASE/ARPEGGIO]
so it goes out, and then press [PHRASE/ARPEGGIO] once again so it is lit.
The selected arpeggio template remains stored in memory even while the power is
off.
6. To finish playing arpeggios, press [PHRASE/ARPEGGIO] again so the
indicator goes out.
User template
The user template lets you set the various arpeggio template parameters as desired.
On the JUNO-D you can store eight different user templates. With [0] pressed, use
VALUE [-]/[+] to select other user templates you have created.
For further information on how to make user templates, refer to Creating your own
arpeggio template (User Template) (p. 62).
Playing a chord at the touch of a finger
(Multi-chord Memory)
Chord Memory is a function that lets you play a chord simply by touching just one
key to which a “Chord Form” has been registered. On the JUNO-D you can register
different chord forms to each key and save these chord forms as sets (multi-chord
memory) and recall them when desired. If you save typical chord progressions as
user chord sets, these are a convenient way to get immediate results, such as when
inputting music into the external sequencer.
fig.q04-08
1
Twelve chord forms have been assigned
from C to B.
1. Press [CHORD MEMORY] so it is lit.
fig.q04-09_40
The Chord Memory function will be turned on, and the chord set name will be
displayed.
2. Play the keyboard.
The chord of the specified structure will sound according to the note name of the key
you played.
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Try out the sounds
■ Switching chord sets
Then, try to change chord sets.
fig.q04-10
5
3
4
3. Use VALUE [-]/[+] to select a Chord Set.
The user chord set appears after the preset chord sets.
4. When you press [EXIT], the Multi-chord Memory function will remain on
and you will return to the previous screen.
If you want to select a chord set once again, press [CHORD MEMORY] so it goes out,
and then press [CHORD MEMORY] once again so it is lit.
The selected chord set remains stored in memory even while the power is off.
5. To turn off the Multi-chord Memory function, press [CHORD MEMORY]
Multi-chord set list (p.
again so the indicator goes out.
122)
You can create your own chord set by saving chords you have created.
For further information, refer to Creating an original chord set (User Chord Set)
(p. 64).
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the tone with the knobs (Patch Modify)
Using the five panel knobs, you can change the tone in real time.
On the JUNO-D, each patch consists of two tones; the upper tone and the lower
tone (p. 40). The way that the tones are sounded (Single/Split/Dual) is saved in each
patch, and you can change this using [KEY MODE] (p. 44).
Patch Modify applies +/-
adjustments relative to the
settings of the original tone.
Depending on the tone you
select, this may not always
produce a noticeable
■ Selecting the tone that you want to modify
(DESTINATION TONE)
change in the sound.
Use the [DESTINATION TONE] button to specify whether you will modify the
upper or the lower tone.
fig.q05-01
For a rhythm set, Patch
Modify applies to the set as
a whole.
• UPPER lit: Only the upper tone will be modified
• LOWER lit: Only the lower tone will be modified
• Both lit: Both the upper and lower tones will be modified
■ Adjusting the volume balance of the two tones
You can use a knob to control the volume balance of the upper tone and lower tone.
fig.q05-02
1 2
1. Press the patch modify select button to make the BALANCE/LFO indicator
light.
2. Turn the [BALANCE] knob.
You cannot change the
volume balance for rhythm
sets.
Turning this to the right increases the volume of the upper tone, while turning it to
the left increases that of the lower tone.
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applying various effects to the sound
■ Vibrato and Wah effects (LFO)
The LFO, short for “low frequency oscillator,” makes changes to the sound in
periodic fashion. Changing the pitch with the LFO produces the “vibrato effect,”
and by changing the filter cutoff frequency with the LFO, you get what is called the
“wah effect.”
fig.q05-03
1 2, 5
4, 7 3, 6
1. Press the patch modify select button to make the BALANCE/LFO indicator
light.
2. Make sure that [FILTER LFO] is off (unlit).
When [FILTER LFO] is off, the two LFO knobs will adjust the vibrato effect.
3. Turn the [LFO DEPTH] knob.
If it is on (lit), press
[FILTER LFO] once again
so it goes out.
Turning this to the right (clockwise) increases the depth of the undulating sound,
while turning it to the left (counterclockwise) makes the undulation shallower and
milder.
[FILTER LFO] does not
take effect on a rhythm set.
4. Turn the [LFO RATE] knob.
Turning this to the right (clockwise) increases the speed of the undulating sound,
while turning it to the left (counterclockwise) slows the undulation down.
5. Press [FILTER LFO] so it is lit.
When [FILTER LFO] is on, the two LFO knobs will adjust the wah effect.
6. Turn the [LFO DEPTH] knob.
Turning this to the right (clockwise) increases the depth of the undulating sound,
while turning it to the left (counterclockwise) makes the undulation shallower and
milder.
7. Turn the [LFO RATE] knob.
Turning this to the right (clockwise) increases the speed of the undulating sound,
while turning it to the left (counterclockwise) slows the undulation down.
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applying various effects to the sound
■ Changing the sound’s volume (ENVELOPE)
The volume continues to change from the time a key is pressed to when it is released.
A: Attack Time: The time from when the keyboard is pressed until the maximum
tonal change is reached.
D: Delay Time: The time from when the maximum tonal change is reached until the
Sustain Level is reached.
The “envelope” is the curve
that shows how the volume
of an instrument changes
from the beginning of a
note to its end. Each
S: Sustain level: Volume that is sustained while you hold down the key
R: Release Time: The time from when the keyboard is released until the sound
disappears.
musical instrument has a
distinctive type of
envelope, but this can
change depending on how
the instrument is played,
and is an important factor
in the character of the
Use the ENVELOPE 3 knobs to change the A, D, and R times.
*
Each tone has its own Sustain level, which cannot be modified.
fig.q05-04.e
sound. For example, when
a trumpet is blown strongly
it produces a piercing
A: Attack time
D: Decay time
R: Release time
Volume
Sound ends
sound with a rapid attack,
but when blown softly it
produces a gentler and
more muted attack.
Sustain
Level
Time
A
D
R
Note-on
Note-off
fig.q05-05
1
2
3
4
1. Press the patch modify select button so the ENV indicator is lit.
2. Turn the [ATTACK] knob.
Turning this to the right (clockwise) increases the time it takes for the sound to rise,
while turning it to the left (counterclockwise) shortens this time.
3. Turn the [DECAY] knob.
Turning this to the right increases the time it takes for the sound to reach the Sustain
Level, while turning it to the left shortens this time.
4. Turn the [RELEASE] knob.
Turning this to the right increases the time it takes for the sound to disappear, while
turning it to the left shortens this time.
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applying various effects to the sound
■ Changing the brightness of the sound and adding
special qualities (CUTOFF/RESONANCE)
The sound generator section of the JUNO-D contains a filter that can cut or boost
specific frequency regions of the sound. [CUTOFF] specifies the frequency (cutoff
frequency) at which the filter will begin to modify the sound, and [RESONANCE]
boosts the region near the cutoff frequency to add a distinctive character to the sound.
fig.q05-06
1
2
1. Turn the [CUTOFF] knob.
Turning this to the right (clockwise) brightens the sound, while turning it to the left
(counterclockwise) makes the sound seem darker.
2. Turn the [RESONANCE] knob.
Turning this to the right makes the sound more distinctive, while turning it to the left
reduces these characteristics.
Using a lever to modify the sound
■ Changing the sound’s pitch in real time
(Pitch Bend Lever)
While playing the keyboard, move the lever to the left to lower the pitch, or
to the right to raise the pitch.
fig.q05-07.j
Independently for each
patch, you can specify
whether the effect is to be
applied to the upper or the
lower tone (p. 46).
Pitch Bend
You can set up to a two-octave pitch bend range, adjustable in semitones.
For further information, refer to Pitch Bend Range (p. 47).
■
Adding a vibrato effect to the sound (Modulation Lever)
While playing the keyboard, move the lever away from you to add a vibrato effect.
fig.q05-08.j
Modulation
When you want to use the Modulation Lever to add effects other than vibrato, refer
to Mod (Modulation Assign) (p. 89).
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applying various effects to the sound
With an external pedal, such as an expression pedal (the optional EV-5), pedal switch
(the optional DP-2/8) or foot switch (the optional BOSS FS-5U) connected to the
CONTROL PEDAL jack, you can then use the pedal to make changes in the tone.
Just as with the Modulation lever, you can select the function affected when the
pedal is pressed.
If you are using DP-8, set
the DP-8’s function switch
to “Switch.”
For further information, refer to Pedal (Pedal Control Assign) (p. 90).
fig.q05-09
*
When you want to apply the effect that causes the sounds being played to continue playing
(called the “hold effect”), connect a pedal switch (the optional DP-2/8) or foot switch (the
optional BOSS FS-5U) to the PEDAL HOLD jack.
Shifting the keyboard range in one-octave
steps (Octave Shift)
Octave Shift is a function that shifts the pitch of the keyboard in one-octave units.
This lets you shift the range of the keyboard to the most convenient range for
playing. This is also convenient in a situation below.
When playing sounds outside the keyboard’s range
While the JUNO-D features a 61-key keyboard, with some songs you may want to
play notes even higher or lower. Also, when playing a Rhythm Set etc., there may be
percussion instruments that the JUNO-D’s keyboard is not able to access. In such
cases, you can use the Transpose function to play these notes.
fig.q05-10
1
1. Use OCT [-]/[+] to transpose the pitch.
You can transpose the pitch of the keyboard in 1 octave units (-3– +3 octaves)
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applying various effects to the sound
Moving the key range in half-steps (TRANSPOSE)
This function moves the key range in half-step units. This is convenient in situations
like the ones below.
When matching the vocalist’s register
Sometimes melodies may extend outside a vocalist’s register. Therefore, if you want
to perform with the song changed to a different key, you can play the song in a new
key while still using the same fingering as before.
When changing from a difficult key to one that is easy to play
You can use simple fingerings to play difficult songs that include numerous sharps or flats.
When playing with the tone of a transposed instrument
You can play the patches of a transposed instrument just as it is written in the score.
fig.q05-11
1
1
1. While holding down [SHIFT], press OCT [-]/[+].
You can transpose your performance over a range of -5–+6 semitones.
Waving your hand over the D Beam
(D Beam Controller)
The D Beam controller can be used simply by waving your hand over it. Of the three
buttons, one is assigned to the solo synth, another to the active expression effect, and
the third button can be assigned to the function of your choice. You can also create
effects in which the sound changes instantaneously, in a way that would not be
possible by operating a knob or the bender lever.
fig.q05-12
2
1
1. Press [SOLO SYNTH], [ACTIVE EXPRESS], or [ASSIGNABLE] so it is lit.
If you select [ASSIGNABLE], the function assigned to the D Beam controller will
appear in the display.
fig.q05-13_40
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applying various effects to the sound
2. While playing the keyboard to produce sound, place your hand over the D
Beam, and slowly move it up and down.
An effect will be applied to the sound, depending on the function that is assigned to
the D Beam controller.
3. To turn off the D Beam controller, press the button once again to turn it off.
The usable range of the D Beam controller
The following diagram shows the usable range of the D Beam controller. Waving
your hand outside this range will produce no effect.
fig.q05-14
Either [SOLO SYNTH], [ACTIVE EXPRESS], or
responding. When your hand leaves the usable range of the D
Beam controller, the button will stop blinking, and will
remain lit.
* The sensitivity of the D Beam controller will change depending
on the amount of light in the vicinity of the unit. If it does not
function as you expect, adjust the sensitivity as appropriate for
the brightness of your location (p. 34). Also, the usable range of
the D Beam controller will become extremely small when used
under strong direct sunlight. Please be aware of this when using
the D Beam controller outside.
The explanations of each
type in this manual are for
when the D Beam Polarity
is set to “NORMAL” (p. 34).
■ Effects that can be used with the D Beam controller
SOLO SYNTH
This lets you generate passages that sound as if you are playing the keyboard
rapidly. For example, if you hold down the four notes C, D, E, and G with your right
hand and move your left hand over the D Beam, a phrase such as “C D E G C D E G
...” will be repeated.
With [SOLO SYNTH]
switched on, pressing the
keyboard alone will not
result in the production of
sound. You need to move
your hand over the D Beam
while you hold down keys.
For example, you can use the D Beam to play a synth solo on a synth-lead type
harp playing.
The chord memory function also provides a chord set that contain notes of a specific
scale and is designed for use with this function (16. Scale Set).
ACTIVE EXPRESS (Active Expression)
You can use the D Beam to add expression to your playing by varying the volume
(Expression). If you set Active Expression Switch (p. 46) to “ON” for a patch whose
[KEY MODE] is set to “DUAL” (p. 44), this function will control the balance of the
two tones (Active Expression). When you use active expression, only the upper
tone will be heard at softer volumes; the lower tone will be added as the volume
increases.
Preset patches named
“AEx...” already have their
active expression switch
ON and their key mode set
to Dual.
*
After you have used the D Beam to control expression the volume will be at 0, so no sound
will be heard when you play the keyboard. To return to the normal state in which the sound
can be heard, either press [ACTIVE EXPRESS] and turn off its illumination, or switch
patches.
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applying various effects to the sound
ASSIGNABLE
Specifies a function controlled by the D Beam controller.
Value
Tx CC# Function/Parameter Changed
MODULATION
PORTA TIME
VOLUME
CC01
CC05
CC07
CC08
Vibrato Effect
Portamento Time (p. 47)
Level
The volume balance of LOWER and UP-
PER tones (p. 45)
BALANCE
PAN
CC10
CC11
CC65
CC66
CC67
CC71
CC72
CC73
CC74
CC75
CC76
CC77
CC78
CC93
CC91
CC12
Pan (p. 46)
Level
EXPRESSION
PORTAMENTO
SOSTENUTO
SOFT
RESONANCE
RELEASE TIME
ATTACK TIME
CUTOFF
Portamento Switch (p. 47)
Softens the Tone
Tone Filter Resonance (p. 48)
Tone Envelope Release Time (p. 48)
Tone Envelope Attack Time (p. 48)
Tone Filter Cutoff (p. 47)
Tone Envelope Decay Time (p. 48)
Tone LFO Rate (p. 47)
Tone LFO Depth (p. 47)
Tone LFO Delay (p. 47)
Chorus Send Level (p. 46)
Reverb Send Level (p. 46)
The parameter specified by Multi-effect
DECAY TIME
LFO RATE
LFO DEPTH
LFO DELAY
CHO SEND LEVEL
REV SEND LEVEL
MFX PARAMETER1
MFX PARAMETER2
CC13
The parameter specified by Multi-effect
Control 2 (p. 69)
AFTERTOUCH
BEND UP
BEND DOWN
----
----
----
Pitch bend effect (center → up)
Pitch bend effect (center → down)
In Patch mode, the effect will apply to the patch. In Performance mode, the effect will
apply to the patch assigned to the current part. Use [DESTINATION TONE] to
specify the tone (p. 26).
“TxCC#” refers to the controller number of control change messages sent from the
MIDI OUT connector when the D Beam controller is operated. When set to
mainly when you want to control an external sound generator with Aftertouch
messages.
*
*
When set to MFX PARAMETER1 or MFX PARAMETER2, be sure to note the following.
• When the multi-effects Type is set to 01: STEREO EQ (p. 69) or 42: LOFI (p. 83),
Level is changed regardless of whether MFX PARAMETER1 or MFX
PARAMETER2 is selected.
• When the multi-effects Type is set to 23: 2V PCH SHIFT (p. 77), or 24: FB PCH
SHIFT (p. 78), the two parameters are changed simultaneously.
When making the LFO RATE, LFO DEPTH or LFO DELAY settings, the effect achieved
differs depending on whether [FILTER LFO] is on or off. When [FILTER LFO] is off, the LFO
alters the pitch (vibrato effect). When [FILTER LFO] is on, the LFO changes the Filter Cutoff
frequency (wah effect).
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applying various effects to the sound
■ Adjusting the sensitivity of the D Beam controllers
(D BEAM SENS)
The sensitivity of the D Beam controller will change depending on the amount of
light in the vicinity of the unit. If it does not function as you expect, adjust the
sensitivity as appropriate for the brightness of your location. Increasing this value
will raise the sensitivity.
1. Press [SOLO SYNTH], [ACTIVE EXPRESS], or [ASSIGNABLE] so it is lit.
2. Press [PARAM].
3. Use PAGE/CURSOR [ ]/[ ] to select “Sens.”
fig.q05-16_40
4. Use VALUE [-]/[+] to adjust the sensitivity.
Value:
1–10
As you increase this value, the D Beam controller will become more sensitive.
Normally, you will leave it at a setting of “5.”
This setting remains stored
in memory even while the
power is off.
5. Press [EXIT] or [PARAM] to return to the previous screen.
■ Changing the polarity of the change
(D BEAM POLARITY)
By changing the D Beam Polarity setting, you can invert the direction of the effect
that is applied.
1. Press [SOLO SYNTH], [ACTIVE EXPRESS], or [ASSIGNABLE] so it is lit.
2. Press [PARAM].
3. Use PAGE/CURSOR [ ]/[ ] to select “Polarity.”
fig.q05-17_40
4. Use VALUE [-]/[+] to change the polarity.
This setting remains stored
in memory even while the
power is off.
Value:
NORMAL, REVERSE
5. Press [EXIT] or [PARAM] to return to the previous screen.
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applying various effects to the sound
Using the JUNO-D effects
Three separate effects are always available in the JUNO-D. You can independently
edit each effect’s settings.
Multi-Effects
The JUNO-D contains 47 different multi-effects, including distortion and a rotary
speaker simulation.
Chorus
Reverb
Chorus adds a sense of depth and spaciousness to patches.
Reverb adds ambient characteristics that emulate the sound of various physical
spaces, such as concert halls or auditoriums.
■ Turning effects on and off (Master Effects Switch)
fig.q05-18
1
2
3
3
Turn on a switch to enable the corresponding effect (multi-effect, chorus, reverb).
You may wish to turn these switches off when you want to listen to the unprocessed
sound while editing it, or if you are using an external effects processor and do not
want to use the built-in effects.
When shipped from the factory, all three effects are set to ON.
The On/Off settings for
each Effect affect the
1. Press [PATCH] so it is lit and you are in Patch mode.
JUNO-D as a whole (i.e.,
are system settings). This
setting remains stored in
memory even while the
2. Press [EFFECTS] so it is lit.
The on/off state of each effect (multi-effect, chorus, reverb) will be displayed.
fig.q05-19_40
3. Use PAGE/CURSOR [ ]/[ ] to select the effect type, and use VALUE
[-]/[+] to turn to switch it on/off.
When you play the keyboard in this state, the effects whose master effect switch is
turned on will be applied to the patches.
When the cursor is located at “Rev” and you want to edit the effect settings, press
PAGE/CURSOR[ ], and the effect parameters will be displayed one after another
starting with the multi-effect (MFX) parameters.
For further information, refer to Making effects settings (p. 67).
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Rhythm Guide
The Rhythm Guide provides an easy way to produce full-fledged rhythm patterns
as easily as using a metronome.
The Rhythm Guide can be used only in Performance mode, which lets you perform
on the keyboard while using drum sounds simultaneously.
Performance mode (p. 55)
Selecting a rhythm pattern
fig.q06-22
2, 4
1
3
1. Press [PERFORM] so it is lit and you are in Performance mode.
2. Press [RHYTHM GUIDE] so it is lit.
If you want to change the
part that you will play
along with the rhythm
guide, press [PART
The rhythm pattern will begin playing.
3. With the display showing the pattern name, use VALUE [-]/[+] to select a
rhythm pattern.
SELECT] so it is lit; then
use [1]–[9] to select the part
(category) that you want to
play from the keyboard.
4. Once again press [RHYTHM GUIDE] so it is unlit; the rhythm pattern will
stop.
To select a rhythm pattern without playing it
1. Press [PERFORM] so it is lit and you are in Performance mode.
2. Press [RHYTHM GUIDE] while holding down [SHIFT].
3. Use VALUE [-]/[+] to select a rhythm set.
4. Press [ENTER] to play back the rhythm pattern.
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Rhythm Guide
Switching sounds
fig.q06-22
2 3
3
1. Play the rhythm pattern.
2. Press [PART SELECT] so it is lit.
3. Press [0] so it is lit to select a rhythm set.
4. Use VALUE [-]/[+] to select the rhythm set that you want to use with the
rhythm pattern.
Change the tempo
fig.q06-22
2
1 3
When you have selected a rhythm pattern, you can specify the tempo.
1. Press [TAP TEMPO] so it is lit.
The current tempo of the pattern will be displayed.
fig.q06-02_40
BPM stands for Beats Per
Minute, and indicates the
number of quarter notes
that occur in one minute.
2. Use VALUE [-] to adjust the tempo.
3. Press [EXIT] to return to the previous screen.
Pressing a button to modify the tempo (Tap Tempo)
You can modify the tempo by the rate at which you press [TAP TEMPO].
1. At quarter-note beats, press [TAP TEMPO] three or more times at the
desired tempo.
The tempo will be calculated automatically, and set to the interval at which you
pressed the button.
The button lets you check the tempo and time signature. During the playback of the
rhythm pattern, the button will blink in red on the first beat of each measure, and in
green on subsequent beats.
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memo
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview of the JUNO-D
Patches
How the instrument is organized
On the JUNO-D, the sounds you use for normal playing (e.g., from
the keyboard) are called patches. A patch is analogous to an
instrument held by a member of an orchestra. Each patch consists of
two tones; an upper tone and lower tone. You can assign the two
tones to their own region of the keyboard, or play them together to
produce a richer sound (p. 44). Detailed settings can be made
independently for each of the two tones (p. 46).
Basic structure
Broadly speaking, the JUNO-D consists of a keyboard controller
section and a sound generator section.
fig.r01-01.e
Sound
Generator
Section
Rhythm sets
Rhythm sets are groups consisting of various percussion instrument
sounds. Since percussion instruments generally do not play
melodies, there is no need for a percussion instrument sound to be
able to play a scale on the keyboard. It is, however, more important
that as many percussion instruments as possible be available to you
at the same time. Therefore, each key (note number) of a rhythm set
Play
Keyboard Controller Section (controllers
such as keyboard, pitch bend lever, etc.)
will produce a different percussion instrument.
fig.r01-04.e
Rhythm Set
Keyboard controller section
Note Number 98 (D7)
Note Number 97 (C#7)
This section consists of the keyboard, pitch bend/modulation lever,
panel knobs and buttons, and D Beam controller. It also includes any
pedals that may be connected to the rear panel. The performance
information generated when you do things such as press/release a
key, or depress the hold pedal is sent to the sound generator section
and/or an external sound device.
Note Number 36 (C2)
Note Number 35 (B1)
Sound generator section
According to the performance data it receives from the Keyboard
Controller section, this section generates and outputs sounds from
the output jacks and headphone jack. Up to sixteen parts can each
play different sounds (patches), with a simultaneous total of up to 64
notes. This section also includes three effects (reverb, chorus, multi-
effects).
Rhythm sets
Performance
A performance is a set of sounds containing patches for the sixteen
parts used when you use the Rhythm Guide or when using the
JUNO-D with an external MIDI device.
Classification of JUNO-D sound
types
When using the JUNO-D, you will notice that a variety of different
categories come into play when working with sounds. What follows
is a simple explanation of each sound category.
Part
A part corresponds to a single musician in a band or orchestra. Since
rhythm sets to play as many as sixteen performances simultaneously.
Current part
The “current part” is the part that will sound when you play the
Tones
On the JUNO-D, the tones are the smallest unit of sound. However,
it is not possible to play a tone by itself. The patch is the unit of
sound that can be played, and the tones are the basic building blocks
keyboard.
The JUNO-D has a total of sixteen parts. For details on how to switch
the current part, refer to “Selecting a part” (p. 43).
that make up the patch.
fig.r01-02.e
Patch
Upper Tone
+
Lower Tone
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview of the JUNO-D
Temporary memory
Effects
Effects let you apply a variety of special effects to patches or rhythm sets.
You can use three effects simultaneously: chorus (which adds depth and
spaciousness), reverb (which adds reverberation), multi-effects (each
selectable from 47 types such as equalizer, overdrive, and delay).
Temporary area
This is the area that holds the data for the patch or the like that
you’ve selected using the panel buttons.
When you play the keyboard or play back an external sequence,
sound is produced based on data in the temporary area. When you
edit a patch, you do not directly modify the data in memory; rather,
you call up the data into the temporary area, and edit it there.
the power is turned off or when you select another setting. To keep
the settings you have modified, you must write them into rewritable
memory.
Number of voices
Maximum polyphony
The sound generator of the JUNO-D can produce up to 64 notes
(voices) simultaneously. If data is received that attempts to play
more than this number of voices, notes will be dropped out. When
the number of requested voices exceeds 64, the JUNO-D will give
priority to the later-played notes, and will consecutively turn off the
sounding notes. An appropriate Voice Reserve setting should be
made with respect to any Parts that you cannot do without (p. 56).
Rewritable memory
System memory
System memory stores system parameter settings that determine
how the JUNO-D functions.
Some Tones use more than two voices to create a single Tone.
For the number of voices used by each Tone, refer to “Original
tone list” (p. 109).
User memory
User memory is where you normally store the data you need. USER
memory contains 128 patches, 2 rhythm sets, 8 performances.
About memory
Patch and performance settings are stored in what is referred to as
Non-rewritable memory
Preset memory
memory. There are three kinds of memory: temporary, rewritable,
and non-rewritable.
fig.r01-05.e
Data in Preset memory cannot be rewritten. However, you can call
up settings from preset memory into the temporary area, modify
them and then store the modified data in rewritable memory.
JUNO-D
System
Presets
User
Patches:
Rhythm Sets
Patches: 128
Rhythm Sets: 2
Performances
Performances:
Arpeggio Templates: 8
Multichord Sets: 8
8
Arpeggio Templates
Arpeggio Styles
Multichord Sets:
Select
Select
Save
Temporary Area
All data stored in the user area can be stored on an external
sequencer (p. 98). If you load the saved data back into the JUNO-
D, all settings of the entire JUNO-D will return to the state by
they were in when the data was saved.
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic operation of the JUNO-D
Switching the mode
Editing parameters
The JUNO-D has numerous functions, and these functions are
organized into the following two modes. The operation of the sound
generator and the screens that appear in the display will differ
depending on the mode.
On the JUNO-D, the numerous parameters are organized into pages
so that they can be displayed efficiently within the display. To select
a parameter, move to the appropriate page. The underlined area
(cursor) in the screen will blink to indicate that you may edit that
value.
fig.r02-05
Patch mode
You will use this mode when you want to play the keyboard in a
band or a solo performance.
When you turn on the power, the JUNO-D will start up in Patch
mode. From other modes, you can press [PATCH] to enter this
mode.
cursor
All of the three built-in effects processors are used only for the patch
you are playing.
Basic procedure
The basic procedure for editing a parameter is to use PAGE/
In Patch mode you can select and edit patches, and create user
CURSOR [
]/[
] to move between pages, and use VALUE [-]/
patches.
fig.r02-01_40
[+] to modify the value in the page.
fig.r02-06
Performance mode
In cases where there are numerous pages, pages of related content
In this mode, you can simultaneously play different sounds on
sixteen parts. After turning on the power, press [PERFORM] to select
this mode. The three built-in effects processors are used in common
by the patches of each part.
are organized into groups. When editing such parameters, you can
hold down [SHIFT] and use PAGE/CURSOR [
]/[
] to jump to
You can create up to 8 user performances.
fig.r02-02_40
When using PAGE/CURSOR [
]/[
] or VALUE [-]/[+], you
can make the value change more rapidly by holding down one
button while you press the other button. Or, if you hold down
[SHIFT] while using these buttons, the value will change in
larger steps, or you can move between sound category groups
(p. 55).
PAGE/CURSOR [
]/[
] will move you more rapidly
between pages if you continue holding them down. In some
cases, you will automatically stop at the beginning of the group.
If [ENT] is indicated in the upper right of the display, you can
execute the command you have selected by pressing [ENTER].
fig.r02-05a_40
In the example above, pressing [ENTER] executes the Patch
Parameter copy (p. 49).
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic operation of the JUNO-D
Assigning a name
When one page contains two or
more settings
As an exception, in pages where you can assign a name to a patch or
performance, pressing PAGE/CURSOR [
] will not immediately
In cases such as the page shown below, use PAGE/CURSOR [
]/
take you to the next page. The cursor will move to each character in
the name, and when the cursor is located at the last character,
[
] to switch between (A), (B) and (C), and use VALUE [-]/[+] to
modify the value of each parameter.
pressing PAGE/CURSOR [
] again will take you to the next page.
Example: Master effect switch
The same applies when moving in the opposite direction.
fig.r02-08
In pages where you can assign a name, you can hold down [SHIFT]
and use PAGE/CURSOR [
]/[
] to jump to the previous or next
page.
(A)
(B)
(C)
fig.r02-07.e
Use VALUE [-] / [+] to
modify the characters.
Inputting numbers and
numerals
Press [ ].
Press [ ].
Press [ ].
On the JUNO-D, you can select a patch/performance number or
input a numerical value by using VALUE [-]/[+], or by using
[NUMERIC] [0]–[9] to input the value directly.
The cursor moves to
the next digit.
Use VALUE [-] / [+] to
modify the characters.
1. Press [NUMERIC] so it is lit.
The indication will blink.
The cursor moves to
the last digit.
Use VALUE [-] / [+] to
modify the characters.
2. Use the [0]–[9] buttons to input the number.
• Pressing [0] while holding down [SHIFT] switches the +/-
status.
3. If you want to finalize the value, press [ENTER].
The value will be finalized, and [NUMERIC] will go out.
If you decide to cancel, press [EXIT].
Moves to the next page.
By pressing VALUE [-]/[+], you can change the character at the
cursor position.
Value:
space, A–Z, a–z, 0–9, ! “ # $ % & ‘ ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = >
? @ [ ¥ ] ^ _ ` { | }
Selecting a part
On the JUNO-D you can use [0]–[9] to select parts.
There are a total of sixteen parts. Select parts as follows.
When inputting characters, you can perform the following
operations conveniently by pressing [0]–[9].
[0]: Deletes all the characters.
1. Press [PERFORM] so it is lit and you are in Performance
mode.
[1]: Displays a “.” at the cursor position.
[2]: Displays a space at the cursor position.
[3]: Displays an “A” at the cursor position.
[4]: Displays an “a” at the cursor position.
[5]: Displays a “0” at the cursor position.
[6]: Converts capital and lowercase characters.
[7]: Inserts a space at the cursor position.
[8]: Deletes a character at the cursor position and moves the
following characters to the left.
2. Press [PART SELECT] so it is lit.
3. Press the button as described below.
Part 1
Part 2
Part 3
Part 4
Part 5
Part 6
Part 7
Part 8
Part 9
Part 10
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[0]
Part 11
Part 12
Part 13
Part 14
Part 15
Part 16
[SHIFT] and [1]
[SHIFT] and [2]
[SHIFT] and [3]
[SHIFT] and [4]
[SHIFT] and [5]
[SHIFT] and [6]
[9]: (no assignment)
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating a patch (Patch mode)
To create a sound (patch) of your own on the JUNO-D, you will start
How to make the patch settings
Including the parameters that can be controlled from the panel, a
patch consists of the following types of settings.
• Settings used by the entire patch (Patch Common)
• Settings for each patch (Patch Tone)
with one of the existing patches (preset patches), and edit it to
create the desired sound. A sound you create can be saved as one of
128 user patches.
Each item that can be set is known as a parameter. When you
change the values of parameters, you are doing what is referred
to as Editing.
Collectively, these are referred to as “patch parameters.”
are sounded (Key Mode)
fig.r03-03a
also saved as part of the patch settings. For details on editing the
effect settings, refer to “Adding effects” (p. 65).
This chapter explains the procedures used in creating patches, and
the functions of the patch parameters.
If you want to edit the sound of a rhythm set, refer to “Creating
On the JUNO-D, the sound of each patch is produced by combining
two tones; the upper tone and the lower tone (p. 40). The [KEY
MODE] setting lets you specify how these two tones will be sounded
when you play the keyboard.
a rhythm set (Patch mode)” (p. 52).
Three tips for editing patches
Select a patch that is similar to the sound you wish to
create (p. 20).
SINGLE: The upper tone is played by all keys on the
keyboard.
It’s hard to create a new sound that’s exactly what you want if
you just select a patch and modify its parameters at random. It
makes sense to start with a patch whose sound is related to
what you have in mind.
SPLIT:
The keyboard will be split; the lower range plays the
lower tone, and the upper range plays the upper tone.
Choose the tone that you want to edit (p. 26)
You can assign a different instrumental sound to each of the
two tones (upper/lower) in a patch, and edit them
independently. Use [DESTINATION TONE] to choose the tone
You can change the point at which the lower and upper tones are
divided (p. 45).
DUAL:
The upper and lower tones are layered.
Editing the patch parameters
1. Press [PATCH] so it is lit and you are in Patch mode.
2. Select a patch.
If the [KEY MODE] is SINGLE, the upper tone will always
sound. If you want to hear only the lower tone while you
edit, switch [KEY MODE] to DUAL, and turn the PATCH
MODIFY section’s BALANCE knob all the way to the “L”
position.
3. Press [PARAM] so it is lit.
Now you can edit the patch parameters.
Turn Effects off (p. 65).
Use PAGE/CURSOR [
you want to edit.
]/[
] to select the parameter that
Since the JUNO-D’s effects have such a profound impact on its
sounds, turn them off to listen to the sound itself so you can
better evaluate the changes you’re making. Since you will hear
the original sound of the patch itself when the effects are turned
off, the results of your modifications will be easier to hear.
Actually, sometimes just changing effects settings can give you
the sound you want.
“Selecting patch parameters” (p. 45)
fig.r03-04_40
4. If there is an editable parameter, the cursor (underline) will
blink below its value. Now you can use VALUE [-]/[+] to
modify the value of that patch parameter.
fig.r03-05.e
cursor
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating a patch (Patch mode)
Selecting patch parameters
Making settings that apply to the
entire patch (Patch Common
parameters)
fig.r03-06
PATCH COMMON
You can edit the following Patch Common parameters.
[SHIFT]
+
PAGE/
[SHIFT]
+
PAGE/
PAGE/
CURSOR [
PAGE/
CURSOR [
You can change the name of the patch.
]
]
]
]
CURSOR [
]
CURSOR [
]
Here you can use PAGE/CURSOR [
]/[
] to move through the
characters, and use VALUE [-]/[+] to finalize the desired character.
Value:
space, A–Z, a–z, 0–9, ! “ # $ % & ‘ ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = >
PAGE/
CURSOR [
PAGE/
CURSOR [
“Assigning a name” (p. 43)
[SHIFT]
+
PAGE/
[SHIFT]
+
PAGE/
Category
Changes the category of the patch.
CURSOR [
]
CURSOR [
]
PAGE/
PAGE/
CURSOR [
]
CURSOR [
]
“Selecting a patch by category” (p. 20)
PATCH TONE
Key Mode
Specifies how the two tones will be sounded when you play the
keyboard. The indication in the display is linked to the [KEY MODE]
setting of the panel (p. 44).
PAGE/
CURSOR [
PAGE/
CURSOR [
]
]
]
]
VALUE
SINGLE:
The upper tone is played by all keys on the
keyboard.
SPLIT:
tone.
PAGE/
CURSOR [
PAGE/
CURSOR [
*
You can change the point at which the lower and
upper tones are divided (p. 45).
DUAL:
The upper and lower tones are layered.
“Changing the way that the tones are sounded (Key Mode)”
(p. 44)
Patch Level
Specifies the volume of the patch.
VALUE:
0–127
Tone Balance
Adjusts the volume balance of LOWER and UPPER. This is linked
with the operation of the [BALANCE] knob of the panel (p. 26).
VALUE:
-64 (LOWER)– +63 (UPPER)
Split Point
When “Key Mode” (p. 45) is set to SPLIT, this specifies the transition
point between the upper and lower tones.
VALUE:
A0–C8
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating a patch (Patch mode)
Split Arp
Active Exp Sw (Active Expression Switch)
When “Key Mode” (p. 45) is set to SPLIT, this specifies which tone
Turns the active expression effect (p. 32) on/off.
will be affected by the arpeggiator.
VALUE
VALUE
OFF:
ON:
Expression will affect only the volume, as usual.
produced.
UPPER:
LOWER:
BOTH:
The upper tone will be played by the arpeggiator.
The lower tone will be played by the arpeggiator.
Both the upper and lower tone will be played by the
arpeggiator.
Making settings for an individual
tone (Patch Tone parameters)
Solo Switch
You can set parameters that apply to each individual tone. The panel
[DESTINATION TONE] switch specifies which tone(s) (upper/
lower) will be affected by your settings (p. 26).
If this setting is turned on, only one note will be sounded even if you
hold down two or more keys.
This setting is effective when you want to solo using a patch for a
monophonic instrument such as sax or flute.
VALUE
If “BOTH” is selected, the value of the tone parameter assigned
to the upper tone is displayed. If you change this value, the
parameters for both Upper and Lower tones will be changed to
the same values.
OFF:
Chords can be played.
ON:
The sound will play in solo mode (monophonically).
Solo mode will be used only for the upper tone.
Solo mode will be used only for the lower tone.
UPPER:
LOWER:
No. (Original Tone Number)
ModulationDst (Modulation Destination)
For each of the two tones (upper and lower) that make up a patch,
you can select one of 640 different original tones.
Specifies the tone that will be affected by modulation (p. 29).
VALUE:
0001–0640
VALUE
UPPER:
LOWER:
BOTH:
Modulation will apply only to the upper tone.
Modulation will apply only to the lower tone.
Modulation will apply to both the upper and lower
tone.
Tone Pan
Sets the pan position (stereo location) of each tone when stereo
output is used. With an increase in the value for L, more of the
sound will be heard as coming from the left side. Similarly, more of
the sound will originate at the right if the value of R is increased.
PitchBend Dst (Pitch Bend Destination)
VALUE:
L64–0–63R
Specifies the tone that will be affected by pitch bend (p. 29).
VALUE
• Specifying the amount of signal sent to the effect
UPPER:
LOWER:
BOTH:
Pitch bend will apply only to the upper tone.
Pitch bend will apply only to the lower tone.
Pitch bend will apply to both the upper and lower
tone.
Switches the multi-effects on/bypass (off) for each tone.
VALUE:
BYPASS, ON
Modify Dest (Modify Destination)
Chorus Send Lvl (Chorus Send Level)
Specifies the tone that will be affected by adjustments to the sound
Sets the level of the signal sent to chorus for each tone.
using the panel knobs.
VALUE:
0–127
This is linked with the panel’s [DESTINATION TONE] setting (p.
26).
Reverb Send Lvl (Reverb Send Level)
VALUE
Sets the level of the signal sent to reverb for each tone.
UPPER:
LOWER:
BOTH:
Modification will apply only to the upper tone.
Modification will apply only to the lower tone.
Modification will apply to both the upper and lower
tone.
VALUE:
0–127
Coarse Tune
Adjusts the pitch of the tone’s sound up or down in semitone steps
(+/-4 octaves).
ExpressionDst (Expression Destination)
VALUE:
-48–+48
Specifies the tone that will be affected by expression.
VALUE
UPPER:
LOWER:
BOTH:
Expression will apply only to the upper tone.
Expression will apply only to the lower tone.
Expression will apply to both the upper and lower
tone.
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating a patch (Patch mode)
Fine Tune
•
Adjusting the modulation of the sound (LFO)
The LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator) applies cyclic change to the
sound. It can be applied to the pitch, cutoff frequency, or volume to
produce vibrato, wah, or tremolo effects. The original tones of the
edit the patches to adjust the speed of the LFO effect, and the depth
to which it will affect the pitch and filter cutoff frequency.
Adjusts the pitch of the tone’s sound up or down in one-cent steps
(+/- 50 cents).
VALUE:
-50–+50
One cent is 1/100th of a semitone.
•
Creating smooth pitch transitions (Portamento)
Portamento is an effect that creates a smooth transition in pitch
between one key and the next. When the Solo Switch parameter is
“ON,” you can apply portamento to create an effect similar to a
violinist changing the pitch smoothly by sliding their finger along
the fingerboard.
You cannot simultaneously adjust the pitch depth and cutoff
depth. Nor can you adjust the depth of the LFO effect on
volume. If you need to use an adjustable tremolo effect, use the
TREMOLO multi-effect (p. 84).
Filter LFO (Filter LFO Switch)
Portamento Sw (Portamento Switch)
Selects whether the LFO Depth setting will control the depth of
cutoff frequency modulation or of pitch modulation. This is linked
with the operation of the [FILTER LFO] switch of the panel (p. 27).
VALUE
Specifies whether the portamento effect will be applied (ON) or not
(OFF).
VALUE:
OFF, ON
OFF (PCH):
ON (FLT):
You can adjust the depth of the LFO’s effect on pitch.
You can adjust the depth of the LFO’s effect on the
filter cutoff frequency.
Portamento Time
When portamento is used, this specifies the time over which the
pitch will change. Higher settings will cause the pitch change to the
next note to take more time.
LFO Rate
VALUE:
0–127
with the operation of the [LFO RATE] knob of the panel (p. 27).
• Varying the sounds by the force of your
keyboard playing
VALUE:
-64–+63
LFO Depth
The force with which you play a key is expressed by a velocity
value. When you play a note strongly, a high velocity value will be
transmitted, producing a louder volume or a different tone. By
editing the Velo Sens Depth and Velo Sens Ofs values, you can
adjust the relationship between your keyboard playing strength and
the loudness of the notes that are produced.
Specifies the depth of LFO. Normally, the depth of the LFO’s effect on
pitch will change. If Filter LFO is ON, the LFO’s effect on cutoff frequency
will change. This is linked with the operation of the [LFO DEPTH]
knob of the panel (p. 27).
VALUE:
-64–+63
Velo Sens Depth (Velocity Sensitivity Depth)
LFO Delay
Higher settings of this value allow you to produce notes in a wider
range of loudness even with small changes in your playing strength.
Lower settings of this value will mean that even if you vary your
playing strength significantly, the notes that are sounded will not
have a wide range of loudness.
Adjusts the time from when the key is pressed (or released) until the
LFO begins to be applied (or the duration that the effect continues).
VALUE:
-64–+63
Adjusting the brightness or hardness of the sound
(Filter)
VALUE:
-64–+63
cut or boost specific frequency regions of the sound. Each original
tone in the JUNO-D has its own filter settings, but you can use patch
editing to modify these.
Velo Sens Ofs (Velocity Sensitivity Offset)
With higher settings of this value, loud sounds can be produced
even when you play the keys softly. With lower settings of this
value, the sounds will be soft even if you play strongly.
Cutoff Freq (Cutoff Frequency)
VALUE:
-64–+63
Specifies the frequency (cutoff frequency) at which the filter will
begin to modify the sound. This is linked with the operation of the
[CUTOFF] knob of the panel (p. 29).
Pitch Bend Range
Specifies the amount of pitch change in semitone units (maximum of
two octaves) that will occur when you operate the pitch bend lever.
The amount of change will be the same whether the lever is moved
to left or right.
VALUE:
-64–+63
VALUE:
0–24
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating a patch (Patch mode)
Resonance
Saving a patch
This boosts the region near the cutoff frequency to add a distinctive
character to the sound. Raising this value excessively may cause
oscillation and distortion. This is linked with the operation of the
[RESONANCE] knob of the panel (p. 29).
1. Press [PATCH] so it is lit and you are in Patch mode.
2. Select the patch that you want to edit.
3. Edit the patch.
VALUE:
-64–+63
•
Adjusting the attack or decay of the sound
(Envelope)
Each original tone of the JUNO-D includes envelope settings, but
you can use patch editing to apply relative adjustments to these
settings. Depending on the tone you select, editing may not produce
noticeable change in the sound. You cannot change the sustain level.
“Changing the tone with the knobs (Patch Modify)” (p. 26)
“How to make the patch settings” (p. 44).
4. When the sound is to your liking, press [WRITE].
Use VALUE [-]/[+] to specify the number in which the user
Attack Time
patch is to be saved (U001–U128).
fig.r03-01_40
Adjusts the envelope attack time. This is linked with the operation of
the [ATTACK] knob of the panel (p. 28).
VALUE:
-64–+63
As shown above, the display will show only the user patch
number if nothing has yet been saved to that number.
Decay Time
Adjusts the envelope decay time. This is linked with the operation of
the [DECAY] knob of the panel (p. 28).
If you save to a number in which a user patch has already been
saved, be aware that the previously saved settings will be
overwritten and lost.
VALUE:
-64–+63
Release Time
5. Press [ENTER].
Adjusts the envelope release time. This is linked with the operation
of the [RELEASE] knob of the panel (p. 28).
6. Use VALUE [-]/[+] to specify the category for the user patch
VALUE:
-64–+63
you want to save.
fig.r03-02_40
For more about the category, refer to “Patch categories” (p. 49).
7. Press [ENTER] once again to execute.
When the user patch has been saved, the display will indicate
“COMPLETED.” This completes the procedure.
If you decide not to save the user patch, press [EXIT].
If you do not change “Name (Patch Name)” (p. 45), the patch will
have the same name as the one you selected in step 2.
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating a patch (Patch mode)
Patch categories
Convenient functions for patch
editing (Patch Utility)
Patch Utility provides various functions that you will find
convenient when editing patches, such as copying or initializing a
patch.
On the JUNO-D, a patch you edit can be named and saved in the
desired category of sounds (User Patch). Saving an edited patch in
the appropriate category will make it easier for you to find the patch
when needed. This will also let you use arpeggiator settings that are
appropriate for your user patch.
fig.r03-03_40
Copying patch parameters
(PATCH PRM COPY)
Category
The settings of any patch can be copied to the currently selected
patch. By making good use of this function, you can edit more
efficiently. The following five parameters can be copied.
Category
Group
Category
Contents
PIANO (Pf) PNO AC.PIANO
EP EL.PIANO
KEY KEYBOARDS
Acoustic Piano
Electric Piano
Other Keyboards
(Clav, Harpsichord, etc.)
Bell, Bell Pad
Mallet
Electric and Church Or-
gan
• UPPER TONE:
Copy the settings of the upper tone.
KBD &
ORGAN
(Ky)
• LOWER TONE: Copy the settings of the lower tone.
• MFX:
Copy the multi-effect settings.
Copy the chorus settings.
Copy the reverb settings.
BEL
BELL
• CHORUS:
• REVERB:
MLT MALLET
ORG ORGAN
ACD ACCORDION
HRM HARMONICA
AGT AC.GUITAR
EGT EL.GUITAR
DGT DIST.GUITAR
Accordion
Copying the UPPER TONE or LOWER TONE
Harmonica, Blues Harp
Acoustic Guitar
Electric Guitar
Distortion Guitar
Strings
Orchestra Ensemble
Orchestra Hit, Hit
Winds (Oboe, Clarinet,
etc.)
Flute, Piccolo
Plucked (Harp, etc.)
Other Ethnic
Fretted Inst (Mandolin,
etc.)
1. Press [PATCH] so it is lit and you are in Patch mode.
GUITAR
(Gt)
Select the copy-destination patch.
2. Press [UTILITY].
ORCH (Oc) STR
ORC ORCHESTRA
HIT HIT&STAB
WND WIND
STRINGS
3. Use PAGE/CURSOR [
]/[
] to select “1:PATCH PRM
COPY.”
4. Press [ENTER].
FLT
FLUTE
5. Use VALUE [-]/[+] to select “UPPER TONE” or “LOWER
TONE.”
fig.r03-08_40
WORLD
(Wr)
PLK PLUCKED
ETH ETHNIC
FRT
FRETTED
BRASS (Br) BRS
SBR
AC.BRASS
SYNTH.BRASS
Acoustic Brass
Synth Brass
SAX SAX
VOCAL & BPD BRIGHT PAD
Sax
6. Press PAGE/CURSOR [
].
Bright Pad Synth
Soft Pad Synth
Vox, Choir
Use VALUE [-]/[+] to select the copy-source patch.
fig.r03-09_40
PAD (Vo)
SPD SOFT PAD
VOX VOX
SYNTH
(Sy)
HLD HARD LEAD
SLD SOFT LEAD
Hard Synth Lead
Soft Synth Lead
TEK TECHNO SYNTH Techno Synth
7. Press PAGE/CURSOR [
].
PLS
FX
PULSATING
SYNTH FX
Pulsating Synth
Synth FX (Noise, etc.)
Poly Synth
Use VALUE [-]/[+] to specify whether the data is to be copied to
the upper tone or the lower tone of the currently selected patch.
SYN OTHER SYNTH
BASS (Bs)
BS
SBS
BASS
SYNTH.BASS
Acoustic & Electric Bass
Synth Bass
fig.r03-10_40
RHYTHM DRM DRUMS
Rhythm Set
& SFX (Rh) PRC PERCUSSION
Percussion
SFX
BTS
SOUND FX
BEAT&GROOVE Beat and Groove
Sound FX
8. Press [ENTER].
The upper tone or lower tone settings will be copied to the
currently selected patch.
CMB COMBINATION Other Patches
When the data has been copied, the display will indicate
“COMPLETED.” This ends the procedure.
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating a patch (Patch mode)
Copying MFX, CHORUS, or REVERB effect
settings
Initializing the parameters of a patch
(PATCH INITIALIZE)
This operation initializes the currently selected patch settings.
Since all patch parameters will be initialized, this is convenient when
you want to create a sound from scratch.
1. Press [PATCH] so it is lit and you are in Patch mode.
Select the copy-destination patch.
2. Press [UTILITY].
3. Use PAGE/CURSOR [
]/[
] to select “1:PATCH PRM
COPY.”
The Initialize operation applies only to the currently selected
sound; it will not change the content of sounds stored in user
memory. If you want to restore all settings to the factory-set
condition, execute the Factory Reset operation (p. 17).
4. Press [ENTER].
5. Use VALUE [-]/[+] to select “MFX,” “CHORUS,” or
“REVERB.”
fig.r03-15_40
1. Press [PATCH] so it is lit and you are in Patch mode.
Select the patch you want to initialize.
2. Press [UTILITY].
6. Press PAGE/CURSOR [
].
3. Use PAGE/CURSOR [
]/[
] to select “2:PATCH
Use VALUE [-]/[+] to specify whether you will copy “PATCH”
effect settings or “PERFORM (Performance)” effect settings.
INITIALIZE.”
fig.r03-16_40
4. Press [ENTER].
fig.r03-20_40
7. Press PAGE/CURSOR [
].
5. Press [ENTER] once again to execute.
Copying “PATCH” effect settings
Use VALUE [-]/[+] to select the copy-source patch.
When initialization is finished, the display will indicate
“COMPLETED.” This ends the procedure.
fig.r03-17_40
Erasing a user patch you saved
(PATCH REMOVE)
Copying “PERFORM (Performance)” effect settings
Use VALUE [-]/[+] to select the copy-source performance.
fig.r03-18_40
This operation erases the specified user patch. When you erase a
patch, it will no longer be possible to select the patch of that number
using direct access buttons. If you newly save a patch in that
number, you will again be able to select it.
8. Press [ENTER].
The effect settings will be copied to the currently selected patch.
1. Press [PATCH] so it is lit and you are in Patch mode.
When the data has been copied, the display will indicate
“COMPLETED.” This ends the procedure.
2. Press [UTILITY].
3. Use PAGE/CURSOR [
]/[
] to select “3:PATCH
REMOVE.”
4. Press [ENTER].
ig.r03-22_40
5. Use VALUE [-]/[+] to select the user patch that you want to
erase.
6. Press [ENTER].
When the data has been erased, the display will indicate
“COMPLETED.” This ends the procedure.
50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating a patch (Patch mode)
Transmitting all data stored in the user
area
5. Use VALUE [-]/[+] to select “DUMP ALL.”
fig.r06-77_40
Transmitting patch/rhythm set
settings from the MIDI OUT
connector (XFER to MIDI)
You can transmit the settings of any patch from the MIDI OUT
connector. This function can be used to save patch settings on an
external sequencer. If you select “DUMP ALL” for the menu, you
can transmit all data stored in the user area to an external sequencer.
6. Press [ENTER].
All data stored in the user area will be transmitted from the
MIDI OUT connector.
1. Press [PATCH] so it is lit and you are in Patch mode.
Select the patch or the rhythm set you want to output.
When the display indicates “COMPLETED,” the transmission
operation has been completed.
2. Press [UTILITY].
3. Use PAGE/CURSOR [
]/[
] to select “4:XFER to MIDI.”
4. Press [ENTER].
If you want to restore the stored data into the JUNO-D once
Transmitting the settings of currently
selected patch
5. Use VALUE [-]/[+] to select “CURRENT PATCH.”
Restoring the factory settings
(FACTORY RESET)
You can also perform the FACTORY RESET operation from Patch
Utility.
6. Press [ENTER].
The selected patch settings will be transmitted from the MIDI
OUT connector.
For more about FACTORY RESET, refer to “Reset to default
factory settings (Factory Reset)” (p. 17).
After the data has been transmitted, the display will indicate
“COMPLETED.” This ends the procedure.
Transmitting the settings of a user
patch
5. Use VALUE [-]/[+] to select “USER PATCHES.”
6. Press PAGE/CURSOR [
].
Use VALUE [-]/[+] to specify the first number of the range of
user patch numbers that you want to transmit.
fig.r03-24_40
7. Press PAGE/CURSOR [
].
Use VALUE [-]/[+] to specify the last number of the range of
user patch numbers that you want to transmit.
fig.r03-25_40
8. Press [ENTER].
The selected patch settings will be transmitted from the MIDI
OUT connector.
After the data has been transmitted, the display will indicate
“COMPLETED.” This ends the procedure.
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating a rhythm set (Patch mode)
The JUNO-D provides rhythm sets that are suitable for a variety of
Making settings that apply to the
musical genres. You can edit a preset rhythm set to modify the
entire rhythm set (Rhythm Common
pitch/volume/panning of each percussion instrument sound to
your liking, and save it as a user rhythm set.
parameters)
You can edit the following Rhythm Common parameters.
Name (Rhythm Set Name)
How to make the rhythm set
You can change the name of the rhythm set.
settings
Here you can use PAGE/CURSOR [
]/[
] to move through the
A rhythm set consists of the following types of settings.
characters, and use VALUE [-]/[+] to finalize the desired character.
•
•
Settings used by the entire rhythm set (Rhythm Common)
Settings for each rhythm tone (key) (Rhythm Tone)
Value:
space, A–Z, a–z, 0–9, ! “ # $ % & ‘ ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = >
? @ [ ¥ ] ^ _ ` { | }
Collectively, these are referred to as “rhythm set parameters.”
For further information, refer to “Assigning a name” (p. 43).
Editing the rhythm set parameters
1. Press [PATCH] so it is lit and you are in Patch mode.
Editing the settings of each rhythm
tone (key) (Rhythm Tone parameters)
A rhythm set assigns a different instrument to each key. For each of
these instrumental sounds, you can edit the following parameters.
2. Select a rhythm set (p. 22).
fig.r04-03_40
Press a key to select the rhythm tone that you want to edit.
fig.r04-06
3. Press [PARAM] so it is lit.
Now you can edit the rhythm set parameters.
Use PAGE/CURSOR [
you want to edit.
]/[
] to select the parameter that
4. If there is an editable parameter, the cursor (underline) will
blink below its value. Now you can use VALUE [-]/[+] to
modify the value of that patch parameter.
fig.r04-04.e
cursor
Pitch
Adjusts the pitch of the percussive sound in semitone steps.
Selecting rhythm set parameters
VALUE:
-60–+67
fig.r04-05
Level
RHYTHM COMMON
Specifies the volume of the percussive sound.
VALUE:
0–127
[SHIFT]
+
[SHIFT]
+
Pan
PAGE/
PAGE/
PAGE/
PAGE/
CURSOR [
]
CURSOR [
]
Sets the pan position (stereo location) of each percussive sound
when stereo output is used. With an increase in the value for L, more
of the sound will be heard as coming from the left side. Similarly,
more of the sound will originate at the right if the value of R is
increased.
CURSOR [
]
CURSOR [
]
RHYTHM TONE
When set to RND (RANDOM), you obtain a specialized effect whereby
the sound randomly moves left and right with each press of a key.
PAGE/
CURSOR [
PAGE/
CURSOR [
]
]
]
]
VALUE:
RND, L63–0–63R
PAGE/
CURSOR [
PAGE/
CURSOR [
52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating a rhythm set (Patch mode)
• Specifying the amount of signal sent to the effect
Convenient functions for
rhythm set editing (Rhythm Set
Utility)
Rhythm Set Utility provides functions that you will find convenient
when editing a rhythm set, such as initializing a rhythm tone or
copying effect settings.
Chorus Send Lvl (Chorus Send Level)
Sets the level of the signal sent to chorus for each tone.
VALUE:
0–127
Reverb Send Lvl (Reverb Send Level)
Sets the level of the signal sent to reverb for each tone.
VALUE:
0–127
Copying effect settings from a
rhythm set (RHY PRM COPY)
This operation copies effect settings from an existing rhythm set to
the currently selected rhythm set. The following three parameters
can be copied.
Saving a rhythm set (User
Rhythm Set)
• MFX:
Copy the multi-effect settings.
• CHORUS: Copy the chorus settings.
• REVERB: Copy the reverb settings.
2. Select the rhythm set that you want to edit.
3. Edit the rhythm set and its rhythm tones.
1. Press [PATCH] so it is lit and you are in Patch mode.
Select the copy-destination rhythm set.
2. Press [UTILITY].
“Making settings that apply to the entire rhythm set (Rhythm
Common parameters)” (p. 52)
3. Use PAGE/CURSOR [
]/[
] to select “1:RHY PRM
COPY.”
“Editing the settings of each rhythm tone (key) (Rhythm
Tone parameters)” (p. 52)
4. Press [ENTER].
5. Use VALUE [-]/[+] to select “MFX,” “CHORUS,” or
“REVERB.”
fig.r04-15_40
The patch modify settings (p. 26) are not saved for rhythm sets.
4. When the rhythm set is to your liking, press [WRITE].
Use VALUE [-]/[+] to specify the number in which the rhythm
set is to be saved (U01–U02).
fig.r04-01_40
6. Press PAGE/CURSOR [
].
Use VALUE [-]/[+] to specify whether you will copy
“RHYTHM” effect settings or “PERFORM (Performance)” effect
settings.
As shown above, the display will show only the rhythm set
number if nothing has yet been saved to that number.
7. Press PAGE/CURSOR [
].
Copying “RHYTHM” effect settings
Select the copy-source rhythm set.
fig.r04-16_40
already been saved.
Copying “PERFORM (Performance)” effect settings
5. Press [ENTER].
Select the copy-source performance.
Unlike a patch, a rhythm set is always saved in the “RHYTHM &
SFX” category group “DRM” (DRUMS).
fig.r04-17_40
8. Press [ENTER].
(p. 49).
The effect settings will be copied to the currently selected
rhythm set.
When the rhythm set has been saved, the display will indicate
“COMPLETED.” This completes the procedure.
When the data has been copied, the display will indicate
“COMPLETED.” This ends the procedure.
If you decide not to save the rhythm set, press [EXIT].
If you do not change “Name (Rhythm Set Name)” (p. 52), the
rhythm set will have the same name as the one you selected in step 2.
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating a rhythm set (Patch mode)
Initializing the settings of a specific
rhythm tone (RHY INITIALIZE)
Erasing a rhythm set you saved
(RHY REMOVE)
This operation erases the specified user rhythm set. When you erase
a rhythm set, it will no longer be possible to select the rhythm set of
that number. If you newly save a rhythm set in that number, you
will again be able to select it.
This operation initializes the rhythm tone parameters (p. 52) to the
state of the preset rhythm tone before its parameters were edited.
If you want to return all parameters of the selected rhythm set to
the preset state, simply re-select the preset rhythm set from
which you started editing.
1. Press [PATCH] so it is lit and you are in Patch mode.
2. Press [UTILITY].
3. Use PAGE/CURSOR [
]/[
] to select “3:RHY REMOVE.”
The Initialize operation applies only to the currently selected
tone; it will not change the content of other sounds stored in user
memory. If you want to restore all settings to the factory-set
condition, execute the Factory Reset operation (p. 17).
4. Press [ENTER].
fig.r04-21_40
1. Press [PATCH] so it is lit and you are in Patch mode.
5. Use VALUE [-]/[+] to select the user rhythm set that you want
to erase.
2. Select the rhythm set that contains the rhythm tone you
want to initialize.
6. Press [ENTER].
3. Press [UTILITY].
When the data has been erased, the display will indicate
“COMPLETED.” This ends the procedure.
4. Use PAGE/CURSOR [
]/[
] to select “2:RHY INITIALIZE.”
5. Press [ENTER].
fig.r04-19_40
Refer to Creating a Patch (Patch Mode) (p. 51) about Transmitting
patch/rhythm settings from the MIDI OUT connector (XFER to
MIDI), or Restoring the factory settings (FACTORY RESET).
6. Use VALUE [-]/[+] to select the rhythm tone that you want to
initialize.
VALUE:
A 0 (key#21)–C 8 (key#108)
You can also press a key to select the rhythm tone to edit.
7. Press [ENTER] once again to execute.
When initialization is finished, the display will indicate
“COMPLETED.” This ends the procedure.
54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing more than one sound simultaneously (Performance mode)
Using the direct access buttons
Choosing a part and selecting
•
When not using the [NUMERIC] function
Use the [0]–[9] buttons to input a number.
The upper digit will remain fixed, and only the lower digit will
change. This is a convenient way to step through the numbers in
succession.
the sound
A performance contains sixteen parts that let you play different
patch (or rhythm set) to each part.
You do not need to press [ENTER] after making your selection.
The number you select will take effect immediately, and the
performance will be selected.
1. Press [PERFORM] so it is lit and you are in Performance
mode.
2. Press [PART SELECT] so it is lit, and use [0]–[9] to select a
part.
•
When using the [NUMERIC] function
1. Press [NUMERIC] so it is lit.
Press [0] to select part 10 (Rhythm). To select the parts 11–16,
hold down [SHIFT] and press [1]–[6] (p. 43).
2. Use the [0]–[9] buttons to input a two-digit number.
The indication will blink.
3. Use VALUE [-]/[+] to specify a patch or a rhythm set for the
part.
3. If you want to finalize the value, press [ENTER].
The value will be finalized, and [NUMERIC] will go out.
If you decide to cancel, press [EXIT].
You can also select a patch using the [NUMERIC] function.
Assigning patches of the same category to
multiple parts
User performances will be displayed after the end of the preset
performances. You can hold down [SHIFT] and use PAGE/
While [PART SELECT] is lit, you can hold down [SHIFT] and use
CURSOR [
]/[
] to switch between display of user and
PAGE/CURSOR [
]/[
] to step through the categories
preset performances.
assigned to each part, selecting patches of the previous or next
category group regardless of the button that is selected. This lets
you assign patches of other categories than printed on the panel
to each part. For example, if you want to prepare multiple patches
of the same category, such as two types of organ, you can use the
above method to select organ patches for a category that you do
not use.
performance
The performances of the JUNO-D contain settings that are made for
the entire performance, and settings that are made individually for
each part of the performance.
Quickly and consecutively auditioning the
built-in sound of the JUNO-D /
Viewing a list of just the user patches
Settings made for the entire performance are:
•
Settings for the entire performance, such as the performance
name (p. 55)
Using the above procedure, you can listen consecutively to all
the built-in sounds of the JUNO-D without pressing a category
select button. Among the user patches organized into category
groups, you can also view a list of just the user patches. Hold
•
Effect settings for the performance (p. 56)
Settings made individually for each part of the performance are:
•
•
Performance part settings (p. 56)
Effect settings for performance parts (p. 58)
down [SHIFT] and press [
] to switch categories, and after the
“Bass” category you will see the user patches (u001–u128)
displayed as a category.
Making settings that apply to the
entire performance
* Only when viewing a list, the “u” at the beginning of user patch
numbers will be displayed as a lowercase character.
1. Press [PERFORM] so it is lit and you are in Performance
mode.
2. Select a performance.
3. Press [PARAM] so it is lit.
fig.r06-50_40
Selecting performance numbers
Press [PART SELECT] so it will go out.
Using VALUE [-]/[+]
4. Use PAGE/CURSOR [
]/[
] to select a parameter, and
Pressing VALUE [-]/[+] will select the performance that precedes or
follows the currently selected performance.
use VALUE [-]/[+] to specify its value.
You can modify the following parameters.
You do not need to press [ENTER] after making your selection. The
number you select will take effect immediately, and the performance
will be selected.
To save the edited performance, refer to “Saving a
performance” (p. 59).
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing more than one sound simultaneously (Performance mode)
Making settings that apply to the
entire performance (Performance
Common Parameters)
performance
In Performance mode you can press [EFFECTS] to edit the effect
settings of a performance. For details, refer to “Adding effects” (p.
Name (Performance Name)
65).
You can change the name of the performance.
Here you can use PAGE/CURSOR [
]/[
] to move through the
To save the edited performance, refer to “Saving a
characters, and use VALUE [-]/[+] to finalize the desired character.
performance” (p. 59).
Value:
space, A–Z, a–z, 0–9, ! “ # $ % & ‘ ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = >
? @ [ ¥ ] ^ _ ` { | }
Editing the part settings of a
performance (Part Setup)
For further information, refer to “Assigning a name” (p. 43).
1. Press [PERFORM] so it is lit and you are in Performance
Voice Rsv 1–16 (Voice Reserve 1–16)
mode.
The sound generator of the JUNO-D can produce up to 64 notes
(voices) simultaneously. If data is received that attempts to play
more than this number of voices, notes will be dropped out. The
JUNO-D has a voice reserve setting that lets you allocate a
minimum number of voices for each part. For example, if you set
Voice Reserve to “10” for part 16, ten voices each for upper and
lower tones will be allocated for part 16, even if the total number of
voices being sounded by the JUNO-D reaches the maximum of 64. In
this way, consider the number of sounds you want to play and the
number of tones in the patch you are using, and set the Voice
2. Select a performance.
3. Press [PART SELECT] so it is lit.
4. Press [PARAM] so it is lit.
5. Use [0]–[9] to select the part whose settings you want to edit.
(p. 43).
Now you can edit the Part Setup parameters.
6. Use PAGE/CURSOR [
]/[
] to select a parameter, and
Reserve of each part accordingly.
fig.r06-53_40
use VALUE [-]/[+] to specify its value.
You can modify the following parameters.
To save the edited performance, refer to “Saving a
:
performance” (p. 59).
Part parameters of a performance
(Part Setup Parameters)
Value:
0–32
Level (Part Level)
You cannot make settings that would cause the total of all parts
to exceed 32.
Sets the volume of each part. This is mainly used to achieve the
volume balance between Parts.
Level (Performance Level)
Value:
0–127
Specifies the volume of the performance.
Pan (Part Pan)
Value:
0–127
When stereo output is used, this setting sets the pan position (stereo
location) of each Part. With an increase in the value for L, more of the
sound will be heard as coming from the left side. Similarly, more of
the sound will originate at the right if the value of R is increased.
When set to RND (random), you obtain a specialized effect whereby
the sound randomly moves left and right with each key stroke.
MFX Source
When the MFX effect is applied in Performance mode, this specifies
whether the effect will use the parameters of the performance itself,
or the parameters of the patch assigned to the part (p. 65).
fig.r06-54_40
Value:
RND, L63–0–63R
VALUE
PERFORM:
The MFX effect will be applied according to the
effect parameters of the performance itself.
PART1–PART16: The MFX effect will be applied according to the
parameters of the patch that is selected for the
part.
56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing more than one sound simultaneously (Performance mode)
Receive Ch (Receive Channel)
Part Patch Edit
fig.r06-54b_40
In Performance mode, the JUNO-D will operate as a sixteen-part
MIDI multitimbral sound module. This parameter specifies the MIDI
receive channel for each part.
The patch assigned to each part can also be edited from Performance
mode. You can press [ENTER], and edit the patch parameters and
save the patch in the same way as from Patch mode (p. 44).
If you decide to stop editing the patch, press [EXIT] to return to the
above screen.
Value:
1–16
Each part of performance “P32: SEQ Template” is set to the
following channels.
PART [1]
PART [2]
PART [3]
PART [4]
PART [5]
PART [6]
PART [7]
PART [8]
PART [9]
(PIANO)
Ch.1
(KBD & ORGAN)
(GUITAR)
(ORCH)
Ch.2
Ch.3
Ch.4
(WORLD)
(BRASS)
Ch.5
Patch mode and Performance mode share the same patches.
This means that if you save a patch in one of these modes, the
newly saved patch will sound if you select it in the other mode.
To avoid problems, such as unintended changes in the sound of
patches you are using in Performance mode, please be aware of
this when you save patches.
Ch.6
(VOCAL & PAD)
(SYNTH)
Ch.7
Ch.8
(BASS)
Ch.9
PART [10 (0)] (RHYTHM & SFX)
PART [11]
Ch.10
Ch.11
Ch.12
Ch.13
Ch.14
Ch.15
Ch.16
If the same patch happens to be selected in both Patch mode
and Performance mode, and you save the patch in one mode
and then switch modes, the patch will still sound in accord with
the settings prior to the save. However, once you re-select the
patch or the performance again, the patch will then sound in
accord with the newly saved settings.
PART [12]
PART [13]
PART [14]
PART [15]
PART [16]
Receive Sw (Receive Switch)
Normally, you will leave this “ON.” If you want to use an external
sound module to play a certain part, you can turn this “OFF” to
mute the internal sound generator for that part.
Value:
OFF, ON
The JUNO-D’s keyboard will not play internal sound generator
parts whose Receive Switch is turned OFF.
Receive Prg Chg (Receive Program Change
Switch)
For each part, specify whether MIDI Program Change messages will
be received (ON), or not (OFF).
Value:
OFF, ON
Receive Bank Sel (Receive Bank Select Switch)
For each part, specify whether MIDI Bank Select messages will be
received (ON), or not (OFF).
Value:
OFF, ON
Scale Tune
fig.r06-54d_40
You can specify a different tuning (Scale Tune setting) for each part.
Press [ENTER] to access the Scale Tune setting screen. For details,
refer to “Editing the scale tune settings (SCALE TUNE)” (p. 58).
If you want to edit the scale tune for Patch mode, refer to
“Making scale tune settings for a patch (PATCH SCALE)” (p.
91).
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing more than one sound simultaneously (Performance mode)
Editing the scale tune settings
The Scale Tune function lets you use a variety of tunings. For each
semitone).
Editing the effect settings for each
(Performance Part Effect)
1. Press [PERFORM] so it is lit and you are in Performance
mode.
Scale Tune settings are made independently for each part.
2. Select a performance.
3. Press [PART SELECT] so it is lit.
If you want to edit the scale tune for Patch mode, refer to
“Making scale tune settings for a patch (PATCH SCALE)” (p.
4. Use [0]–[9] to select the part whose settings you want to
91).
edit.
To select the parts 11–16, hold down [SHIFT] and press [1]–[6]
(p. 43).
1. Select the part setup parameter “Scale Tune” (p. 57).
2. Press [ENTER].
fig.r06-54c_40
5. Press [EFFECTS] so it is lit.
parameters.
6. Use PAGE/CURSOR [
]/[
] to select a parameter, and
3. Use PAGE/CURSOR [
]/[
] to select “Type” or “Tune”,
use VALUE [-]/[+] to specify the value.
and use VALUE [-]/[+] to specify its value.
You can modify the following parameters.
4. Press [EXIT] to return to the above screen.
Type (Part Scale Tune Type)
To save the edited performance, refer to “Saving a
performance” (p. 59).
You can switch the “Type” parameter to recall various sample
settings for Scale Tune. When you change “Type,” all scale tune
parameters will be changed automatically.
Master Effects Switch
The Master Effect Switch can also be set here. For details, refer to
“Turning the effect function on and off (MASTER EFFECT
SWITCH)” (p. 65).
EQUAL (Equal Temperament):
This tuning divides the octave into 12 equal parts, and is the
most widely used method of temperament used in Western
music.
MFX Switch
JUST (maj) in C (Just Temperament (major):
Switches the multi-effect on/bypass (off) in each Part.
Compared with equal temperament, the principle triads sound
pure in this tuning. However, this effect is achieved only in one
key, and chords will become ambiguous if you transpose.
JUST (min) in C (Just Temperament (minor):
Value:
BYPASS, ON
Chorus Send Lvl (Chorus Send Level)
Sets the amount of chorus effect applied in each Part.
Compared with equal temperament, the principle triads sound
pure in this tuning. However, this effect is achieved only in one
key, and chords will become ambiguous if you transpose.
ARABIC (Arabian Scale):
Value:
0–127
Reverb Send Lvl (Reverb Send Level)
Sets the amount of reverb effect applied in each Part.
In this scale, E and B are a quarter note lower and C#, F# and G#
are a quarter-note higher compared to equal temperament. The
intervals between G and B, C and E, F and G#, Bb and C#, and Eb
and F# have a natural third–the interval between a major third
and a minor third.
Value:
0–127
Tune C–B (Part Scale Tune C–B)
Make scale tune settings for each part.
Value:
-64–+63
58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing more than one sound simultaneously (Performance mode)
fig.r06-55_40
Saving a performance
Use the following procedure to save a performance you’ve edited.
8. Press [ENTER].
1. Press [WRITE].
Use VALUE [-]/[+] to specify the number (U1–U8) at which the
When the user performance has been saved, the display will indicate
“COMPLETED.”
user performance is to be saved.
fig.r06-55_40
If you decide not to save the user performance, press [EXIT].
If you do not change “Name (Performance Name)” (p. 56), the
performance will have the same name as the one you have been
editing.
Be aware that if you choose a number in which a user
performance has already been saved, the previously saved
settings will be overwritten and lost.
Convenient functions for
performance editing
(Performance Utility)
2. Press [ENTER].
If you have edited patches for some parts, the following message
will appear.
fig.r06-55a_40
Performance Utility provides various functions that you will find
convenient when editing performances, allowing you to do things
such as copy or initialize a performance.
If you have not edited any of the patches in the performance, the
user performance has been saved and the display will indicate
“COMPLETED.”
Copying part or effect parameters
(PERFORM PRM COPY)
This operation copies the settings of a specified performance to the
current performance. By using this you can edit more efficiently. The
following four parameters can be copied. Effect-related parameters
can also be copied from a patch.
3. If you want to save the edited patch, press [ENTER].
The display will indicate the part where the edited patch is used.
Use VALUE [-]/[+] to specify the number (U001–U128) at which
the user patch is to be saved.
fig.r06-55b_40
• PART:
Copy settings made for each part (p. 56).
Copy multi-effect settings.
Copy chorus settings.
• MFX:
If you decide not to save the user patch, press [EXIT].
• CHORUS:
• REVERB:
Copy reverb settings.
Be aware that if you choose a number in which a user patch has
already been saved, the previously saved settings will be
overwritten and lost.
Copying settings made for each part of a
performance
mode.
4. Press [ENTER].
5. Use VALUE [-]/[+] to specify the category for the user patch
Select the copy-destination performance.
you want to save.
fig.r06-55c_40
2. Press [UTILITY].
3. Use PAGE/CURSOR [
]/[
] to select “1:PERFORM PRM
COPY.”
4. Press [ENTER].
For more about the category, refer to “Patch categories” (p. 49)
5. Use VALUE [-]/[+] to select “PART.”
6. Press [ENTER] once again to execute.
When the patch has been saved, the display will indicate
“COMPLETED.”
fig.r06-64_40
If there are more patches that have been edited, the parts that
use such patches will be shown in a consecutive manner.
Repeat steps 3.–6.
6. Press PAGE/CURSOR [
].
Use VALUE [-]/[+] to select the copy-source performance.
fig.r06-65_40
7. Once all the necessary patches have been saved, you are
returned to the screen you were in at step 1.
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing more than one sound simultaneously (Performance mode)
7. Press PAGE/CURSOR [
].
When copying “PERFORM (Performance)” effect settings
Use VALUE [-]/[+] to select the performance whose effect
settings you want to copy.
Use VALUE [-]/[+] to specify the copy-source part.
fig.r06-66_40
fig.r06-75_40
You can also select the part by pressing [0]–[9] or by holding
down [SHIFT] and pressing [1]–[6].
8. Press [ENTER].
performance.
8. Press PAGE/CURSOR [
].
Use VALUE [-]/[+] to specify the copy-destination part.
When the display indicates “COMPLETED,” the copy operation has
been completed.
fig.r06-67_40
If you copy multi-effect settings, those settings will be pasted
into the effect parameters of the performance, regardless of the
MFX Source setting (p. 56). This means that if the MFX Source is
set to “PART” for either or both the copy source and copy
destination, you may not be able to tell that the copy made any
difference. If the MFX Source of the current performance is set to
“PART,” change it to “PERFORM.” Additionally, if MFX Source
of the copy source is set to “PART,” you will need to select
“PATCH” in the above step 6, and select the patch assigned to
that part in step 7 to copy the effect settings of the patch.
You can also select the part by pressing [0]–[9] or by holding
down [SHIFT] and pressing [1]–[6].
9. Press [ENTER].
Settings made for each part of the performance will be copied to
the currently selected performance.
When the display indicates “COMPLETED,” the copy operation has
been completed.
Copying effect settings
1. Press [PERFORM] so it is lit and you are in Performance
mode.
Initializing the parameters of a
performance (PERFORM INIT)
Select the copy-destination performance.
This operation initializes the performance settings.
2. Press [UTILITY].
convenient when you want to create a performance from scratch.
3. Use PAGE/CURSOR [
]/[
] to select “1:PERFORM PRM
COPY.”
4. Press [ENTER].
The Initialize operation applies only to the currently selected
performance; it will not change the content of other
performances stored in user memory. If you want to restore all
settings to the factory-set condition, execute the Factory Reset
operation (p. 17).
5. Use VALUE [-]/[+] to select “MFX,” “CHORUS,” or
“REVERB.”
fig.r06-72_40
1. Press [PERFORM] so it is lit and you are in Performance
mode.
6. Press PAGE/CURSOR [
].
Select a performance you want to initialize.
Use VALUE [-]/[+] to specify whether you will copy “PATCH”
effect settings or “PERFORM (performance)” effect settings.
2. Press [UTILITY].
fig.r06-73_40
3. Use PAGE/CURSOR [
]/[
] to select “2:PERFORM INIT.”
4. Press [ENTER].
fig.r06-60g_40
7. Press PAGE/CURSOR [
].
When copying “PATCH” effect settings
Use VALUE [-]/[+] to select the patch whose effect settings you
want to copy.
5. Press [ENTER] once again to execute.
fig.r06-74_40
When initialization is finished, the display will indicate
“COMPLETED.” This ends the procedure.
60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing more than one sound simultaneously (Performance mode)
8. Press [ENTER].
Transmitting performance settings
The performance settings of the specified range will be
transmitted from the MIDI OUT connector.
from the MIDI OUT connector (XFER
to MIDI)
When the display indicates “COMPLETED,” the transmission
operation has been completed.
You can transmit the settings of the current performance or user
performance from the MIDI OUT connector. This function lets you
save performance settings on an external sequencer. If you select
“DUMP ALL” for the menu, you can transmit all data stored in the
user area to an external sequencer.all data stored in the user area
Transmitting all data stored in the user
area
1. Press [PERFORM] so it is lit and you are in Performance
mode.
5. Use VALUE [-]/[+] to select “DUMP ALL.”
fig.r06-77_40
Select the performance you want to output.
2. Press [UTILITY].
6. Press [ENTER].
3. Use PAGE/CURSOR [
]/[
] to select “3:XFER to MIDI.”
All data stored in the user area will be transmitted from the
MIDI OUT connector.
4. Press [ENTER].
When the display indicates “COMPLETED,” the transmission
operation has been completed.
Transmitting the settings of currently
selected performance
This operation lets you transmit the settings of the current (edited
If you want to restore the stored data into the JUNO-D once
and unsaved) performance.
5. Use VALUE [-]/[+] to select “CUR PERFORM.”
fig.r06-76_40
Restoring the factory settings
(FACTORY RESET)
6. Press [ENTER].
You can also perform the FACTORY RESET operation from
Performance Utility.
The currently selected performance settings will be transmitted
from the MIDI OUT connector.
For more about FACTORY RESET, refer to “Reset to default
factory settings (Factory Reset)” (p. 17).
When the display indicates “COMPLETED,” the transmission has
been completed.
Transmitting the settings of a user
performance
5. Use VALUE [-]/[+] to select “USER PERFORM.”
fig.r06-77_40
6. Press PAGE/CURSOR [
].
Specify the range of performances whose settings you want to
transmit.
Use VALUE [-]/[+] to specify the first performance of the range
of performances you want to transmit.
fig.r06-78_40
7. Press PAGE/CURSOR [
].
Use VALUE [-]/[+] to specify the last performance of the range
of performances you want to transmit.
fig.r06-79_40
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the phrase/arpeggio function
The JUNO-D provides arpeggio templates that use phrases suitable
for each category of instrument. Some of the arpeggio templates are
Be aware that if you choose a number in which a user template
phrase templates, which let you produce arpeggios with a single
has already been saved, the previously saved settings will be
finger, without having to hold down a chord.
overwritten and lost.
6. Press [ENTER].
“Playing arpeggios (Phrase/Arpeggio)” (p. 23)
When the user template has been saved, the display will indicate
1. Press [PHRASE/ARPEGGIO] so it is lit.
fig.r06-22a_40
“COMPLETED.”
If you decide not to save the user template, press [EXIT].
2. Press [0]–[9] to choose the arpeggio template you want to
use.
Now when you use the arpeggiator, you can press [0] and select the
user template you just saved.
Play a chord on the keyboard. An arpeggio will begin playing
according to the notes in the chord you play. Select a template or
style you like.
User template parameter list
Style (Arpeggio Style)
If you select a phrase template, press only one key. If you play a
chord, the phrase will play according to the last-played key.
Specifies the basic way in which the arpeggio will be played.
fig.r06-22b_40
For details regarding Arpeggio Style, refer to “Arpeggio style
list” (p. 122).
3. To stop the arpeggio performance, press [PHRASE/
Variation (Arpeggio Variation)
ARPEGGIO] once again so it goes out.
The arpeggiator provides several variations (performance patterns)
for each arpeggio style. This parameter selects the variation number.
The number of variations will differ according to the arpeggio style.
Creating your own arpeggio
template (User Template)
You can create your own arpeggio template by editing the
parameters of one of the preset templates. Your newly created
template can be stored as one of eight user templates.
Motif (Arpeggio Motif)
Sets the order in which notes of the chord will sound.
VALUE
UP:
Notes you press will be sounded, beginning from
low to high.
1. Press [PHRASE/ARPEGGIO] so it is lit.
fig.r06-23_40
DOWN:
Notes you press will be sounded, from high to low.
UP&DOWN: Notes you press will be sounded, from low to high,
and then back down from high to low.
2. Press [0]–[9] to select a template that produces arpeggios
similar to what you want to create.
RANDOM:
Notes you press will be sounded, in random order.
NOTE-ORDER:Notes you press will be sounded in the order in
which you pressed them. By pressing the notes in
the appropriate order you can produce melody lines.
Up to 128 notes will be remembered.
Pressing [0] will select the user template you have created.
You can then use VALUE [-]/[+] to select other user templates.
3. Press [PARAM] so it is lit.
Now you can edit the arpeggio parameters.
fig.r06-24_40
GLISSANDO: Each chromatic step between the highest and lowest
notes you press will sound in succession, repeating
upward and downward. Press only the lowest and
the highest notes.
CHORD:
AUTO1:
All notes you press will sound simultaneously.
The timing at which keys will sound will be
assigned automatically, giving priority to the lowest
key that was pressed.
4. Use PAGE/CURSOR [
]/[
] to move the cursor, and use
VALUE [-]/[+] to specify the value.
For details on the types and values of the parameters, refer to the
following section “User template parameter list” (p. 62).
AUTO2:
The timing at which keys will sound will be
assigned automatically, giving priority to the highest
key that was pressed.
5. When you are finished editing parameters, press [WRITE].
Use VALUE [-]/[+] to specify the number (UserTemplate 1–8) at
which to save the user template.
fig.r06-25_40
PHRASE:
Pressing a single key will sound a phrase based on
the pitch of that key. If multiple keys are pressed, the
last-pressed key will be valid.
62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the phrase/arpeggio function
For a phrase template, this setting will be “PHRASE.”
Accent Rate (Arpeggio Accent Rate)
Modifies the strength of accents and the length of the notes to adjust
the “groove” feel of the arpeggio. A setting of “100%” will produce
the most pronounced groove feel.
Value: 0–100%
Shuf Rate (Arpeggio Shuffle Rate)
This setting lets you modify the note timing to create shuffle
rhythms.
With a setting of “50%” the notes will be spaced evenly. As the value
is increased, the note timing will have more of a “dotted” (shuffle)
feel.
Value:
0–100%
fig.r06-26
Shuffle Rate = 50%
Shuffle Rate = 90%
50
50
50
50
90
10
90
10
Shuf Resolution (Arpeggio Shuffle Resolution)
A “shuffle” feel is produced by delaying the even-numbered beats
(beats 2, 4, 6,...). You can select either 16th notes or 8th notes to be
affected by this delay.
Value:
,
Hold (Arpeggio Hold Switch)
Switch between Hold On/Hold Off for the Arpeggiator
performance.
Value:
OFF, ON
Kbd Velocity (Arpeggio Keyboard Velocity)
Specifies the loudness of the notes that you play.
If you want the velocity value of each note to vary depending on
how strongly you play the keyboard, set this parameter to “REAL.”
If you want each note to have a fixed velocity regardless of how
strongly you play the keyboard, set this parameter to the desired
value (1–127).
Value:
REAL, 1–127
Octave Range (Arpeggio Octave Range)
Sets the key range in octaves over which arpeggio will take place. If
you want the arpeggio to sound using only the notes that you
actually play, set this parameter to “0.” To have the arpeggio sound
using the notes you play and notes 1 octave higher, set this
parameter to “+1.” A setting of “-1” will make the arpeggio sound
using the notes you play and notes 1 octave lower.
Value:
-3–+3
Key Trigger (Arpeggio Key Trigger)
Turn this “ON” if you want the arpeggio to start at the moment that
you press the key. If you want the arpeggio to start playing in
synchronization with Rhythm guide or the external sequencer, turn
this “OFF.”
Value:
OFF, ON
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using chord memory function
“Playing a chord at the touch of a finger (Multi-chord
Memory)” (p. 24)
1. Press [CHORD MEMORY] so it is lit.
fig.r06-30a_40
2. Select the desired chord set.
When you play the keyboard, a chord of the specified structure
will sound according to the key you press. Select the desired
chord set (p. 25).
3. To stop the performance using the chord memory, press
[CHORD MEMORY] so it goes out.
Creating an original chord set
(User Chord Set)
1. Press [CHORD MEMORY] so it is lit.
2. Press [PARAM] so it is lit.
3. Press PAGE/CURSOR[
] to move the cursor under the key
number.
fig.r06-31a_40
4. Either press a key or use VALUE [-]/[+] to specify the key (C–
B) for which the chord is to be saved.
5. Press PAGE/CURSOR[
fig.r06-31b_40
] to move the cursor to the right.
6. Press keys to input chords.
The display will indicate how many keys were pressed.
You can input 8 notes.
fig.r06-31c_40
7. Release all the keys.
The previously saved chords will be erased, and the new chords
will be saved.
8. Repeat the above steps to continue inputting.
9. When you have finished creating the chord set, press
[WRITE].
fig.r06-32_40
10.Use VALUE [-]/[+] to specify the user chord set number.
You can create up to 8 user chord sets.
11.Press [ENTER].
When the user chord set has been saved, the display will indicate
“COMPLETED.”
64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding effects
The JUNO-D contains three effects processors: multi-effects, chorus,
and reverb. Settings can be made separately for each effects
processor.
Turning the effect function on
and off (MASTER EFFECT
reverb. You can use one of each type in a patch or part.
In order to enable an effects processor (multi-effects, chorus, reverb),
turn its switch on.
Turn these settings off when you wish to listen to the unprocessed
sound as you create a sound, or when you wish to use an external
effects processor instead of the onboard effects.
• Multi-effect/chorus/Reverb parameters can also be saved
in a patch (rhythm set) or performance.
• In Patch mode, effects will be applied according to the
settings of each patch. For details, refer to MFX Switch (p.
not hear the effects if the send level to chorus/reverb is too
low, or if the MFX Switch is off. If you cannot hear the
results of your editing the effect settings, check the settings
listed above.
The On/Off settings for each Effect affect the JUNO-D as a whole
(i.e., are system settings). This setting remains stored in memory
even while the power is off.
When shipped from the factory, all three effects are set to ON.
1. Press [EFFECTS] so it is lit.
The on/off status of each effect (multi-effect, chorus, reverb) will
be displayed.
• In Performance mode, effects will be applied according to
the settings of each patch, as well as the settings of each
part. For details, refer to MFX Switch (p. 58), Chorus Send
Lvl (p. 58), Reverb Send Lvl (p. 58) and in the section
entitled Part Effect Parameters. Each effect is shared by all
parts (patches).
fig.r08-02_40
2. Use PAGE/CURSOR [
]/[
] to select the effect type, and
use VALUE [-]/[+] to switch it on/off.
When you play the keyboard in this state, the effects whose master
effect switch is turned on will be applied to each patch.
When the cursor is located at “Rev” and you want to edit the effect
• When using the multi-effect in Performance mode, you will
normally apply the multi-effect using “the effect settings
stored by the performance.” However, if desired, you can
set the performance parameter MFX Source (p. 56) so that
the “effect settings stored by the patch assigned to a part”
are used by all parts. When you edit the multi-effect
settings, check MFX Source to see which of the above you
are editing.
settings, press PAGE/CURSOR [
], and the effect parameters
selected previously will be displayed.
For further information, refer to “Making effects settings” (p. 67).
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding effects
The effect signal path
The following figure shows the path followed by the effects signals.
fig.r08-03.e
Performance Mode (Patch)
Tone
Tone MFX
Multi-FX
Part MFX
SW
SW
MFX Send
Level to Cho
MFX Send
Level to Rev
Chorus
Tone Cho
Part Cho
Send Level
Send Level
Cho Send
Level to Rev
OUTPUT
(R, L(MONO))
Reverb
Tone Rev
Part Rev
Send Level
Send Level
Performance Mode (Rhythm)
Tone
Multi-FX
Part MFX
SW
MFX Send
MFX Send
Level to Rev
Level to Cho
Chorus
Tone Cho
Part Cho
Send Level
Send Level
Cho Send
Level to Rev
OUTPUT
(R, L(MONO))
Reverb
Tone Rev
Part Rev
Send Level
Send Level
Patch Mode (Patch)
Tone
Multi-FX
Tone MFX
SW
MFX Send
MFX Send
Level to Rev
Level to Cho
Chorus
Tone Cho
Send Level
Cho Send
Level to Rev
OUTPUT
(R, L(MONO))
Reverb
Tone Rev
Send Level
Patch Mode (Rhythm)
Multi-FX
Tone
MFX Send
Level to Cho
MFX Send
Level to Rev
Chorus
Tone Cho
Send Level
Cho Send
Level to Rev
OUTPUT
(R, L(MONO))
Reverb
Tone Rev
Send Level
66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding effects
Making effects settings
Selecting effect parameters
Select multi-effect, chorus, or reverb parameters as shown below.
fig.r08-08.e
Master Effect Switch
PAGE/
PAGE/
CURSOR [
]
]
CURSOR [
]
]
[SHIFT]
+
[SHIFT]
+
PAGE/
CURSOR [
PAGE/
CURSOR [
PAGE/
PAGE/
CURSOR [
]
CURSOR [
]
PAGE/
PAGE/
CURSOR [
]
CURSOR [
]
Multi-Effects Parameters
VALUE [+]
VALUE [-]
Switches the effect type.
Displays the effect
type selected
previously.
[SHIFT]
+
[SHIFT]
+
PAGE/
CURSOR [
PAGE/
CURSOR [
]
]
PAGE/
PAGE/
CURSOR [
]
CURSOR [
]
Displays the parameters for the selected
effect type.
PAGE/
PAGE/
CURSOR [
]
CURSOR [
]
Chorus Parameters
[SHIFT]
+
PAGE/
[SHIFT]
+
PAGE/
PAGE/
CURSOR [
PAGE/
CURSOR [
]
]
CURSOR [
]
CURSOR [
]
Reverb Parameters
PAGE/
PAGE/
CURSOR [
]
CURSOR [
]
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding effects
1. Press [EFFECTS] so it is lit.
10: LIMITER
(p. 72)
(p. 72)
(p. 72)
(p. 73)
(p. 73)
(p. 73)
(p. 74)
(p. 74)
(p. 75)
(p. 75)
(p. 76)
(p. 76)
(p. 77)
(p. 77)
(p. 78)
(p. 78)
(p. 79)
(p. 79)
(p. 79)
(p. 80)
(p. 80)
(p. 80)
(p. 80)
(p. 81)
(p. 81)
(p. 81)
(p. 82)
(p. 82)
(p. 83)
(p. 83)
(p. 83)
(p. 83)
(p. 83)
(p. 84)
(p. 84)
(p. 84)
(p. 85)
(p. 85)
The on/off state of each effect (multi-effect, chorus, reverb) will
11: HEXA-CHORUS
12: TREMOLO CHO
13: SPACE-D
be displayed.
fig.r08-04_40
14: St CHORUS
15: St FLANGER
16: STEP FLANGER
17: St DELAY
2. When the cursor is located at “Rev,” press PAGE/CURSOR
[
], and the effect parameters will be displayed one after
another starting with the multi-effect (MFX) parameters.
18: LONG DELAY
19: MOD DELAY
20: 3 TAP DELAY
21: 4 TAP DELAY
22: TM CTRL DLY
23: 2V PCH SHIFT
24: FB PCH SHIFT
25: REVERB
By holding down [SHIFT] and using PAGE/CURSOR [
]/
[
] you can jump between the four parameter groups; effect
on/off, multi-effect, chorus, and reverb.
Example: for a patch
fig.r08-05_40
26: GATED REVERB
27: OD>CHORUS
28: OD>FLANGER
29: OD>DELAY
30: DIST>CHORUS
31: DIST>FLANGER
32: DIST>DELAY
33: ENH>CHORUS
34: ENH>FLANGER
35: ENH>DELAY
36: CHORUS>DELAY
37: FLG>DELAY
38: CHO>FLANGER
39: CHORUS/DELAY
40: FLG/DELAY
41: CHO/FLANGER
42: LOFI
Example: for a rhythm patch
fig.r08-06_40
Example: for a performance
fig.r08-07_40
Depending on the type of effect that is selected, what is
displayed will be different.
3. Use PAGE/CURSOR [
]/[
] to select the parameter that
you want to edit, and use VALUE [-]/[+] to modify the value
of the parameter.
Setting multi-effects
parameters
There are 47 types of multi-effects. You can select any one of these.
After selecting the Type, you can change the values for each of the
parameters.
43: SLICER
44: TREMOLO
45: AUTO PAN
46: TUMBLING DLY
47: FBK RIPPER
Type (Multi-Effects Type)
found on the following pages.
Value:
00: THROUGH
01: STEREO EQ
02: OVERDRIVE
03: DISTORTION
04: PHASER
(p. 69)
(p. 69)
(p. 69)
(p. 70)
(p. 70)
(p. 70)
(p. 70)
(p. 71)
(p. 71)
(p. 71)
05: SPECTRUM
06: ENHANCER
07: AUTO WAH
08: ROTARY
09: COMPRESSOR
68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding effects
Send Lvl to Cho
Parameter
Mid1 Gain
Value
-15– +15 [dB]
Description
Adjusts the gain for the area
specified by the Middle 1 Fre-
quency and Q settings.
Adjusts the frequency of Middle
2 (mid range).
(Multi-effect send level to chorus)
Sets the amount of the multi-effects sound that is sent to the chorus.
Higher values result in more sound being sent.
Mid2 Freq
Mid2 Q
200–8000 [Hz]
Value:
0–127
0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, This parameter adjusts the
8.0
width of the area around the
Middle 2 Frequency that will be
affected by the Gain setting.
Higher values of Q will result in
a narrower area being affected.
Adjusts the gain for the area
specified by the Middle 2 Fre-
quency and Q settings.
Send Lvl to Rev
(Multi-effect send level to reverb)
Sets the amount of the multi-effects sound that is sent to the reverb.
Higher values result in more sound being sent.
Mid2 Gain
Level #
-15– +15 [dB]
0–127
Value:
0–127
Ctrl 1, 2 (Multi-Effects Control 1, 2)
Adjusts the output level.
On the JUNO-D, certain multi-effect parameters can be assigned to
the modulation lever, knobs, pedal or D Beam. Of the parameters
explained in Multi-effect parameters, the assignable parameters are
marked with a “#” symbol. (Parameters marked with “#1” or “#2”
can be simultaneously controlled using the controller marked with
the same number.) Here you can exchange these assignments, or
choose not to use them. For details, refer to p. 33, p. 89.
Value
02: OVERDRIVE
This effect creates a soft distortion similar to that produced by
vacuum tube amplifiers.
fig.MFX-02
L in
L out
Pan L
Over
drive
Amp
Simulator
2-Band
EQ
OFF:
Multi-effect control will not be used.
Pan R
R in
R out
Items with a “#” symbol: The parameters that can be assigned to
Ctrl1 or Ctrl2. These differ depending on the multi-effect
type.
Parameter
Drive #
Value
0–127
Description
Adjusts the degree of distortion.
The volume will change togeth-
er with the degree of distortion.
Adjusts the stereo location of the
output sound.
00: THROUGH
Effects are not applied. Select when creating Patches or Rhythm Sets
that do not use multi-effects.
Pan #
L64–63R
L64 is far left, 0 is center, and
63R is far right.
Amp Type
SMALL,
Selects the type of guitar amp.
SMALL: small amp
BUILT-IN,
2-STACK,
3-STACK
01: STEREO EQ (Stereo Equalizer)
This is a four-band stereo equalizer (low, mid x 2, high).
BUILT-IN: single-unit type amp
2-STACK: single-unit type amp
3-STACK: large triple stack amp
Adjusts the gain of the low fre-
quency.
Adjusts the gain of the high fre-
quency.
Adjusts the output level.
fig.MFX-01
L in
L out
R out
4-Band EQ
4-Band EQ
Low Gain
High Gain
Level
-15– +15 [dB]
-15– +15 [dB]
0–127
R in
Parameter
Value
Description
Low Freq
200, 400 [Hz]
Selects the frequency of the low
range.
Low Gain
High Freq
High Gain
Mid1 Freq
Mid1 Q
-15– +15 [dB]
Adjusts the gain of the low fre-
quency.
2000, 4000, 8000 Selects the frequency of the high
[Hz]
-15– +15 [dB]
range.
Adjusts the gain of the high fre-
quency.
Adjusts the frequency of Middle
1 (mid range).
200–8000 [Hz]
0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, This parameter adjusts the
8.0
width of the area around the
Middle 1 Frequency that will be
affected by the Gain setting.
Higher values of Q will result in
a narrower area being affected.
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding effects
03: DISTORTION
05: SPECTRUM
Spectrum is a type of filter which modifies the timbre by boosting or
cutting the level at specific frequencies.
This effect produces a more intense distortion than Overdrive.
fig.MFX-03
L in
L out
Pan L
It is similar to an equalizer, but has 8 frequency points fixed at
Amp
Simulator
2-Band
EQ
locations most suitable for adding character to the sound.
fig.MFX-05
Distortion
Pan R
R in
R out
L in
L out
Pan L
Spectrum
Parameter
Drive #
Value
0–127
Description
Pan R
Adjusts the degree of distortion.
The volume will change togeth-
er with the degree of distortion.
Adjusts the stereo location of the
output sound.
L64 is far left, 0 is center, and
63R is far right.
Selects the type of guitar amp.
SMALL: small amp
BUILT-IN: single-unit type amp
2-STACK: single-unit type amp
3-STACK: large triple stack amp
Adjusts the gain of the low fre-
quency.
Adjusts the gain of the high fre-
quency.
Adjusts the output level.
R in
R out
Parameter
Value
Description
Pan #
L64–63R
Band 1
Band 2
Band 3
Band 4
Band 5
Band 6
Band 7
Band 8
Q
-15– +15 [dB]
-15– +15 [dB]
-15– +15 [dB]
-15– +15 [dB]
-15– +15 [dB]
-15– +15 [dB]
-15– +15 [dB]
-15– +15 [dB]
Adjusts the 250 Hz level.
Adjusts the 500 Hz level.
Adjusts the 1000 Hz level.
Adjusts the 1250 Hz level.
Adjusts the 2000 Hz level.
Adjusts the 3150 Hz level.
Adjusts the 4000 Hz level.
Adjusts the 8000 Hz level.
Amp Type
SMALL,
BUILT-IN, 2-
STACK, 3-
STACK
Low Gain
High Gain
Level
-15– +15 [dB]
-15– +15 [dB]
0–127
0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, Simultaneously adjusts the
8.0
width of the adjusted areas for
all the frequency bands.
Adjusts the stereo location of the
output sound. L64 is far left, 0 is
center, and 63R is far right.
Adjusts the output level.
Pan #
L64–63R
Level #
0–127
04: PHASER
A phaser adds a phase-shifted sound to the direct sound, producing
06: ENHANCER
The enhancer controls the overtone structure of the high frequencies,
a twisting modulation that creates spaciousness and depth.
fig.MFX-04
adding sparkle and tightness to the sound.
fig.MFX-06
L in
L out
Pan L
Phaser
Mix
Pan R
2-Band
EQ
L in
L out
R out
Enhancer
Enhancer
R in
Resonance
R out
Mix
Mix
2-Band
EQ
R in
Parameter
Manual #
Value
100–8000 [Hz]
Description
Adjusts the basic frequency
from which the sound will be
modulated.
Parameter
Sens #
Value
0–127
Description
Adjusts the sensitivity of the en-
hancer.
Adjusts the ratio with which the
overtones generated by the en-
hancer are combined with the
direct sound.
Adjusts the gain of the low fre-
quency.
Rate #
Depth
Resonance
Mix
0.05–10.00 [Hz] Adjusts the frequency (period)
of modulation.
0–127
0–127
0–127
Adjusts the depth of modula-
tion.
Adjusts the amount of feedback
for the phaser.
Adjusts the ratio with which the
phase-shifted sound is com-
bined with the direct sound.
Adjusts the stereo location of the
output sound.
Mix #
0–127
Low Gain
High Gain
Level
-15– +15 [dB]
-15– +15 [dB]
0–127
Adjusts the gain of the high fre-
quency.
Adjusts the output level.
Pan
L64–63R
0–127
L64 is far left, 0 is center, and
63R is far right.
Adjusts the output level.
Level
70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding effects
Parameter
Speed #
Value
SLOW, FAST
Description
07: AUTO WAH
Simultaneously switch the rota-
tional speed of the low frequen-
cy rotor and high frequency
rotor.
The Auto Wah cyclically controls a filter to create cyclic change in
timbre.
fig.MFX-07
SLOW: Slows down the rotation
Slow/Hi Slow values).
FAST: Speeds up the rotation to
the specified speed (the Low
Fast/Hi Fast values).
L in
L out
R out
Auto Wah
R in
* When you want to use the ped-
al switch to switch the Rotary ro-
tation speed, select MFX
PARAMETER1 in Pedal Control
Assign (p. 90).
Parameter
Filter Type
Value
LPF, BPF
Description
Selects the type of filter.
LPF: The wah effect will be ap-
plied over a wide frequency
range.
High Accel
Low Accel
0–15
0–15
Adjusts the time it takes the high
frequency rotor to reach the
newly selected speed when
switching from fast to slow (or
slow to fast) speed.
BPF: The wah effect will be ap-
plied over a narrow frequency
range.
Rate #
Depth
Sens
0.05–10.00 [Hz] Adjusts the frequency of the
modulation.
Lower values will require long-
er times.
0–127
0–127
0–127
0–127
Adjusts the depth of the modu-
lation.
Adjusts the time it takes the low
frequency rotor to reach the
newly selected speed when
switching from fast to slow (or
slow to fast) speed.
Lower values will require longer
times.
Adjusts the volume of the high
frequency rotor.
Adjusts the volume of the low
frequency rotor.
Adjusts the spatial dispersion of
the sound.
Adjusts the sensitivity with
which the filter is controlled.
Adjusts the center frequency
from which the effect is applied.
Adjusts the amount of the wah
effect that will occur in the area
of the center frequency. Lower
settings will cause the effect to
be applied in a broad area
around the center frequency.
Higher settings will cause the ef-
fect to be applied in a more nar-
row range.
Manual #
Peak
High Level
Low Level
Separation
Level #
0–127
0–127
0–127
0–127
Adjusts the output level.
Level
0–127
Adjusts the output level.
09: COMPRESSOR
08: ROTARY
The Rotary effect simulates the sound of the rotary speakers often
used with the electric organs of the past.
The compressor flattens out high levels and boosts low levels,
smoothing out unevenness in volume.
fig.MFX-09
Since the movement of the high range and low range rotors can be
set independently, the unique type of modulation characteristic of
these speakers can be simulated quite closely. This effect is most
L in
L out
Pan L
2-Band
EQ
Compressor
Pan R
suitable for electric organ Patches.
fig.MFX-08
R in
R out
L in
L out
Parameter
Value
Description
Sustain
0–127
Adjusts the time over which low
level sounds are boosted until
they reach the specified volume.
Adjusts the attack time of an in-
put sound.
Adjusts the stereo location of the
output sound.
L64 is far left, 0 is center, and
63R is far right.
Rotary
R in
R out
Attack
Pan #
0–127
Parameter
High Slow
Value
Description
L64–63R
0.05–10.00 [Hz] Adjusts the slow speed (SLOW)
of the high frequency rotor.
0.05–10.00 [Hz] Adjusts the slow speed (SLOW)
of the low frequency rotor.
0.05–10.00 [Hz] Adjusts the fast speed (FAST) of
the high frequency rotor.
0.05–10.00 [Hz] Adjusts the fast speed (FAST) of
the low frequency rotor.
Low Slow
High Fast
Low Fast
Post Gain
Low Gain
High Gain
Level #
0, +6, +12, +18 Adjusts the output gain.
[dB]
-15– +15 [dB]
-15– +15 [dB]
0–127
Adjusts the gain of the low fre-
quency.
Adjusts the gain of the high fre-
quency.
Adjusts the output level.
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding effects
Parameter
Pan Dev
Value
0–20
Description
10: LIMITER
Adjusts the difference in stereo
location between each chorus
sound.
The limiter compresses signals that exceed a specified volume level,
preventing distortion from occurring.
fig.MFX-10
With a setting of 0, all chorus
sounds will be in the center. With
a setting of 20, each chorus sound
will be spaced at 60 degree inter-
vals relative to the center.
Adjusts the volume balance be-
tween the direct sound and the
chorus sound.
L in
L out
Pan L
2-Band
EQ
Limiter
Pan R
R in
R out
Balance #
D100:0W–
D0:100W
Parameter
Value
Description
With a setting of D100:0W only the
direct sound will be output, and
with a setting of D0:100W only the
chorus sound will be output.
Adjusts the output level.
Threshold
0–127
Adjusts the volume at which
compression will begin.
Adjusts the time from when the
volume falls below the Thresh-
old Level until compression is
no longer applied.
Release
0–127
Level
0–127
Ratio
Pan #
1.5:1, 2:1, 4:1,
100:1
L64–63R
Adjusts the compression ratio.
12: TREMOLO CHO (Tremolo Chorus)
Adjusts the stereo location of the
output sound.L64 is far left, 0 is
center, and 63R is far right.
Tremolo chorus is a chorus effect with added tremolo (cyclic
modulation of volume).
fig.MFX-12
Post Gain
Low Gain
High Gain
Level #
0, +6, +12, +18 Adjusts the output gain.
[dB]
L in
L out
Balance D
Balance W
-15– +15 [dB]
-15– +15 [dB]
0–127
Adjusts the gain of the low fre-
quency.
Adjusts the gain of the high fre-
quency.
Tremolo Chorus
Balance W
R in
R out
Adjusts the output level.
Balance D
Parameter
Pre Delay
Value
0.0–100 [ms]
Description
11: HEXA-CHORUS
Adjusts the time delay from
when the direct sound begins
until the chorus sound is heard.
Hexa-chorus uses a six-phase chorus (six layers of chorused sound)
to give richness and spatial spread to the sound.
fig.MFX-11
Cho Rate
0.05–10.00 [Hz] Adjusts the modulation speed of
the chorus effect.
0–127
L in
L out
Cho Depth
Treml Rate #
Adjusts the modulation depth of
the chorus effect.
Balance D
Balance W
Hexa-Chorus
0.05–10.00 [Hz] Adjusts the modulation speed of
the tremolo effect.
Balance W
Treml
Separation
0–127
Adjusts the spread of the tremo-
lo effect.
R in
R out
Balance D
Phase
0–180 [deg]
Adjusts the spread of the tremo-
lo effect.
Parameter
Pre Delay
Value
0.0–100 [ms]
Description
Balance #
D100:0W–
D0:100W
Adjusts the volume balance be-
tween the direct sound and the
tremolo chorus sound.
With a setting of D100:0W only
the direct sound will be output,
and with a setting of D0:100W
only the tremolo chorus sound
will be output.
Adjusts the time delay from
when the direct sound begins
until the chorus sound is heard.
Rate #
Depth
0.05–10.00 [Hz] Adjusts the rate of modulation.
0–127
Adjusts the depth of modula-
tion.
Pre Delay Dev 0–20
Pre Delay Deviation adjusts the
differences in Pre Delay be-
tween each chorus sound.
Pre Delay determines the time
from when the direct sound be-
gins until the processed sound is
heard.
Level
0–127
Adjusts the output level.
Depth Dev
-20– +20
Adjusts the difference in modu-
lation depth between each cho-
rus sound.
72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding effects
Parameter
Depth
Value
0–127
Description
Adjusts the depth of modula-
tion.
Adjusts the spatial spread of the
sound.
Adjusts the gain of the low fre-
quency.
Adjusts the gain of the high fre-
quency.
Adjusts the volume balance be-
tween the direct sound and the
chorus sound.
With a setting of D100:0W only the
direct sound will be output, and
with a setting of D0:100W only the
chorus sound will be output.
Adjusts the output level.
13: SPACE-D
Space-D is a multiple chorus that applies two-phase modulation in
stereo. It gives no impression of modulation, but produces a
Phase
0–180 [deg]
transparent chorus effect.
fig.MFX-13
Low Gain
High Gain
Balance #
-15– +15 [dB]
-15– +15 [dB]
Balance D
2-Band
L in
L out
R out
EQ
Balance W
Space-D
Space-D
D100:0W–
D0:100W
Balance W
2-Band
EQ
R in
Balance D
Parameter
Value
Description
Level
0–127
Pre Delay
0.0–100 [ms]
Adjusts the time delay from
when the direct sound begins
until the processed sound is
heard.
15: St FLANGER (Stereo Flanger)
This is a stereo flanger. It produces a metallic resonance that rises
and falls like a jet airplane taking off or landing. A filter is provided
Rate #
Depth
0.05–10.00 [Hz] Adjusts the rate of modulation.
0–127
Adjusts the depth of modula-
tion.
Adjusts the spatial spread of the
sound.
Adjusts the gain of the low fre-
quency.
Adjusts the gain of the high fre-
quency.
Adjusts the volume balance be-
tween the direct sound and the
chorus sound.
With a setting of D100:0W only the
direct sound will be output, and
with a setting of D0:100W only the
chorus sound will be output.
Adjusts the output level.
so that you can adjust the timbre of the flanged sound.
fig.MFX-15
Phase
0–180 [deg]
-15– +15 [dB]
-15– +15 [dB]
Balance D
2-Band
Low Gain
High Gain
Balance #
L in
L out
EQ
Balance W
Flanger
Feedback
Feedback
D100:0W–
D0:100W
Balance W
Flanger
2-Band
EQ
R in
R out
Balance D
Level
0–127
Parameter
Value
Description
Filter Type
OFF, LPF, HPF Selects the type of filter.
OFF: A filter will not be used.
LPF: Cuts the frequency range
above the cutoff frequency.
14: St CHORUS (Stereo Chorus)
This is a stereo chorus. A filter is provided so that you can adjust the
HPF: Cuts the frequency range
below the cutoff frequency.
timbre of the chorus sound.
fig.MFX-14
Cutoff Freq
Pre Delay
200–8000 [Hz]
0.0–100 [ms]
Adjusts the basic frequency of
the filter.
Adjusts the time delay from
when the direct sound begins
until the flanger sound is heard.
Balance D
2-Band
L in
L out
R out
EQ
Balance W
Chorus
Chorus
Balance W
Rate #
Depth
0.05–10.00 [Hz] Adjusts the rate of modulation.
0–127
2-Band
Adjusts the depth of modula-
tion.
R in
EQ
Balance D
Phase
0–180 [deg]
-98– +98 [%]
Adjusts the spatial spread of the
sound.
Parameter
Value
Description
Feedback #
Adjusts the amount (%) of the
processed sound that is returned
(fed back) into the input. Posi-
tive (+) settings will return the
sound in phase, and negative (-)
settings will return the sound in
reverse phase.
Filter Type
OFF, LPF, HPF Selects the type of filter.
OFF: A filter will not be used.
LPF: Cuts the frequency range
above the cutoff frequency.
HPF: Cuts the frequency range
below the cutoff frequency.
Cutoff Freq
Pre Delay
200–8000 [Hz]
0.0–100 [ms]
Adjusts the basic frequency of
the filter.
Adjusts the time delay from
when the direct sound begins
until the processed sound is
heard.
Low Gain
High Gain
-15– +15 [dB]
-15– +15 [dB]
Adjusts the gain of the low fre-
quency.
Adjusts the gain of the high fre-
quency.
Rate #
0.05–10.00 [Hz] Adjusts the rate of modulation.
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding effects
Parameter
Balance
Value
D100:0W–
D0:100W
Description
17: St DELAY (Stereo Delay)
Adjusts the volume balance be-
tween the direct sound and the
flanger sound.
With a setting of D100:0W only the
direct sound will be output, and
with a setting of D0:100W only the
flanger sound will be output.
Adjusts the output level.
This is a stereo delay.
When Feedback Mode is NORMAL:
fig.MFX-17a
Balance D
2-Band
L in
L out
EQ
Balance W
Delay
Level
0–127
Feedback
Feedback
16: STEP FLANGER
The Step Flanger effect is a flanger in which the flanger pitch
Balance W
Delay
2-Band
EQ
changes in steps.
fig.MFX-16
R in
R out
L out
Balance D
Balance D
2-Band
L in
When Feedback Mode is CROSS:
fig.MFX-17b
L out
EQ
Balance W
Step Flanger
Balance D
2-Band
EQ
Balance W
L in
Feedback
Feedback
Delay
Balance W
Step Flanger
Feedback
Feedback
2-Band
EQ
R in
R out
Balance D
Balance W
Delay
2-Band
EQ
R in
R out
Parameter
Pre Delay
Value
0.0–100 [ms]
Description
Balance D
Adjusts the time delay from
when the direct sound begins
until the flanger sound is heard.
Parameter
Value
Description
Rate
Depth
0.05–10.00 [Hz] Adjusts the rate of modulation.
Feedback Mode NORMAL,
CROSS
Selects the way in which delay
sound is fed back into the effect.
NORMAL: The left delay sound
will be fed back into the left de-
lay, and the right delay sound
into the right delay.
CROSS: The left delay sound
will be fed back into the right de-
lay, and the right delay sound
into the left delay.
Adjusts the time from the direct
sound until when the left delay
sound is heard.
Adjusts the time from the direct
sound until when the right delay
sound is heard.
Selects the phase of the left delay
sound.
NORMAL: Phase is not
changed.
INVERT: Phase is inverted.
Selects the phase of the right de-
lay sound.
NORMAL: Phase is not
changed.
0–127
Adjusts the depth of modula-
tion.
Feedback #
-98– +98 [%]
Adjusts the amount (%) of the
flanger sound that is returned
(fed back) into the input.
Negative (-) settings will invert
the phase.
Step Rate #
Phase
0.1–20.0 [Hz],
note *2
Adjusts the rate (period) of pitch
change.
Delay Left
Delay Right
Phase Left
0–420 [ms],
note *1
0–180 [deg]
Adjusts the spatial spread of the
sound.
Balance
D100:0W–
D0:100W
Adjusts the volume balance be-
tween the direct sound and the
flanger sound.
0–420 [ms],
note *1
With a setting of D100:0W only the
direct sound will be output, and
with a setting of D0:100W only the
chorus sound will be output.
This setting determines whether
the period for the pattern is reset
(ON), or not (OFF) when sounds
are played.
NORMAL,
INVERT
Reset
Level
OFF, ON
Phase Right
Feedback #
NORMAL,
INVERT
While the rhythm guide is play-
ing, the period for the pattern is
not reset even if you set this ON.
Adjusts the output level.
INVERT: Phase is inverted.
Adjusts the proportion (%) of
the delay sound that is fed back
into the effect.
-98– +98 [%]
0–127
Negative (-) settings will invert
the phase.
74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding effects
Parameter
HF Damp
Value
Description
19: MOD DELAY (Modulation Delay)
This effect adds modulation to the delayed sound, producing an
effect similar to a flanger.
200–8000 [Hz], Adjusts the frequency above
BYPASS
which sound fed back to the ef-
fect will be cut.
If you do not want to cut the
high frequencies of the feed-
back, set this parameter to BY-
PASS.
Adjusts the gain of the low fre-
quency.
When Feedback Mode is NORMAL:
fig.MFX-19a
Balance D
2-Band
L in
L out
EQ
Low Gain
High Gain
Balance #
-15– +15 [dB]
-15– +15 [dB]
Balance W
Delay
Modulation
Adjusts the gain of the high fre-
quency.
Adjusts the volume balance be-
tween the direct sound and the
delay sound.
Feedback
Feedback
D100:0W–
D0:100W
Balance W
Delay
Modulation
Balance D
2-Band
EQ
R in
R out
L out
With a setting of D100:0W only the
direct sound will be output, and
with a setting of D0:100W only the
delay sound will be output.
Adjusts the output level.
When Feedback Mode is CROSS:
fig.MFX-19b
Level
0–127
Balance D
2-Band
EQ
L in
18: LONG DELAY
This is useful when you want to apply a delay that is longer than 17:
Delay
Modulation
Balance W
Feedback
Feedback
St DELAY.
fig.MFX-18
2-Band
EQ
Balance W
Delay
Modulation
Balance D
Balance W
L in
L out
R out
Balance D
2-Band
EQ
R in
R out
Delay
Balance W
Feedback
Balance D
Parameter
Feedback Mode NORMAL,
CROSS
Value
Description
2-Band
EQ
R in
Selects the way in which delay
sound is fed back into the effect.
NORMAL: The left delay sound
will be fed back into the left de-
lay, and the right delay sound
into the right delay.
CROSS: The left delay sound
will be fed back into the right de-
lay, and the right delay sound
into the left delay.
Adjusts the time from the direct
sound until when the left delay
sound is heard.
Adjusts the time from the direct
sound until when the right delay
sound is heard.
Parameter
Delay
Value
Description
0–840 [ms], note Adjusts the time from the direct
*1
sound until the delay sound is
heard.
Adjusts the proportion (%) of
the delay sound that is fed back
into the effect.
Feedback #
HF Damp
-98– +98 [%]
Negative (-) settings will invert
the phase.
Delay Left
Delay Right
Feedback
0–370 [ms]
0–370 [ms]
-98– +98 [%]
200–8000 [Hz], Adjusts the frequency above
BYPASS
which sound fed back to the ef-
fect will be cut.
If you do not want to cut the
high frequencies of the feed-
back, set this parameter to BY-
PASS.
Adjusts the gain of the low fre-
quency.
Adjusts the gain of the high fre-
quency.
Adjusts the volume balance be-
tween the direct sound and the
delay sound.
With a setting of D100:0W only the
direct sound will be output, and
with a setting of D0:100W only the
delay sound will be output.
Adjusts the output level.
Adjusts the proportion (%) of
the delay sound that is fed back
into the effect.
Negative (-) settings will invert
the phase.
Low Gain
High Gain
Balance #
-15– +15 [dB]
-15– +15 [dB]
HF Damp
200–8000 [Hz], Adjusts the frequency above
BYPASS
which sound fed back to the ef-
fect will be cut.
If you do not want to cut the
high frequencies of the feed-
back, set this parameter to BY-
PASS.
D100:0W–
D0:100W
Rate #
Depth
Phase
0.05–10.00 [Hz] Adjusts the speed of the modu-
lation.
Level
0–127
0–127
Adjusts the depth of the modu-
lation.
Adjusts the spatial spread of the
sound.
0–180 [deg]
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding effects
Parameter
Value
Description
Parameter
Value
Description
Low Gain
-15– +15 [dB]
Adjusts the gain of the low fre-
quency.
Adjusts the gain of the high fre-
quency.
Adjusts the volume balance be-
tween the direct sound and the
modulation delay sound.
With a setting of D100:0W only
the direct sound will be output,
and with a setting of D0:100W
only the modulation delay
sound will be output.
Balance #
D100:0W–
D0:100W
Adjusts the volume balance be-
tween the direct sound and the
delay sound.
With a setting of D100:0W only the
direct sound will be output, and
with a setting of D0:100W only the
delay sound will be output.
Adjusts the output level.
High Gain
Balance #
-15– +15 [dB]
D100:0W–
D0:100W
Level
0–127
21: 4 TAP DELAY (Quadruple Tap
Delay)
Level
0–127
Adjusts the output level.
The Quadruple Tap Delay has four delays.
fig.MFX-21a
Balance D
20: 3 TAP DELAY (Triple Tap Delay)
L in
L out
The Triple Tap Delay produces three delay sounds; center, left and
Delay 1
Delay 2
Balance W
Feedback
right.
fig.MFX-20
Quadruple Tap Delay
Delay 3
Balance D
2-Band
L in
L out
EQ
Balance W
R out
Balance W
Left Tap
Delay 4
R in
Balance D
Triple Tap Delay
Feedback
Center Tap
The stereo location of each delay sound is as follows.
fig.MFX-21b
Balance W
Right Tap
2-Band
EQ
R in
R out
2
3
Balance D
4
1
Parameter
Delay Left
Value
0–840 [ms],
note *1
Description
R
L
Adjusts the time delay from the
direct sound until when the left
delay sound is heard.
Parameter
Delay 1
Value
0–840 [ms],
note *1
Description
Adjusts the time delay from the
direct sound until when delay 1
sound is heard.
Adjusts the time delay from the
direct sound until when delay 2
sound is heard.
Adjusts the time delay from the
direct sound until when delay 3
sound is heard.
Delay Right
Delay Center
Feedback #
0–840 [ms],
note *1
Adjusts the time delay from the
direct sound until when the
right delay sound is heard.
Adjusts the time delay from the
direct sound until when the cen-
ter delay sound is heard.
Adjusts the proportion (%) of
the delay sound that is fed back
into the effect.
Delay 2
Delay 3
Delay 4
0–840 [ms],
note *1
0–840 [ms],
note *1
0–840 [ms],
note *1
-98– +98 [%]
0–840 [ms],
note *1
Adjusts the time delay from the
direct sound until when delay 4
sound is heard.
Adjusts the volume of delay 1
sound.
Adjusts the volume of delay 2
sound.
Adjusts the volume of delay 3
sound.
Negative (-) settings will invert
the phase.
HF Damp
200–8000 [Hz], Adjusts the frequency above
Level 1
0–127
BYPASS
which sound fed back to the ef-
fect will be cut.
Level 2
0–127
If you do not want to cut the
high frequencies of the feed-
back, set this parameter to BY-
PASS.
Level 3
0–127
Level 4
0–127
Adjusts the volume of delay 4
sound.
Adjusts the proportion (%) of
the delay sound that is fed back
into the effect.
Left Level
Right Level
Center Level
Low Gain
0–127
Adjusts the volume of the left
delay sound.
Adjusts the volume of the right
delay sound.
Adjusts the volume of the center
delay sound.
Adjusts the gain of the low fre-
quency.
Feedback #
-98– +98 [%]
0–127
0–127
Negative (-) settings will invert
the phase.
-15– +15 [dB]
-15– +15 [dB]
High Gain
Adjusts the gain of the high fre-
quency.
76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding effects
Parameter
Value
Description
Parameter
Value
Description
HF Damp
200–8000 [Hz], Adjusts the frequency above
Balance
D100:0W–
D0:100W
Adjusts the volume balance be-
tween the direct sound and the
delay sound.
BYPASS
which sound fed back to the ef-
fect will be cut.
If you do not want to cut the
high frequencies of the feed-
back, set this parameter to BY-
PASS.
Adjusts the volume balance be-
tween the direct sound and the
delay sound.
With a setting of D100:0W only the
direct sound will be output, and
with a setting of D0:100W only the
delay sound will be output.
Adjusts the output level.
Balance #
D100:0W–
D0:100W
Level
0–127
23: 2V PCH SHIFT (2-Voice Pitch
Shifter)
A Pitch Shifter shifts the pitch of the direct sound. This 2-voice pitch
shifter has two pitch shifters, and can add two pitch shifted sounds
With a setting of D100:0W only the
direct sound will be output, and
with a setting of D0:100W only the
delay sound will be output.
Adjusts the output level.
Level
0–127
to the direct sound.
fig.MFX-23
22: TM CTRL DLY (Time Control Delay)
Balance D
L in
L out
You can change the delay time in real time. Lengthening the delay
Level Balance A
PanA L
PanA R
will lower the pitch, and shortening it will raise the pitch.
fig.MFX-22
Balance W
2-Band
EQ
Balance W
2Voice Pitch Shifter
Level Balance B
L in
L out
R out
PanB L
Balance D
Balance W
R out
PanB R
Time Control Delay
Balance W
R in
Balance D
Feedback
Balance D
2-Band
EQ
R in
Parameter
Value
Description
Mode
1, 2, 3, 4, 5
Higher settings of this parame-
ter will result in slower re-
sponse, but steadier pitch.
Parameter
Delay #
Value
0–840 [ms]
Description
Adjusts the time delay from the
direct sound until when each de-
lay sound is heard.
Adjusts the proportion (%) of
the delay sound that is fed back
into the effect.
Coarse A #1
Coarse B #2
Fine A #1
-24– +12 [semi] Adjusts the pitch of Pitch Shift A
in semitone steps (-2- +1 oc-
taves).
-24– +12 [semi] Adjusts the pitch of Pitch Shift B
in semitone steps (-2- +1 oc-
taves).
Feedback #
-98– +98 [%]
Negative (-) settings will invert
the phase.
-100– +100
[cent]
Makes fine adjustments to the
pitch of Pitch Shift A in 2-cent
steps (-100- +100 cents).
One cent is 1/100th of a semi-
tone.
Makes fine adjustments to the
pitch of Pitch Shift B in 2-cent
steps (-100- +100 cents).
One cent is 1/100th of a semi-
tone.
Adjusts the time delay from
when the direct sound begins
until the Pitch Shift A sound is
heard.
Adjusts the time delay from
when the direct sound begins
until the Pitch Shift A sound is
heard.
Acceleration
0–15
This parameter adjusts the time
over which the Delay Time will
change from the current setting
to a newly specified setting.
The rate of change for the Delay
Time directly affects the rate of
pitch change.
Fine B #2
-100– +100
[cent]
HF Damp
200–8000 [Hz], Adjusts the frequency above
BYPASS
which sound fed back to the ef-
fect will be cut.
If you do not want to cut the
high frequencies of the feed-
back, set this parameter to BY-
PASS.
Adjusts the stereo location of the
delay sound.
L64 is far left, 0 is center, and
63R is far right.
Adjusts the gain of the low fre-
quency.
Adjusts the gain of the high fre-
quency.
Pre Delay A
Pre Delay B
Pan A
0–500 [ms]
0–500 [ms]
L64–63R
Pan
L64–63R
Adjusts the stereo location of the
Pitch Shift A sound.
L64 is far left, 0 is center, and
63R is far right.
Adjusts the stereo location of the
Pitch Shift B sound.
Low Gain
High Gain
-15– +15 [dB]
-15– +15 [dB]
Pan B
L64–63R
L64 is far left, 0 is center, and
63R is far right.
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding effects
Parameter
Level Balance
Value
A100:0B–
A0:100B
Description
25: REVERB
Adjusts the volume balance be-
tween the Pitch Shift A and Pitch
Shift B sounds.
Adjusts the volume balance be-
tween the direct sound and the
pitch shift sound.
With a setting of D100:0W only the
direct sound will be output, and
with a setting of D0:100W only the
pitch shift sound will be output.
Adjusts the output level.
The Reverb effect adds reverberation to the sound, simulating an
acoustic space.
fig.MFX-25
Balance
D100:0W–
D0:100W
2-Band
L in
L out
R out
EQ
Balance D
Reverb
Balance W
Balance W
2-Band
R in
EQ
Level
0–127
Balance D
Parameter
Type
Value
Description
24: FB PCH SHIFT
ROOM1,
ROOM2,
STAGE1,
STAGE2,
HALL1,
HALL2
Selects the type of Reverb effect.
ROOM1: dense reverb with
short decay
ROOM2: sparse reverb with
short decay
STAGE1: reverb with greater
late reverberation
STAGE2: reverb with strong ear-
ly reflections
HALL1: reverb with clear rever-
berance
HALL2: reverb with rich rever-
berance
(Feedback Pitch Shifter)
This pitch shifter allows the pitch shifted sound to be fed back into
the effect.
fig.MFX-24
2-Band
EQ
L in
L out
R out
Balance D
Balance W
Pitch Shifter
Balance W
Feedback
Balance D
2-Band
EQ
R in
Pre Delay
0.0–100 [ms]
0–127
Adjusts the time delay from
when the direct sound begins
until the reverb sound is heard.
Adjusts the time length of rever-
beration.
Parameter
Mode
Value
1, 2, 3, 4, 5
Description
Higher settings of this parame-
ter will result in slower re-
sponse, but steadier pitch.
Time #
HF Damp
200–8000 [Hz], Adjusts the frequency above
Coarse #1
Fine #1
-24– +12 [semi] Adjusts the pitch of the pitch
shifted sound in semitone steps
(-2- +1 octaves).
BYPASS
which the reverberant sound
will be cut.
As the frequency is set lower,
more of the high frequencies
will be cut, resulting in a softer
and more muted reverberance.
If you do not want the high fre-
quencies to be cut, set this pa-
rameter to BYPASS.
-100– +100
[cent]
Makes fine adjustments to the
pitch of the pitch shifted sound
in 2-cent steps (-100- +100 cents).
Adjusts the time delay from
when the direct sound begins
until the pitch shifted sound is
heard.
Pre Delay
0–500 [ms]
Low Gain
High Gain
Balance #
-15– +15 [dB]
-15– +15 [dB]
Adjusts the gain of the low fre-
quency.
Adjusts the gain of the high fre-
quency.
Feedback #
Pan
-98– +98 [%]
Adjusts the proportion (%) of
the processed sound that is fed
back into the effect.
Negative (-) settings will invert
the phase.
D100:0W–
D0:100W
Adjusts the volume balance be-
tween the direct sound and the
reverb sound.
L64–63R
Adjusts the stereo location of the
pitch shifted sound.
With a setting of D100:0W only the
direct sound will be output, and
with a setting of D0:100W only the
reverb sound will be output.
Adjusts the output level.
L64 is far left, 0 is center, and
63R is far right.
Low Gain
High Gain
Balance
-15– +15 [dB]
-15– +15 [dB]
Adjusts the gain of the low fre-
quency.
Adjusts the gain of the high fre-
quency.
Level
0–127
D100:0W–
D0:100W
Adjusts the volume balance be-
tween the direct sound and the
pitch shift sound.
With a setting of D100:0W only the
direct sound will be output, and
with a setting of D0:100W only the
pitch shift sound will be output.
Adjusts the output level.
Level
0–127
78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding effects
Parameter
Cho Delay
Value
0.0–100 [ms]
Description
26: GATED REVERB
Adjusts the time delay from
when the direct sound begins
until the chorus sound is heard.
Gate Reverb is a special type of reverb in which the reverberant
sound is cut off before its natural length.
fig.MFX-26
Cho Rate
0.05–10.00 [Hz] Adjusts the modulation speed of
the chorus effect.
0–127
2-Band
L in
L out
R out
EQ
Cho Depth
Cho Balance #
Adjusts the modulation depth of
the chorus effect.
Balance D
Balance W
Gated Reverb
D100:0W–
D0:100W
Adjusts the volume balance be-
tween the overdrive sound that
is sent through the chorus and
the overdrive sound that is not
sent through the chorus.
Balance W
2-Band
R in
EQ
Balance D
With a setting of “D100:0W,”
only the overdrive sound will be
output. With a setting of
“D0:100W,” only the overdrive
sound that is sent through the
chorus will be output.
Parameter
Type
Value
Description
NORMAL,
REVERSE,
SWEEP1,
SWEEP2
Selects the type of reverb.
NORMAL: conventional gate re-
verb
REVERSE: backwards reverb
SWEEP1: the reverberant sound
moves from right to left
SWEEP2: the reverberant sound
moves from left to right
Adjusts the time delay from
when the direct sound begins
until the reverb sound is heard.
Adjusts the time from when the
reverb is heard until when it dis-
appears.
Adjusts the gain of the low fre-
quency.
Adjusts the gain of the high fre-
quency.
Adjusts the volume balance be-
tween the direct sound and the
reverb sound.
Level
0–127
Adjusts the output level.
28: OD>FLANGER
Pre Delay
Gate Time
0.0–100 [ms]
5–500 [ms]
(Overdrive→Flanger)
This effect connects an overdrive and a flanger in series.
fig.MFX-28
Balance D
L out
L in
Low Gain
High Gain
Balance #
-15– +15 [dB]
-15– +15 [dB]
Feedback
Flanger
Balance W
Overdrive
Balance W
R out
D100:0W–
D0:100W
R in
Balance D
With a setting of D100:0W only the
direct sound will be output, and
with a setting of D0:100W only the
reverb sound will be output.
Adjusts the output level.
Parameter
OD Drive
Value
0–127
Description
Adjusts the degree of overdrive
distortion.
The volume will change togeth-
er with the degree of distortion.
Adjusts the stereo location of the
overdrive sound.
L64 is far left, 0 is center, and
63R is far right.
Level #
0–127
OD Pan #
Flg Delay
L64–63R
27: OD>CHORUS
(Overdrive→Chorus)
This effect connects an overdrive and a chorus in series.
0.0–100 [ms]
Adjusts the time delay from
when the direct sound begins
until the flanger sound is heard.
fig.MFX-27
L out
L in
Flg Rate
0.05–10.00 [Hz] Adjusts the modulation speed of
the flanger effect.
0–127
Balance D
Chorus
Balance W
Overdrive
Flg Depth
Flg Feedback
Adjusts the modulation depth of
the flanger effect.
Adjusts the proportion (%) of
the flanger sound that is fed
back into the effect.
Balance W
R out
-98– +98 [%]
R in
Balance D
Negative (-) settings will invert
the phase.
Parameter
OD Drive
Value
0–127
Description
Adjusts the degree of overdrive
distortion.
The volume will change togeth-
er with the degree of distortion.
Adjusts the stereo location of the
overdrive sound.
OD Pan #
L64–63R
L64 is far left, 0 is center, and
63R is far right.
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding effects
Parameter
Flg Balance #
Value
D100:0W–
D0:100W
Description
30: DIST>CHORUS
Adjusts the volume balance be-
tween the overdrive sound that
is sent through the flanger and
the overdrive sound that is not
sent through the flanger.
With a setting of “D100:0W,”
only the overdrive sound will be
output. With a setting of
(Distortion→Chorus)
This effect connects distortion and chorus in series. The parameters
are essentially the same as “27: OD>CHORUS,” with the exception
of the following two.
OD Drive→Dist Drive (Specifies the amount of distortion.)
OD Pan→Dist Pan (Specifies the stereo location of the distortion
“D0:100W,” only the overdrive
sound that is sent through the
flanger will be output.
sound.)
fig.MFX-30
L out
L in
Level
0–127
Adjusts the output level.
Balance D
Chorus
Balance W
Distortion
29: OD>DELAY (Overdrive→Delay)
Balance W
R out
This effect connects an overdrive and a delay in series.
R in
Balance D
fig.MFX-29
L out
L in
Balance D
Delay
31: DIST>FLANGER
Balance W
Overdrive
(Distortion→Flanger)
This effect connects distortion and flanger in series. The parameters
are essentially the same as in “28: OD>FLANGER,” with the
exception of the following two.
Balance W
R out
Feedback
R in
Balance D
OD Drive→Dist Drive (Specifies the amount of distortion.)
OD Pan→Dist Pan (Specifies the stereo location of the distortion
sound.)
Parameter
OD Drive
Value
0–127
Description
Adjusts the degree of overdrive
distortion.
The volume will change togeth-
er with the degree of distortion.
Adjusts the stereo location of the
overdrive sound.
L64 is far left, 0 is center, and
63R is far right.
Adjusts the time delay from
when the direct sound begins
until the delay sound is heard.
Adjusts the proportion (%) of
the delay sound that is fed back
into the effect.
fig.MFX-31
Balance D
L out
L in
OD Pan #
L64–63R
Feedback
Flanger
Balance W
Distortion
Balance W
R out
Delay Time
0–500 [ms]
R in
Balance D
Dly Feedback
-98– +98 [%]
32: DIST>DELAY (Distortion→Delay)
This effect connects distortion and delay in series. The parameters
are essentially the same as in “29: OD>DELAY,” with the exception
of the following two.
Negative (-) settings will invert
the phase.
Dly HF Damp
Dly Balance #
200–8000 [Hz], Adjusts the frequency above
BYPASS
which delayed sound fed back
to the effect will be cut.
If you do not want to cut the
high frequencies of the feed-
back, set this parameter to BY-
PASS.
Adjusts the volume balance be-
tween the overdrive sound that
is sent through the delay and the
overdrive sound that is not sent
through the delay.
With a setting of “D100:0W,”
only the overdrive sound will be
output. With a setting of
“D0:100W,” only the overdrive
sound that is sent through the
delay will be output.
OD Drive→Dist Drive (Specifies the amount of distortion.)
OD Pan→Dist Pan (Specifies the stereo location of the distortion
sound.)
fig.MFX-32
L out
L in
D100:0W–
D0:100W
Balance D
Delay
Balance W
Distortion
Balance W
R out
Feedback
Balance D
R in
Level
0–127
Adjusts the output level.
80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding effects
Parameter
Flg Feedback
Value
-98– +98 [%]
Description
33: ENH>CHORUS (Enhancer
→
Chorus)
Adjusts the proportion (%) of
the flanger sound that is fed
back into the effect.
This effect connects an enhancer and a chorus in series.
fig.MFX-33
L in
L out
Negative (-) settings will invert
the phase.
Enhancer
Balance D
Chorus
Mix
Balance W
Flg Balance #
D100:0W–
D0:100W
Adjusts the volume balance be-
tween the enhancer sound that
is sent through the flanger and
the enhancer sound that is not
sent through the flanger.
With a setting of “D100:0W,”
only the enhancer sound will be
output. With a setting of
Balance W
R out
R in
Enhancer
Balance D
Mix
Parameter
Enhancer Sens # 0–127
Value
Description
Adjusts the sensitivity of the en-
hancer.
Adjusts the ratio with which the
overtones generated by the en-
hancer are combined with the
direct sound.
Adjusts the time delay from
when the direct sound begins
until the chorus sound is heard.
“D0:100W,” only the enhancer
sound that is sent through the
flanger will be output.
Enhancer Mix
Cho Delay
0–127
Level
0–127
Adjusts the output level.
0.0–100 [ms]
35: ENH>DELAY (Enhancer→Delay)
This effect connects an enhancer and a delay in series.
fig.MFX-35
Cho Rate
0.05–10.00 [Hz] Adjusts the modulation speed of
the chorus effect.
L in
L out
Enhancer
Balance D
Mix
Cho Depth
Cho Balance #
0–127
Adjusts the modulation depth of
the chorus effect.
Balance W
Delay
Feedback
Balance D
D100:0W–
D0:100W
Adjusts the volume balance be-
tween the enhancer sound that
is sent through the chorus and
the enhancer sound that is not
sent through the chorus.
Balance W
R out
R in
Enhancer
Mix
With a setting of “D100:0W,”
only the enhancer sound will be
output. With a setting of
“D0:100W,” only the enhancer
sound that is sent through the
chorus will be output.
Parameter
Enhancer Sens # 0–127
Value
Description
Adjusts the sensitivity of the en-
hancer.
Adjusts the ratio with which the
overtones generated by the en-
hancer are combined with the
direct sound.
Enhancer Mix
0–127
Level
0–127
Adjusts the output level.
Delay Time
0–500 [ms]
98– +98 [%]
Adjusts the time delay from
when the direct sound begins
until the delay sound is heard.
Adjusts the proportion (%) of
the delay sound that is fed back
into the delay input.
34: ENH>FLANGER (Enhancer
→Flanger)
Dly Feedback
This effect connects an enhancer and a flanger in series.
fig.MFX-34
Balance D
Negative (-) settings will invert
the phase.
200–8000 [Hz], Adjusts the frequency above
L in
L out
Enhancer
Enhancer
Mix
Feedback
Flanger
Balance W
Dly HF Damp
Dly Balance #
BYPASS
which delayed sound fed back
to the delay input will be cut.
If you do not want to cut the
high frequencies of the delay
feedback, set this parameter to
BYPASS.
Adjusts the volume balance be-
tween the enhancer sound that
is sent through the delay and the
enhancer sound that is not sent
through the delay.
With a setting of “D100:0W,”
only the enhancer sound will be
output. With a setting of
“D0:100W,” only the enhancer
sound that is sent through the
delay will be output.
Balance W
R out
R in
Balance D
Mix
Parameter
Enhancer Sens # 0–127
Value
Description
Adjusts the sensitivity of the en-
hancer.
Adjusts the ratio with which the
overtones generated by the en-
hancer are combined with the
direct sound.
Adjusts the time delay from
when the direct sound begins
until the flanger sound is heard.
D100:0W–
D0:100W
Enhancer Mix
Flg Delay
0–127
0.0–100 [ms]
Flg Rate
0.05–10.00 [Hz] Adjusts the modulation speed of
the flanger effect.
Level
0–12
Adjusts the output level.
Flg Depth
0–127
Adjusts the modulation depth of
the flanger effect.
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding effects
36: CHORUS>DELAY
37: FLG>DELAY (Flanger→Delay)
This effect connects a chorus and a delay unit in series.
This effect connects a flanger and a delay in series.
fig.MFX-36
fig.MFX-37
Balance D
Balance D
L in
L out
L in
L out
Balance D
Balance W
Balance D
Feedback
Flanger
Balance W
Balance W
Balance W
Balance W
Chorus
Delay
Feedback
Balance D
Delay
Feedback
Balance D
Balance W
R out
Balance W
Balance W
R out
R in
R in
Balance D
Balance D
Parameter
Cho Delay
Value
0.0–100 [ms]
Description
Parameter
Flg Delay
Value
0.0–100 [ms]
Description
Adjusts the time delay from
when the direct sound begins
until the chorus sound is heard.
Adjusts the time delay from
when the direct sound begins
until the flanger sound is heard.
Cho Rate
0.05–10.00 [Hz] Adjusts the modulation speed of
the chorus effect.
0–127
Flg Rate
0.05–10.00 [Hz] Adjusts the modulation speed of
the flanger effect.
0–127
Cho Depth
Cho Balance #
Adjusts the modulation depth of
the chorus effect.
Adjusts the volume balance be-
tween the direct sound and the
chorus sound.
Flg Depth
Flg Feedback
Adjusts the modulation depth of
the flanger effect.
Adjusts the proportion (%) of
the flanger sound that is fed
back into the effect.
D100:0W–
D0:100W
-98– +98 [%]
With a setting of “D100:0W,”
only the direct sound will be
output. With a setting of
“D0:100W,” only the chorus
sound will be output.
Negative (-) settings will invert
the phase.
Adjusts the volume balance be-
tween the direct sound and the
flanger sound.
Flg Balance #
D100:0W–
D0:100W
Delay Time
0–500 [ms]
Adjusts the time delay from
when the direct sound begins
until the delay sound is heard.
Adjusts the proportion (%) of
the delay sound that is fed back
into the delay input.
With a setting of “D100:0W,”
only the direct sound will be
output. With a setting of
“D0:100W,” only the flanger
sound will be output.
Adjusts the time delay from
when the direct sound begins
until the delay sound is heard.
Adjusts the proportion (%) of
the delay sound that is fed back
into the delay input.
Dly Feedback
-98– +98 [%]
Delay Time
0–500 [ms]
Negative (-) settings will invert
the phase.
Dly HF Damp
Dly Balance #
200–8000 [Hz], Adjusts the frequency above
BYPASS
Dly Feedback
-98– +98 [%]
which delayed sound fed back
to the delay input will be cut.
If you do not want to cut the
high frequencies of the feed-
back, set this parameter to BY-
PASS.
Adjusts the volume balance be-
tween the chorus sound that is
sent through the delay and the
chorus sound that is not sent
through the delay.
With a setting of “D100:0W,”
only the chorus sound will be
output. With a setting of
“D0:100W,” only the chorus
sound that is sent through the
delay will be output.
Negative (-) settings will invert
the phase.
Dly HF Damp
Dly Balance #
200–8000 [Hz], Adjusts the frequency above
BYPASS
which delayed sound fed back
to the delay input will be cut.
If you do not want to cut the
high frequencies of the delay
feedback, set this parameter to
BYPASS.
Adjusts the volume balance be-
tween the flanger sound that is
sent through the delay and the
flanger sound that is not sent
through the delay.
D100:0W–
D0:100W
D100:0W–
D0:100W
With a setting of “D100:0W,”
only the flanger sound will be
output. With a setting of
Level
0–127
Adjusts the output level.
“D0:100W,” only the flanger
sound that is sent through the
delay will be output.
Level
0–127
Adjusts the output level.
82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding effects
40: FLG/DELAY (Flanger/Delay)
38: CHO>FLANGER (Chorus
→
Flanger)
This effect connects a flanger and a delay in parallel. The parameters
are the same as for “37: FLG>DELAY.” However, the Dly Balance
parameter adjusts the volume balance between the direct sound and
the delay sound.
This effect connects a chorus and a flanger in series.
fig.MFX-38
Balance D
Feedback
Flanger
Balance D
L in
L out
Balance W
Chorus
Balance W
Balance W
R out
Balance W
41: CHO/FLANGER (Chorus/
Flanger)
R in
Balance D
Balance D
This effect connects a chorus and a flanger in parallel. The
parameters are the same as for “38: CHO>FLANGER.” However, the
Flanger Balance parameter adjusts the volume balance between the
Parameter
Cho Delay
Value
0.0–100 [ms]
Description
Adjusts the time delay from
when the direct sound begins
until the chorus sound is heard.
direct sound and the flanger sound.
fig.MFX-41
Cho Rate
0.05–10.00 [Hz] Adjusts the modulation speed of
the chorus effect.
Balance D
L in
L out
R out
Cho Depth
Cho Balance #
0–127
Adjusts the modulation depth of
the chorus effect.
Adjusts the volume balance be-
tween the direct sound and the
chorus sound.
With a setting of “D100:0W,” only
the direct sound will be output.
With a setting of “D0:100W,” only
the chorus sound will be output.
Adjusts the time delay from
when the direct sound begins
until the flanger sound is heard.
Chorus
Balance W
Balance W
Feedback
D100:0W–
D0:100W
Flanger
R in
Balance D
Flg Delay
0.0–100 [ms]
42: LOFI
This effect intentionally degrades the audio quality to simulate a Lo-
Fi sound. It is particularly effective on drums.
Flg Rate
0.05–10.00 [Hz] Adjusts the modulation speed of
the flanger effect.
fig.MFX-42
Flg Depth
Flg Feedback
0–127
Adjusts the modulation depth of
the flanger effect.
Adjusts the proportion (%) of
the flanger sound that is fed
back into the effect.
L in
L out
R out
Lo-Fi
Lo-Fi
2-Band EQ
2-Band EQ
-98– +98 [%]
R in
Negative (-) settings will invert
the phase.
Adjusts the volume balance be-
tween the chorus sound and the
chorus sound that is passed
through the flanger.
With a setting of “D100:0W,” only
the chorus sound will be output.
With a setting of “D0:100W,” only
the chorus sound that passes
through the flanger will be output.
Adjusts the output level.
Parameter
Bit Down
Value
0–11
Description
This setting lowers the audio
quality.
The audio quality will worsen as
this setting is increased.
This coarsens the output signal.
The sound will become coarser
as this setting is increased.
Flg Balance #
D100:0W–
D0:100W
S-RateDown
0–7
Post Gain
Low Gain
High Gain
Output
0, +6, +12, +18 Adjusts the output signal.
[dB]
-15– +15 [dB]
Level
0–127
Adjusts the gain of the low fre-
quency.
Adjusts the gain of the high fre-
quency.
Specifies how the sound will be
output.
With a setting of “MONO,” the
output sound will be monaural.
Specifies the output volume
from the Lo-Fi effect.
-15– +15 [dB]
39: CHORUS/DELAY
This effect connects a chorus and a delay in parallel. The parameters
are the same as for “36: CHORUS>DELAY.” However, the Dly
Balance parameter adjusts the volume balance between the direct
MONO, STE-
REO
sound and the delay sound.
Level #
0–127
fig.MFX-39
Balance D
L in
L out
R out
Chorus
Balance W
Balance W
Feedback
Delay
R in
Balance D
83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding effects
43: SLICER
By applying successive cuts to the sound, this effect produces what
are heard as backing phrases, even though you’ve played something
much simpler. This is especially effective when applied to sustain-
Parameter
Rate #
Value
Description
0.05–10.00 [Hz], Adjusts the frequency (speed) of
note *2
0–127
the change.
Sets the depth to which the ef-
fect is applied.
This setting determines whether
the period for the pattern is reset
(ON), or not (OFF) when sounds
are played.
While the rhythm guide is play-
ing, the period for the pattern is
not reset even if you set this ON.
Depth #
Reset
type sounds.
fig.MFX-43
OFF, ON
L in
L out
R out
Slicer
R in
Slicer
RESET
Parameter
Value
Description
Timing Pattern 1–34
Selects a pattern to specify the
timing at which the sound will
be cut.
LEVEL
Accent Pattern 1–16
Accent Level # 0–127
Specifies the location of the ac-
cents.
Adjusts the volume of the ac-
cents.
As this setting is increased, the
accent will be more pronounced.
Adjusts the attack time of an in-
put sound.
Low Gain
High Gain
Level
-15– +15 [dB]
-15– +15 [dB]
0–127
Adjusts the gain of the low fre-
quency.
Adjusts the gain of the high fre-
quency.
Adjusts the output level.
Attack
0–127
As this setting is increased, the
attack will become faster.
0.05–10.00 [Hz], This sets the period for the pat-
45: AUTO PAN
The Auto Pan effect cyclically modulates the stereo location of the
Rate #
Reset
sound.
fig.MFX-45
note *2
OFF, ON
tern.
Specifies whether the timing
pattern at which the sound is cut
will be reset (ON) or not (OFF)
when you play a sound.
While the rhythm guide is play-
ing, the period for the pattern is
not reset even if you set this ON.
Adjusts the output level.
L in
L out
R out
Auto Pan
Auto Pan
2-Band EQ
2-Band EQ
R in
Level
0–127
Parameter
Value
Description
Mod Wave
TRI, SQR, SIN, TRI: The sound will be modulat-
SAW1/ 2
ed like a triangle wave.
SQR: The sound will be modu-
lated like a square wave.
SIN: The sound will be modulat-
ed like a sine wave.
SAW1/2: The sound will be
modulated like a sawtooth
wave. The teeth in SAW1 and
SAW2 point at opposite direc-
tions.
44: TREMOLO
Tremolo cyclically modulates the volume to add tremolo effect to the
sound.
fig.MFX-44
L in
L out
R out
Tremolo
Tremolo
2-Band EQ
2-Band EQ
R in
SAW1
SAW2
Parameter
Value
Description
Mod Wave
TRI, SQR, SIN, TRI: The sound will be modulat-
SAW1/ 2
ed like a triangle wave.
SQR: The sound will be modu-
lated like a square wave.
SIN: The sound will be modulat-
ed like a sine wave.
Rate #
0.05–10.00 [Hz], Adjusts the frequency (speed) of
note *2
the change.
Depth #
0–127
Sets the depth to which the ef-
fect is applied.
SAW1/2: The sound will be
modulated like a sawtooth
wave. The teeth in SAW1 and
SAW2 point at opposite direc-
tions.
SAW1
SAW2
84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding effects
Parameter
Value
Description
Parameter
Value
Description
Reset
OFF, ON
This setting determines whether
the period for the pattern is reset
(ON), or not (OFF) when sounds
are played.
While the rhythm guide is play-
ing, the period for the pattern is
not reset even if you set this ON.
Balance #
D100:0W–
D0:100W
Adjusts the volume balance be-
tween the direct sound and the
delay sound.
With a setting of D100:0W only the
direct sound will be output, and
with a setting of D0:100W only the
delay sound will be output.
Adjusts the output level.
Level
0–127
RESET
47: FBK RIPPER (Feedback Ripper)
This effect repeatedly cuts the sound, and outputs a delayed sound
for the cut portion. You can create new phrases by applying this to a
LEVEL
drum phrase or other phrase.
fig.MFX-47
Low Gain
High Gain
Level
-15– +15 [dB]
-15– +15 [dB]
0–127
Adjusts the gain of the low fre-
quency.
Adjusts the gain of the high fre-
quency.
2-Band
EQ
L in
Ripper
L out
Adjusts the output level.
Delay
Feedback
Feedback
46:TUMBLING DLY (Tumbling Delay)
This is a delay that first produces “tumbling” delayed repeats, and
then echoes the original sound.
Delay
2-Band
EQ
R in
Ripper
R out
It is most effective when applied to single notes of a “one-shot”
sound.
fig.MFX-46
Parameter
Value
Description
2-Band
EQ
Balance W
Mod Wave
TRI, SQR, SIN, TRI: The sound will be cut by a
L in
L out
R out
Balance D
SAW1/ 2
triangle wave.
SQR: The sound will be cut by a
square wave.
SIN: The sound will be cut by a
sine wave.
SAW1/2: The sound will be cut
by a sawtooth wave. The teeth in
SAW1 and SAW2 point at oppo-
site directions.
Tumbling Delay
Balance W
Feedback
Balance D
2-Band
EQ
R in
Parameter
Type
Value
Description
TYPE1–TYPE6 Selects one of the six available
types for the number of delay
sounds heard in time “A” in the
diagram below.
SAW1
SAW2
Pre Delay
0–500 [ms]
Adjusts time “A” in the diagram
below.
Rate #
0.05–10.00 [Hz], Adjusts the frequency (speed) of
note *2
0–127
the change.
Sets the depth to which the ef-
fect is applied.
Delay Time
0–345 [ms]
Adjusts time “B” in the diagram
below.
Depth #
Delay Left
Level
0–420 [ms], note Adjusts the time from the direct
*1
original tone
sound until the left delay sound
is heard.
Delay Right
0–420 [ms], note Adjusts the time from the direct
*1
sound until the right delay
sound is heard.
A
B
B
Dly Feedback
-98– +98 [%]
Adjusts the proportion (%) of
the delay sound that is fed back
into the effect.
Negative (-) settings will invert
the phase.
This setting determines whether
the period for the pattern is reset
(ON), or not (OFF) when sounds
are played.
While the rhythm guide is play-
ing, the period for the pattern is
not reset even if you set this ON.
Adjusts the output level.
HF Damp
200–8000 [Hz], Adjusts the frequency above
BYPASS
which sound fed back to the ef-
fect will be cut.
If you do not want to cut the
high frequencies of the feed-
back, set this parameter to BY-
PASS.
Adjusts the proportion (%) of
the delay sound that is fed back
into the effect.
Negative (-) settings will invert
the phase.
Reset
Level
OFF, ON
Feedback #
-98– +98 [%]
0–127
85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding effects
Making chorus settings
Regardless of the mode, only one type of chorus can be used
simultaneously.
There are eight types of chorus. You can select any one of these.
After selecting the Type, you can change the values for each of the
parameters.
Type (Chorus Type)
You can choose from 8 types of chorus.
Value
CHORUS 1–4:
General chorus settings. Adds breadth and
fullness to the sound.
FEEDBACK CHORUS: Chorus that produces a flanger-like effect,
creating a soft sound.
FLANGER:
This effect produces a rising and falling
sweep reminiscent of a jet airplane.
This is a delay with a short delay time.
SHORT DELAY:
SHORT DELAY(FB): This is a delay with a short delay time and
many repeats.
“Chorus Type” provides several preset-like example settings of
the chorus parameters. When you switch types, the other chorus
parameters will change according to the settings of the type you
select. If you intend to edit the other parameters, select a type
first, and then edit the other parameters.
Pre-LPF (Chorus pre-low pass filter)
A low-pass filter can be applied to the sound coming into the chorus
to cut the high-frequency range. Higher values will cut more of the
high frequencies, resulting in a more mellow chorus sound.
Value:
0–7
Level (Chorus Level)
Sets the amount of the chorus sound.
Value:
0–127
Feedback (Chorus Feedback Level)
note *1
fig.note_MFX1
Sets the level at which the chorus sound is re-input (fed back) into
the chorus. By using feedback, a denser chorus sound can be created.
Higher values result in a greater feedback level.
(Eighth-note triplet),
(Quarter-note triplet),
(Sixteenth note),
(Dotted sixteenth note),
(Eighth note),
(Dotted eighth note), (Quarter note),
Value:
0–127
(Half-note triplet),
(Dotted quarter note),
(Half note),
Delay (Chorus Delay Time)
note *2
fig.note_MFX2
Sets the delay time of the chorus effect.
Value:
0–127
(Sixty-fourth-note triplet),
(Sixty-fourth note),
(Sixteenth-note triplet),
(Thirty-second-note triplet),
(Dotted thirty-second note),
(Thirty-second note),
Rate (Chorus Rate)
(Eighth-note triplet),
(Quarter-note triplet),
(Half-note triplet),
(Sixteenth note),
(Dotted sixteenth note),
Sets the speed (frequency) at which the chorus sound is modulated.
Higher values result in faster modulation.
(Dotted eighth note),
(Dotted quarter note),
(Eighth note),
(Quarter note),
Value:
0–127
(Half note),
(Whole-note triplet),
(Whole note),
(Double note)
(Dotted half note),
(Double-note triplet), (Dotted whole note),
86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding effects
Depth (Chorus Depth)
Time (Reverb Time)
Sets the depth at which the chorus sound is modulated. Higher
values result in deeper modulation.
Sets the time over which the reverberation will continue. Higher
values result in longer reverberation.
Value:
0–127
Value:
0–127
Send Lvl to Rev (Chorus send level to reverb)
Delay Feedback (Reverb Delay Feedback)
Sets the amount of chorus sound that will be sent to the reverb.
Higher values result in more sound being sent.
This parameter is available when the Reverb Character (Character) is
set to 6, 7 or the Reverb Type (Type) is set to Delay or Panning Delay.
It sets the way in which delays repeat. Higher values result in more
delay repeats.
Value:
0–127
Value:
0–127
Making reverb settings
Regardless of the mode, only one type of reverb can be used
simultaneously.
There are eight types of reverb. You can select any one of these. After
selecting the Type, you can change the values for each of the
parameters.
Type (Reverb Type)
You can choose from 8 types of reverb.
Value
ROOM1–3:
HALL1, 2:
Simulates the reverberation of room interiors. It
produces a well-defined and spacious
reverberation.
Simulates the reverberation exhibited by halls.
They provide a deeper reverberation than the
Room reverbs.
PLATE:
DELAY:
Simulates a plate reverb unit (a type of artificial
reverb that utilized a metal plate).
A standard delay, that produces echo effects.
PANNING DELAY: This is a special delay in which the delayed
sound alternates between left and right. It is
effective when you are listening in stereo.
“Reverb Type” provides several preset-like example settings of
the reverb parameters. When you switch types, the other reverb
parameters will change according to the settings of the type you
select. If you intend to edit the other parameters, select a type
first, and then edit the other parameters.
Character (Reverb Character)
Selects the type of reverb. 0–5 are reverb effects, and 6 and 7 are
delay effects.
Value:
0–7
Pre-LPF (Reverb pre-low pass filter)
A low pass filter can be applied to the sound coming into the reverb
to cut the high frequency range. Higher values will cut more of the
high frequencies, resulting in a more mellow reverberation.
Value:
0–7
Level (Reverb Level)
Sets the amount of the reverberant sound. Higher values result in
louder reverberation.
Value:
0–127
87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Settings common to all modes (System Function)
Settings that affect the entire operating environment of the JUNO-D,
Selecting system setting parameters
fig.r12-02
system functions. This section explains how to make settings for
GENERAL
the System functions and describes the functions of the different
System parameters. The parameters are organized into the following
six groups.
PAGE/
CURSOR [
PAGE/
CURSOR [
• GENERAL:
]
]
]
]
Make settings common to the entire system (p. 89).
• CONTROLLER:
[SHIFT]
+
PAGE/
[SHIFT]
+
PAGE/
Make controller-related settings (p. 89).
• MIDI: Make MIDI-related settings (p. 90).
• PATCH SCALE (Patch Scale Tune):
Make scale tune settings for a patch (p. 91).
CURSOR [
]
CURSOR [
]
PAGE/
CURSOR [
PAGE/
CURSOR [
CONTROLLER
function settings
PAGE/
CURSOR [
PAGE/
CURSOR [
[SHIFT]
+
PAGE/
[SHIFT]
+
PAGE/
]
]
]
]
1. Press [SYSTEM] so it is lit.
2. Select the parameter that you want to edit.
CURSOR [
]
CURSOR [
]
PAGE/
CURSOR [
PAGE/
CURSOR [
“Selecting system setting parameters” (p. 88)
MIDI
3. Use VALUE [-]/[+] to modify the value.
4. Repeat steps 2–3 to make the settings for the System
function.
PAGE/
CURSOR [
PAGE/
CURSOR [
[SHIFT]
+
PAGE/
[SHIFT]
+
PAGE/
]
]
]
]
Changes you make to the system function settings are
temporary, and will be lost when you turn off the power. If you
want to save the settings you modified, perform the following
operation.
CURSOR [
]
CURSOR [
]
PAGE/
CURSOR [
PAGE/
CURSOR [
PATCH SCALE
5. To save the settings you modified, press [WRITE].
fig.r12-01_40
PAGE/
CURSOR [
PAGE/
CURSOR [
]
]
6. Press [ENTER] to execute.
When you save system settings, the previously saved settings
will be overwritten and lost.
If you decide not to save the system function, press [EXIT].
88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Settings common to all modes (System Function)
Settings related to controllers
(CONTROLLER)
Mod (Modulation Assign)
Functions of the system
parameters
System parameter functions are explained here according to the
You can use the modulation lever to apply the following effects
other than vibrato.
group in which they are found.
Settings common to the entire
system (GENERAL)
LCD Contrast
Value
Tx CC#
Function/Parameter
Changed
Vibrato
Portamento Time (p. 47)
Level
The volume balance of LOW-
Pan (p. 46)
MODULATION
PORTA TIME
VOLUME
CC01
CC05
CC07
CC08
Adjusts the contrast of the display.
BALANCE
VALUE:
1–10
PAN
CC10
CC11
CC65
CC66
EXPRESSION
PORTAMENTO
SOSTENUTO
Level
The LCD CONTRAST setting is saved automatically, and is
retained even while the power is off.
Portamento Switch (p. 47)
Holds the sound of the key be-
ing pressed
Master Tune
SOFT
RESONANCE
RELEASE TIME
CC67
CC71
CC72
Softens the tone
Tone Filter Resonance (p. 48)
Tone Envelope Release Time
(p. 48)
Adjusts the overall tuning of the JUNO-D. The display shows the
frequency of the A4 note (center A).
ATTACK TIME
CC73
Tone Envelope Attack Time (p.
48)
VALUE:
415.3–466.2 Hz
CUTOFF
DECAY TIME
CC74
CC75
Tone Filter Cutoff (p. 47)
Tone Envelope Decay Time (p.
48)
Master Key Sft (Master Key Shift)
Shifts the overall pitch of the JUNO-D in semitone steps.
LFO RATE
LFO DEPTH
LFO DELAY
CHO SEND LEVEL
REV SEND LEVEL
MFX PARAMETER1
CC76
CC77
CC78
CC93
CC91
CC12
Tone LFO Rate (p. 47)
Tone LFO Depth (p. 47)
Tone LFO Delay (p. 47)
Chorus Send Level (p. 46)
Reverb Send Level (p. 46)
Multi-effect Control 1 (p. 69)
The parameter specified by
Multi-effect Control 2 (p. 69)
VALUE:
-24–+24
Master Level
Adjusts the volume of the entire JUNO-D.
VALUE:
0–127
MFX PARAMETER2
AFTERTOUCH
CC13
----
Hold Pedal (Hold Pedal Polarity)
Select the polarity of the Hold pedal. On some pedals, the electrical
signal output by the pedal when it is pressed or released is the
opposite of other pedals. If your pedal has an effect opposite of what
you expect, set this parameter to “REVERSE.” If you are using a
Roland pedal (that has no polarity switch), set this parameter to
“STANDARD.”
In Patch mode, the modulation lever will affect the patch. In
Performance mode, the modulation lever will affect the patch that is
assigned to the current part. Use [DESTINATION TONE] to specify
the tone that will be affected (p. 26).
“TxCC#” refers to the controller number of the control change
message sent from the MIDI OUT connector when the modulation
lever is operated. When set to AFTERTOUCH, Channel Aftertouch
control an external sound generator with Aftertouch messages.
Receiving these control change message from the MIDI IN connector
produces the same effect as operating the modulation lever.
VALUE:
STANDARD, REVERSE
Local Control (Local Controller)
The Local Controller determines whether the internal sound
generator is disconnected (OFF) from the keyboard controller section
(keyboard, pitch bend/modulation lever, knobs, buttons, D Beam
controller, pedal, and so on); or not disconnected (ON). Normally,
this is left “ON”, but if you wish to use the JUNO-D’s keyboard and
controllers to control only external sound modules, set it to “OFF.”
* When set to MFX PARAMETER1 or MFX PARAMETER2, be sure
to note the following.
• When the multi-effects Type is set to 01: STEREO EQ (p. 69) or 42:
LOFI (p. 83), Level is changed regardless of whether MFX
PARAMETER1 or MFX PARAMETER2 is selected.
VALUE:
OFF, ON
Clock Source
* When making the LFO RATE, LFO DEPTH or LFO DELAY settings,
the effect achieved differs depending on whether [FILTER LFO] is on or
off. When [FILTER LFO] is off, the LFO alters the pitch (vibrato
effect). When [FILTER LFO] is on, the LFO changes the Filter Cutoff
frequency (wah effect).
Select “MIDI” if you want synchronization-related MIDI messages to
be received from an external sequencer. Select “INT” if you want to
synchronize to the JUNO-D’s internal tempo. The multi-effect
changes will also synchronize to this setting.
VALUE:
INT, MIDI
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Settings common to all modes (System Function)
Pedal (Pedal Control Assign)
Settings related to MIDI (MIDI)
Patch Rx Ch (Patch Receive Channel)
This specifies the function of the pedal connected to the CONTROL
PEDAL jack.
Specifies the receive channel of MIDI messages in Patch mode.
VALUE
VALUE: 1–16
In addition to the items listed in Modulation Assign, you can use the
pedal to apply the following effects.
Patch Tx Ch (Patch Transmit Channel)
TAP TEMPO:
Use the pedal to make tap tempo settings (p. 37).
Specifies the transmit channel of MIDI messages in Patch mode. If
you do not want to transmit MIDI messages to external MIDI
devices, turn this parameter “OFF.” If you want the transmit channel
to always match the Patch Receive Channel, set this parameter to
“RxCh.”
C1 (C1 Knob Assign)
C2 (C2 Knob Assign)
C3 (C3 Knob Assign)
VALUE:
1–16, RxCh, OFF
Select the effects that will be controlled by the [C1]/[C2]/[C3] knobs.
VALUE
Perform Ctrl Ch (Performance Control Channel)
In addition to the items listed in Modulation Assign, you can use the
pedal to apply the following effects.
Performance Ctrl Ch selects the MIDI receive channel used during
switching of performances when MIDI messages (Program Change/
Bank Select) are sent from an external MIDI device. Set this to “OFF”
if performances are not to be switched from an external MIDI device.
PATCH MODIFY: The effect indicated on the panel will be
controlled (p. 26).
* If you assign any effects other than PATCH MODIFY to the [C1]/
[C2]/[C3] knobs, you must switch the Patch Modify select button
to [ENV] (envelope). If [BALANCE/LFO] is selected, the balance and
LFO will change.
VALUE:
1–16, OFF
If only a program change is received, and if the Perform Ctrl Ch
parameter setting coincides with the MIDI receive channel of a
part, priority will be given to switching the performance.
* If you are using the [C1]/[C2]/[C3] knobs in Performance mode to
control MFX PARAMETER settings, the “MFX Source” (p. 56)
setting will determine the part whose effect will be controlled.
If MFX Source is set to “Part1–16,” the effect of that part will be
controlled.
If this is set to 1–16, the JUNO-D will transmit MIDI messages
(program change/bank select) on that channel when the
performance is switched.
If MFX Source is set to “PERFORM,” the System “Perform Ctrl Ch
(Performance Control Channel)” (p. 90) setting will determine
the part whose effect will be controlled. If this setting is “OFF,” no
effect will be controlled.
Rx Prog Chg (Receive Program Change Switch)
Specifies whether Program Change messages will be received (ON)
or not (OFF).
VALUE:
OFF, ON
Rx Bank Sel (Receive Bank Select Switch)
Specifies whether Bank Select messages will be received (ON) or not
(OFF).
VALUE:
OFF, ON
Rx Sys Exc (Receive System Exclusive Switch)
Specifies whether System Exclusive messages will be received (ON)
or not (OFF).
VALUE:
OFF, ON
Tx Prog Chg (Transmit Program Change
Switch)
Specifies whether Program Change messages will be transmitted
(ON) or not (OFF).
VALUE:
OFF, ON
Tx Bank Sel (Transmit Bank Select Switch)
Specifies whether Bank Select messages will be transmitted (ON) or
not (OFF).
VALUE:
OFF, ON
90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Settings common to all modes (System Function)
Tx Edit Data (Transmit Edit Data Switch)
Specify whether changes you make in the settings of a patch or
performance will be transmitted as system exclusive messages (ON),
or will not be transmitted (OFF).
VALUE:
OFF, ON
Tx Active Sens (Transmit Active Sensing
Switch)
Specifies whether Active Sensing messages will be transmitted (ON)
or not (OFF).
VALUE:
OFF, ON
Device ID (Device ID Number)
When you want to transmit or receive System Exclusive messages,
set this parameter to match the Device ID number of the other MIDI
device.
VALUE:
17–32
Soft Thru (Soft Through Switch)
The Thru function re-transmits all messages received at the MIDI IN
connector to the MIDI OUT connector without modifying them in
any way.
VALUE:
OFF, ON
patch (PATCH SCALE)
The Patch Scale function lets you use a variety of tunings for patches
used in Patch mode.
If you want to make scale tune settings for each part in
Performance mode, refer to “Editing the scale tune settings
(SCALE TUNE)” (p. 58).
You can switch the “Type” parameter to recall various sample
settings for Patch Scale. When you change “Type,” all patch scale
tune parameters will be changed automatically.
VALUE:
EQUAL, JUST (maj) in C, JUST (min) in C, ARABIC
For details on each type, refer to “Type (Part Scale Tune
Type)” (p. 58).
Tune C–Tune B (Patch Scale Tune C–B)
Make scale tune settings for Patch mode.
VALUE:
-64–+63
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performing with an external MIDI device
Example:
About MIDI
Set the JUNO-D to send on Channel 1 and Channel 2, then set sound
module A to receive only Channel 1, and sound module B to receive
only Channel 2. With this setup, you can get an ensemble
MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) is a standard
specification that allows music data to be exchanged among
electronic musical instruments and computers. By connecting MIDI
devices that are equipped with MIDI connectors, you can play
multiple instruments with a single keyboard, have multiple MIDI
instruments perform in ensemble, program the settings to change
automatically to match the performance as the song progresses, and
more.
performance, with, for example, a guitar sound from sound module
A and bass from sound module B.
fig.r10-03.e
MIDI OUT
MIDI IN
MIDI THRU
Transmit channel: 1, 2
Receive channel: 1
Sound
Module
A
If you mainly use the JUNO-D as a standalone keyboard instrument,
you may really not need to know much at all about MIDI. However,
the following MIDI-related information is provided so you can play
the JUNO-D using an external MIDI device, or master other
advanced techniques.
Receive channel: 2
MIDI IN
MIDI keyboard
Sound
Module
B
When used as a sound module, the JUNO-D can receive on up to
sixteen MIDI channels. Sound modules like the JUNO-D, which can
receive multiple MIDI channels simultaneously and play different
sounds on each channel, are called “multitimbral sound modules.”
MIDI connectors
The JUNO-D has the following two types of MIDI connectors.
fig.r10-01
MIDI messages used by the JUNO-D
MIDI uses various types of messages to transmit a wide variety of
information. MIDI messages are broadly divided into two different
categories, those handled through individual MIDI channels
(Channel messages), and messages that are not related to separate
channels (System messages).
•
MIDI IN Connector
Performance messages from an external MIDI device are received
here. When the JUNO-D receives MIDI messages, it will produce
sound, change the sound it’s using, or perform other operations.
The JUNO-D mainly uses the following MIDI messages.
•
MIDI OUT Connector
This connector transmits MIDI messages to external MIDI devices.
The JUNO-D’s MIDI OUT connector is used for sending the
performance data of the keyboard controller section, as well as the
data used for saving various settings.
Channel messages
These are messages used for conveying what is happening in a
performance. These comprise the bulk of MIDI messages.
Note On
MIDI channels and multitimbral sound
generators
This message is sent when a key is pressed. A Note-on message
contains the following three types of information:
MIDI transmits many types of data over a single MIDI cable. This is
made possible by MIDI channels. MIDI channels allow messages
intended for a given instrument to be distinguished from messages
intended for another instrument. In some ways, MIDI channels are
similar to television channels. By changing the channel on a TV
receiver you can view the programs of different stations. This is
because the television set has thus been directed to selectively
display only the information being transmitted by a particular
station. In the same way, MIDI also allows a device to select the
information intended for that device out of the variety of
Note-on:
Note number: Which key was played
Velocity: The amount of force (velocity) used when the key
was played.
A key has been played.
The Note Numbers fall within the range of 0–127, with middle C
(C4) as number 60.
fig.r10-04.e
information that is being transmitted to it.
fig.r10-02.e
Note name
C4
C-1
0
C2
C3
C5
C6
G9
The cable from the antenna carries the TV
signals from many broadcast stations.
36
48
60
72
84
127
Note number
Station A
Station B
Station C
Note Off
This message is sent when a key is released. When a Note-off
message is received, the relevant note will be turned off. A Note-off
message contains the following three types of information:
The TV is set to the channel of the station
you wish to watch.
Note-off:
Note number: Which key was released
Velocity: The force (velocity) used during release of the key.
A key was released
MIDI uses sixteen channels, numbered 1–16. Normally, receiving
devices should be set so they receive only the channels they need to
receive.
92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performing with an external MIDI device
Pitch Bend Change
Using the JUNO-D to play an
external MIDI sound module
This message transmits whatever motion is made by the Pitch Bend
lever.
By connecting the JUNO-D to an external MIDI sound module with
a MIDI cable and setting the channels, the external MIDI module can
be used to produce sound when you play the JUNO-D’s keyboard.
Aftertouch
These messages indicates how strongly the keyboard was pressed
after playing a note. There are two types of Aftertouch message:
Channel Aftertouch, which applies to an entire channel; and
The JUNO-D cannot transmit Aftertouch messages when its keys are
pressed. Instead, you can do this by transmitting the Aftertouch
assigned to the D Beam, Modulation lever, a pedal, or a knob.
modules
Example 1: Connecting to one external MIDI sound module
fig.r10-05.e
MIDI IN
Program Change
This message changes the instrument sound. You can switch Patches
Sound Module A
MIDI OUT
95).
Control Change
These are messages used for increasing performance expression. By
assigning Modulation (CC# (Controller Number) 1), Pan (CC#10),
Expression (CC#11), and other Control Change messages to the
Modulation lever, pedals, and knobs, you can then use these controls
to change Performances (p. 89).
JUNO-D
Example 2: Connecting to two external MIDI sound modules
fig.r10-06.e
MIDI IN
MIDI THRU
Bank Select (CC#0, CC#32) messages are used in combination with
Program Change messages to switch Patches and Rhythm Sets (p.
95).
Sound Module A
MIDI IN
System messages
This category includes exclusive messages, messages used for
synchronization, and messages that keep a MIDI system running
correctly.
Sound Module B
MIDI OUT
Exclusive messages
Exclusive messages are messages used for exchanging patches and
other kinds of data between compatible devices from the same
manufacturer.
JUNO-D
* Messages received at the MIDI IN connector are output from the MIDI
THRU connector unchanged.
If messages exchanged using MIDI were limited only to those that
conform to the universally shared MIDI specifications, it would not
be possible to transmit messages that are unique to a particular
manufacturer, or that are designed specifically for a certain device.
For this reason, MIDI allows for an exclusive format for each
manufacturer, which can be used to exchange a variety of messages.
On the JUNO-D, you can use Exclusive messages to store Patch
settings and other data to sequencers (p. 98).
Example 3: Connecting to three or more external MIDI sound
modules
fig.r10-07.e
MIDI IN
MIDI Patcher
MIDI IN
About MIDI Implementation Charts
Sound Module A
MIDI IN
Although a variety of messages for performances can be
handled using MIDI, depending on the functions of the
connected device, the messages that can be sent and received
may differ. To see which types of MIDI message a device can
transmit and receive, refer to the MIDI Implementation Chart
that is included in the manual of each device. Messages which
are marked by a circle in the charts of both devices can be
transmitted between the two devices.
MIDI OUT
Sound Module B
JUNO-D
93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performing with an external MIDI device
errors may occur. In such cases, use a MIDI Patcher. MIDI Patcher are
devices that allow a single stream of MIDI data to be sent to a large
number of MIDI devices without causing data errors.
When you select a patch or rhythm set on the JUNO-D, a bank
number and program number will be transmitted to the external
MIDI sound module as described in the “Bank number/
program number correspondence table” (p. 95). This will
external MIDI sound module receives a bank number for which
it provides no sounds, it may choose a substitute sound or may
produce no sound at all. In order to select a sound reliably, you
may wish to first select the sound group on your external MIDI
sound module, and then transmit only a program number. This
will allow you to switch sounds within the same group.
If you want to transmit only the program number, turn “Tx
Bank Sel (Transmit Bank Select Switch)” (p. 90) off.
1. Before starting the connection procedure, make sure that
the power to all devices has been turned off.
2. After reading “Connecting the JUNO-D to external
equipment” (p. 14), connect an audio device/system or
headphones.
3. Connect the external MIDI sound device with the MIDI cable
as shown in the figure above.
4. As described in “Turning on the power” (p. 15), turn on the
power of each device.
Playing the JUNO-D’s sound
generator from an external
MIDI device
Set the keyboard transmit channel
When you have finished connecting the external MIDI device, match
the keyboard’s Transmit channel and the Receive channel for each of
the external MIDI sound generator’s Parts. Here we will explain the
settings for using the JUNO-D in Patch mode.
Next, try playing the JUNO-D from an external MIDI device.
1. Press [SYSTEM] so it is lit.
Connecting an external MIDI device
2. Use PAGE/CURSOR [
fig.r10-08_40
]/[
] to select “Patch Tx Ch.”
fig.r10-10.e
MIDI OUT
By holding down [SHIFT] and using PAGE/CURSOR [
]/
[
] you can quickly select the “SYSTEM|MIDI” group (p. 88).
MIDI Keyboard
MIDI IN
3. Use VALUE [-]/[+] to modify the value.
Value
1–16:
RxCH:
OFF:
Performance data will be transmitted on the same
channel as the Receive Channel (p. 57) of the part.
Performance data will not be transmitted.
JUNO-D
Normally, you will use the “RxCH” setting.
1. Before starting the connection procedure, make sure that
4. Press [WRITE] to save the settings.
the power to all devices has been turned off.
For further information, refer to “How to make the system
function settings” (p. 88).
2. After reading “Connecting the JUNO-D to external
equipment” (p. 14), connect an audio device/system or
headphones.
Press [EXIT] to cancel the operation and return to the previous page.
With the above settings, when the JUNO-D’s keyboard is played,
sounds are simultaneously played by the JUNO-D and the external
MIDI sound generator.
3. Connect the external MIDI sound device with the MIDI cable
as shown in the figure below.
For instructions on setting the Receive channel for each of the Parts
of the external MIDI sound generator, refer to the owner’s manual
that came with the device.
4. As described in “Turning on the power” (p. 15), turn on the
power of each device.
* If you want sounds to be played only by the external MIDI sound
generator, set Local control to OFF (p. 96).
94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performing with an external MIDI device
Setting the patch receive channel
Selecting JUNO-D sounds from an
external MIDI device
Transmitting Bank Select (Controller Numbers 0 & 32) and Program
Change messages from the external MIDI device to the JUNO-D
allows you to switch patches and rhythm sets.
When you have finished connecting the external MIDI device, match
JUNO-D’s Receive channel with the external MIDI device’s Transmit
channel. Here we will explain the settings for using the JUNO-D in
Patch mode.
1. Press [SYSTEM] so it is lit.
1. Transmit a value for the Bank Select MSB (controller number
2. Use PAGE/CURSOR [
]/[
] to select “Patch Rx Ch”
0) (BnH 00H mmH) message to the JUNO-D.
(patch receive channel).
fig.r10-11_40
2. Transmit a value for the Bank Select LSB (controller number
32) (BnH 20H llH) message to the JUNO-D.
3. Transmit a Program Change (CnH ppH) to the JUNO-D.
n:
mm, ll: Bank number
pp: Program number
MIDI channel number
By holding down [SHIFT] and using PAGE/CURSOR [
]/
[
] you can quickly select the “SYSTEM|MIDI” group (p. 90).
3. Use VALUE [-]/[+] to modify the value.
The “Perform Ctrl Ch” (Performance Control Channel) setting
lets you switch performances in Performance mode. With the
factory settings, this is set to “OFF”; performances will not be
switched.
VALUE
1–16:
Performance data of each part will be received on
the selected channel.
Setting the program change receive
switch
Then, to enable tones to be switched from the external MIDI device,
set the Receive Switch for Program Change and Bank Select to ON.
Factory settings have these set to ON.
Bank number/program number
correspondence table
The MIDI messages transmitted by an external MIDI device
correspond with patches/rhythm sets on the JUNO-D as shown in
the following table.
1. Press [SYSTEM] so it is lit.
* If the Program numbers on your external MIDI device are referenced as
from the number in the following correspondence chart.
2. Use PAGE/CURSOR [
]/[
] to select “Rx Prog Chg”
(Receive Program Change Switch) and “Rx Bank Sel”
(Receive Bank Select Switch).
* When the JUNO-D receives a Program Change message without
receiving the Bank Select, it switches to the patch or rhythm set with
the same Bank number as the currently selected patch or rhythm set.
3. Use VALUE [-]/[+] to set both parameters to “ON.”
4. Press [WRITE] to save the settings.
For further information, refer to “How to make the system
function settings” (p. 88).
For details on how numbers in the table correspond to the sound
of the JUNO-D, refer to “Patch list” (p. 111).
Press [EXIT] to cancel the operation and return to the previous page.
Performance
* For instructions on setting the external MIDI device’s Transmit
channel, refer to the owner’s manual for that device.
Group
Number
Bank Number
Program
Number
001–008
001–032
MSB
085
LSB
000
064
* If you are using Performance mode, you will also need to set “Receive
Sw,” “Receive Prg Chg,” and “Receive Bank Sel” for each part in
addition to the settings described above (p. 57).
User
Preset
001–008
001–032
085
Patch
Group
Number
Bank Number
Program
Number
001–128
001–128
001–128
001–128
001–128
001–128
001–128
MSB
087
087
087
087
087
087
121
LSB
User
Preset
001–128
001–128
129–256
257–384
385–512
513–640
001–256
000
064
065
066
067
068
000–
GM Patch
95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performing with an external MIDI device
Rhythm Set
Making settings before recording
Group
Number
Bank Number
Program
Number
001–002
001–057
When recording to an external sequencer, the following steps must
be carried out.
MSB
086
LSB
User
Preset
GM Rhythm
001–002
001–009
000
000
•
•
•
Turn on the external sequencer’s Thru function (p. 97).
Set the performance (p. 97).
120
Using an external MIDI controller to
change the JUNO-D’s tones
Use of the Modulation lever, pedals, and control knobs to make
changes to the JUNO-D’s tones in real time is explained in “Settings
related to controllers (CONTROLLER)” (p. 89).
Setting the JUNO-D’s local control to
OFF
The setting that determines whether the keyboard controller section
(p. 40) and sound generator section are separated is referred to as
“Local Control.”
Transmitting Controller numbers set with Modulation Assign (p.
89), Pedal Control Assign (p. 90), and Knob Assign (p. 90) to the
JUNO-D achieves the same effect as working the Modulation lever,
pedals, and knobs.
When Local Control is on, playing the keyboard will produce sound,
and moving the pitch bend lever will control the pitch.
When Local Control is off, playing the keyboard will not produce
sound, and moving the pitch bend lever will not control pitch. The
sound generator of the JUNO-D will produce sound only in response
to messages received from an external MIDI device.
fig.r10-21.e
Recording to an external
sequencer
Sequencer
Now, try using an external sequencer to record your music onto
Recording
All performance data
that arrives at MIDI IN
will be output from
multiple tracks, and then play back the recorded performance.
Set Thru
Function to On.
MIDI OUT.
Connecting to an external sequencer
fig.r10-20.e
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
Sound Generating
Section
Set Local
Control to Off.
While at this setting,
the JUNO-D’s keyboard
and controllers are
disconnected from
MIDI Sequencer
the sound generating
section, so they will not
directly control it.
Section
JUNO-D
JUNO-D
The performance data from the JUNO-D’s keyboard controller
section is output from the MIDI OUT connector and recorded by the
sequencer. This performance data is then also output back to the
JUNO-D from the sequencer’s MIDI OUT connector and played by
the JUNO-D’s sound generator.
1. Before starting the connection procedure, make sure that
the power to all devices has been turned off.
2. After reading “Connecting the JUNO-D to external
equipment” (p. 14), connect an audio device/system or
headphones.
If Local Control were ON, each note would be played twice; once by
the music data from the keyboard controller section, and once again
by the data sent from the sequencer. In order to prevent such double
triggering, the Local Control setting is turned off to separate the
keyboard controller section from the sound generating section.
3. Connect the external MIDI sound device with a MIDI cable as
shown in the figure below.
4. As described in “Turning on the power” (p. 15), turn on the
* If your sequencer does not have a Thru function, set the JUNO-D’s
Local Control to ON.
power of each device.
1. Press [SYSTEM] so it is lit.
96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performing with an external MIDI device
fig.r10-22_40
]/[
] to select “Local Control.”
1. In Performance mode, press [UTILITY] so it is lit.
2. Use PAGE/CURSOR [
]/[
] to select “XFER to MIDI.”
3. Press [ENTER].
Make “XFER to MIDI” settings as described in “Transmitting
performance settings from the MIDI OUT connector (XFER
to MIDI)” (p. 61).
By holding down [SHIFT] and using PAGE/CURSOR [
]/
[
] you can quickly select the “SYSTEM|GENERAL” group
Select “CUR PERFORM” for “What.”
(p. 90).
4. Put your external sequencer in recording mode before you
3. Use VALUE [-]/[+] to set the parameter to “OFF.”
execute “XFER to MIDI.”
4. Press [WRITE] to save the settings.
For further information, refer to “How to make the system
function settings” (p. 88).
5. Press [ENTER] to transmit the settings.
Do not press any key on the keyboard while the transmission is
in progress. Pressing a key sends Note messages from the MIDI
OUT connector.
Press [EXIT] to cancel the operation and return to the previous page.
* Regardless of the Local Control setting, music data from an external
MIDI device is always received and will play the internal sound
generator.
To cancel the transmission, press [EXIT].
6. After the transmission is finished, the display will indicate
“COMPLETED.”
7. Stop the external sequencer.
Turning on the external sequencer’s
thru function
Turn the sequencer’s Thru function ON. The sequencer takes the
performance data received at the MIDI IN connector and outputs the
data unchanged from the MIDI OUT connector (refer to the previous
section).
Recording each part separately
Next, we will record the music data for each Part onto separate
tracks. We will start recording the song from the measure following
the one in which the Performance settings were recorded.
We will record tracks in the order of drums → bass →
accompaniment → melody, while listening to the tracks that were
recorded on previous passes.
To determine whether or not your sequencer features a MIDI Thru
function and for instructions on making the Thru function setting,
refer to the owner’s manual for your sequencer.
For example, assign Tones to each Part as shown below.
* If your sequencer does not have a Thru function, set the JUNO-D’s
Local Control to ON.
Drums:
Bass:
Part 10
Part 9
Accompaniment: Part 6
Melody: Part 3
Before beginning to record, first make the Performance settings
(select the Patches and Key mode, make any multi-effects, chorus,
and reverb settings, set the knobs, and so on).
* Tone changes, and the actions of the Pitch Bend lever, Modulation
lever, knobs, and other controls are also recorded.
* It is not necessary to record the song at the tempo at which it is to be
played back. You may record at a tempo that is comfortable for you.
Also set the Receive Channel and Receive Switch for each part
(p. 57)
Listening to the recorded
performance
Recording
When you finish recording all Parts, play it back and listen to the
result. Note the following when playing back a song.
Recording the performance’s settings
at the beginning of the song
First, record the Performance settings at the beginning of the song. If
this is done, playing back the song from the beginning will
automatically set the JUNO-D to the Performance settings that were
used during recording (regardless of the Performance that was
selected when playback began), ensuring that playback will use the
correct sounds and settings.
* If you modify the settings of each Part (volume, panning, etc.), you will
need to re-record the modified performance settings at the beginning of
the song.
Set the “Rx Sys Exc” (System Exclusive
Receive Switch) to ON (p. 90)
When set to OFF, the performance settings recorded at the beginning
of the song cannot be received. With the factory settings, this will be
“ON.”
* Record the song at the tempo at which it is to be played back. If the
tempo used for playback of a song is changed from the tempo selected at
the time of recording, the JUNO-D may not be able to correctly receive
the settings for the recorded Performance, which may prevent proper
playback of the performance data.
97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performing with an external MIDI device
Set the same Device ID number used for
recording (p. 91)
Using the JUNO-D as a
General MIDI/General MIDI 2
module
You can play back music data designed for General MIDI and
General MIDI 2 sound generators by connecting an external
sequencer and using the JUNO-D as a sound module.
If not set to the same Device ID number, the performance settings
recorded at the beginning of the song cannot be received.
Make sure to start playback at the beginning
of the song
When playback of a song is started at any point other than the
beginning, the performance settings at the time of recording are not
used, and the song is not played back correctly.
For instructions on connecting the external sequencer, refer to p.
96.
Playing together with the playback
of a recorded performance
You can play the JUNO-D’s keyboard along with a previous
performance by playing while the recorded material is played back.
In this case, select a Part that was not recorded for playing the
keyboard.
Playing back General MIDI/General
MIDI 2 music data
Be sure to note the following when playing back General MIDI or
General MIDI 2 music data.
Set the System Exclusive Receive Switch to ON
(p. 90).
Transposing playback of
performances (Master Key Shift)
When set to OFF, GM System On and GM 2 System On MIDI
messages cannot be received. With the factory settings, this will be
“ON.”
If you wish to transpose the playback of a song, use the Master Key
Shift setting. This setting will transpose all Parts except for the Drum
Part. You can specify a transposition of up to +/-2 octaves in
semitone steps.
Make sure to play back from the beginning of
the song
1. Press [SYSTEM] so it is lit.
When playback of a song is started at any point other than the
settings for General MIDI and General MIDI 2, so the song won’t be
played back correctly.
2. Use PAGE/CURSOR [
fig.r10-23_40
]/[
3. Use VALUE [-]/[+] to specify the value (-24– +24).
Value: -24– +24
4. Press [WRITE] to save the settings.
For further information, refer to “How to make the system
function settings” (p. 88).
Press [EXIT] to cancel the operation and return to the previous
page.
Backing-up (saving) all JUNO-
D settings on your external
MIDI sequencer
By executing the Performance or Patch Utility “XFER to MIDI”
command (p. 51, p. 61) with DUMP ALL selected as the content to be
transmitted (What), you can transmit all of the user area data
(patches, performances, system, etc.) from the MIDI OUT connector.
By recording these messages on your external MIDI sequencer and
saving them, you can back up all of the JUNO-D’s data. If you want
to restore the backed-up data into the JUNO-D once again, send the
data to the JUNO-D’s MIDI IN. Do not operate the JUNO-D while
this data is being received.
98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performing with a computer
If you are using music software running on a computer, you can use the computer
to operate the JUNO-D’s controls. Not only can you create and play back song data,
you can also have Tones switch automatically.
What’s more, you can use the included JUNO-D Editor software to create Tones
using the computer.
Connecting with MIDI cables
A MIDI interface is required for making MIDI connections with a computer. The
MIDI interface is connected to the computer, and two MIDI cables connect the MIDI
connectors of the MIDI interface to the JUNO-D’s MIDI connectors.
fig.Midi-00.e
JUNO-D rear panel
MIDI
Interface
Macintosh IIci
MIDI OUT
MIDI IN
MIDI cable
Installing the included editor software
To help you get more out of your JUNO-D, it comes with JUNO-D Editor software.
Use JUNO-D Editor to freely create your own original sounds.
Detailed instructions on installing the software can be found in the online manual
contained on the JUNO-D Editor CD-ROM.
• Windows users
In the JUNO-D Editor CD-ROM, open the Readme_E.txt.
• Macintosh users
In the JUNO-D Editor CD-ROM, open the ReadMe(English).
99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memo
100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your system is not operating as you think it should be, first check
the following points. If after checking these points the
• If using an external MIDI device to sound the JUNO-D, each
Part’s reception channel needs to be set so it matches the
channels that will be used for transmission by the external MIDI
device (p. 94).
problem persists, consult your dealer or local Roland Service Station.
* If any sort of message is being displayed on the screen during an
operation, refer to “Error Messages/Messages” (p. 105).
movements, or by MIDI messages (expression
messages) received from an external MIDI
device?
No power
Is the MIDI Rx (Receive) Switch of the
corresponding part set to “OFF”?
Is the AC Adapter plugged into the power
socket correctly?
(p. 95).
No sound
messages transmitted by an external device
have the wrong values?
Is the power for the connected amp and
speakers turned on? (p. 15)
that the correct Bank Select and Program Change messages (p.
95) are transmitted.
Is the volume turned down?
Check the volume settings for the JUNO-D and any connected
amp or mixer (p. 15).
Is the Clock Source set to MIDI?
Are the components properly connected? (p. 14)
synchronized with the tempo will not work. Set the clock source
to “INT” except when you want to synchronize the JUNO-D
with an external MIDI device (p. 89).
If you are able to hear sound through headphones, this may
suggest a short in a cable or a malfunctioning amp or mixer.
Recheck connector cables and the connected equipment.
If you are in Performance mode, have the Part
Level settings been lowered? (p. 56)
for listening to demo songs?
Could Transpose be on? (p. 31)
Is [SOLO SYNTH] set to ON?
Are the Scale Tune settings correct? (p. 91, p.
58)
The JUNO-D does not sound if you just switch [SOLO SYNTH]
on. Hold down keys, then move your hand over the D Beam (p.
32).
Are the Master Key Shift settings correct? (p.
89)
Are the effects settings correct?
Are the Master Tune settings correct? (p. 89)
Check effects ON/OFF (p. 65), multi-effects levels (p. 46, p. 56),
and other related settings.
Sounds are missing
Has the pitch of the patch exceeded the range
in which it can be sounded normally?
Could a Solo switch be set to ON?
Use “Octave Shift” to lower (raise) the range being played (p.
when more than one key is pressed. If you want multiple sounds
to play simultaneously, set the Solo switch to OFF.
30).
If no sound is produced when you press keys
Are you attempting to play more than 64
voices simultaneously?
Set Local Control to ON (p. 89).
• Reduce the number of notes that are played simultaneously.
• Set Voice Reserve higher for an important Part, to help assure
that it will always be sounded (p. 56).
Do the transmission and reception channels match?
• If using the JUNO-D to sound an external MIDI sound generator,
check to make sure the channels being used for transmission by
the keyboard are matched up with the channels used for
reception by the relevant Parts on the external MIDI sound
generator (p. 93).
102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Notes are delayed or unsteady
during playback a song from
65)
The JUNO-D contains some patches that are intended for live
playing in Patch mode; these include tones that use four voices for
each note, or patches that use the Dual function to produce rich
module, playback may be smoother if you avoid using such sounds,
and instead choose sounds that use fewer voices.
Are the Chorus settings correct?
Check the Chorus Level (p. 86), Chorus Depth (p. 87), and
Chorus Send Level (p. 46, p. 58) settings.
Check the Reverb Level (p. 87) and Reverb Send Level (p. 46, p.
58) settings.
• Refer to “Patch list” (p. 111), and switch to patches that use
• Select patches whose KEY MODE is other than “DUAL.”
• If the number of notes you are attempting to play
simultaneously is significantly greater than the maximum
polyphony, reduce the number of note messages in the data.
• In some cases, you may be able to lighten the load of multiple
notes by shortening the release of patches used in sections where
the data is especially dense.
rhythm set correct?
53) settings for each note of the rhythm set.
Set the Multi-Effects switch for the part being used to ON (p. 46,
p. 58).
If you playback a song that contains an extremely large amount of
data, notes may be delayed or unsteady during playback. This
problem can also occur if the tempo is speeded up excessively.
• Delete unneeded note data or knob data from the song.
• Move notes that were input at the same location as chords, so
that they are staggered slightly.
Are the Multi-Effects Source setting correct? (p.
56)
Is the Clock Source set to “MIDI?”
If you set the clock source (p. 89) to “MIDI,” some of the effects
that are synchronized with the tempo will not work. Set the
clock source to “INT” except when you want to synchronize the
JUNO-D with an external MIDI device.
• Move data of parts other than the rhythm part slightly forward
or backward.
Song data cannot be played
back correctly
Is the Tone Delay time value set to the note?
There is a maximum permissible value for the Delay Time
parameter for such as 17: St DELAY. So, if the time setting is
specified in terms of a note value, and the tempo is slowed
down, this maximum permissible value will be reached, and it
cannot be increased further.
Did you start playback at some point other
than the beginning of the song?
MIDI 2 System sound generators have a GM/GM2 System On
message recorded at the beginning of the song. If this message is
not received, the song data may not play back correctly.
The upper time limit for each is the maximum value that can be
set other than the numerical value for the beat.
something other than General MIDI 2 or
General MIDI?
If you are using the [C1]/[C2]/[C3] knobs in Performance mode
to control MFX PARAMETER settings, the “MFX Source” (p. 56)
setting will determine the part whose effect will be controlled.
If MFX Source is set to “Part1–16,” the effect of that part will be
controlled.
The sound generator of the JUNO-D conforms to General MIDI 2
system. It is not compatible with song data that uses formats
other than General MIDI 2 or General MIDI.
If MFX Source is set to “PERFORM,” the System “Perform Ctrl
Ch (Performance Control Channel)” (p. 90) setting will
determine the part whose effect will be controlled. If this setting
is “OFF,” no effect will be controlled.
103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Cannot play phrase/arpeggios
Using sequencer software,
the sound
received at the MIDI IN connector is not sent from the MIDI OUT
connector as is) for Exclusive messages. When recording Exclusive
messages with such sequencer software, set Local Control to ON (p.
89).
Is the MIDI clock not being received when
Clock Source (p. 89) is set to MIDI?
Set the system so that the MIDI clock is received from the
external MIDI device. Certain MIDI devices you may have
connected may not send the MIDI clock to the JUNO-D except
during recording or playback.
Sound does not stop when key
is pressed
MIDI messages not received
correctly
Are the Patch Receive channel settings correct?
(p. 90).
Is each Receive switch set correctly?
Check the Performance Control Channel (p. 90), Receive
Program Change switch (p. 90), Receive Bank Select switch (p.
90), Receive System Exclusive switch (p. 90) settings.
Are Device ID number settings correct?
Set the Device ID number (p. 91) used when the Exclusive
message was recorded to the sequencer.
Is the sequencer playback tempo correct?
Play back the data on the sequencer at the tempo used when the
correctly
Are the Patch transmission channel settings
correct? (p. 95)
Is each Transmission switch set correctly?
Check the Transmit Program Change switch (p. 90), Transmit
Bank Select switch (p. 90), Transmit Edit Data switch (p. 91),
Transmit Active Sensing switch (p. 91) settings.
104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error Messages/Messages
Message
Meaning
Action
Checksum Error
The checksum of a received System Exclusive mes-
sage was incorrect.
Set the correct checksum value.
MIDI Buffer Full
Due to an inordinate volume of MIDI messages re-
ceived, the JUNO-D has failed to process them prop-
erly.
Reduce the amount of MIDI messages to be transmit-
ted.
MIDI Communication Error
Receive Data Error
A problem has occurred with the MIDI cable connec-
tions.
A MIDI message was received incorrectly.
Check that MIDI cables are not broken or pulled out.
If the same error message is displayed repeatedly, the
problem lies with the MIDI messages that are being
transmitted to the JUNO-D.
User Memory Damaged
CANCELED
The data in user memory has been lost.
Use the Factory Reset function to initialize the mem-
ory to the factory settings.
—
Processing is canceled. (This is not an error message.)
105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parameter list
Patch parameters
Patches
Patch Common parameters (p. 45)
Parameters
Value
Name
Patch Name
space, A–Z, a–z, 0–9, ! “ # $ % & ‘ ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ ¥ ] ^ _
` { | }
Category
Key Mode
* Refer to “Selecting a patch by category” (p. 20).
SINGLE, SPLIT, DUAL
Patch Level
Tone Balance
Split Point
0–127
-64 (LOWER) – +63 (UPPER)
A0–C8
Split Arp
Split Arpeggio
UPPER, LOWER, BOTH
OFF, ON, UPPER, LOWER
UPPER, LOWER, BOTH
UPPER, LOWER, BOTH
UPPER, LOWER, BOTH
* This is linked with the panel’s [DESTINATION TONE] setting.
UPPER, LOWER, BOTH
OFF, ON
Solo Switch
ModulationDst
PitchBend Dst
Modify Dest
Modulation Destination
Pitch Bend Destination
Modify Destination
ExpressionDst
Active Exp Sw
Expression Destination
Active Expression Switch
Patch Tone parameters (p. 46)
Parameters
Value
No.
Tone Pan
Original Tone Number
0001–0640
L64–63R
BYPASS, ON
0–127
MFX Switch
Chorus Send Lvl
Reverb Send Lvl
Coarse Tune
Fine Tune
Portamento Sw
Portamento Time
Velo Sens Depth
Velo Sens Ofs
Pitch Bend Range
Filter LFO
LFO Rate
LFO Depth
LFO Delay
Cutoff Freq
Resonance
Multi-Effects Switch
Chorus Send Level
Reverb Send Level
0–127
-48– +48
-50– +50
OFF, ON
0–127
-64– +63
-64– +63
0–24
OFF(PCH), ON(FLT)
-64– +63
-64– +63
-64– +63
-64– +63
-64– +63
-64– +63
-64– +63
-64– +63
Portamento Switch
Velocity Sensitivity Depth
Velocity Sensitivity Offset
Filter LFO Switch
Cutoff Frequency
Attack Time
Decay Time
Release Time
Patch Effects parameters
* The same parameters are also provided for Rhythm sets.
Parameters
Value
Multi-effects group
Type
---
Multi-effects Type
Multi-effects Parameters
00 THROUGH–47 FBK RIPPER
The number of parameters varies depending on the Multi-effects
Type. Refer to “Setting multi-effects parameters” (p. 68).
0–127
Send Lvl to Cho
Send Lvl to Rev
Ctrl 1
Multi-effect send level to chorus
Multi-effect send level to reverb
Multi-effects Control 1
0–127
Refer to “Setting multi-effects parameters” (p. 68).
Refer to “Setting multi-effects parameters” (p. 68).
Ctrl 2
Multi-effects Control 2
Chorus effects group
Type
Chorus type
CHORUS1, CHORUS2, CHORUS3, CHORUS4, FEEDBACK
CHORUS, FLANGER, SHORT DELAY, SHORT DELAY(FB)
Pre-LPF
Level
Chorus pre-low pass filter
Chorus Level
0–7
0–127
106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parameter list
Parameters
Feedback
Delay
Rate
Depth
Send Lvl to Rev
Reverb effects group
Type
Value
0–127
0–127
0–127
0–127
0–127
Chorus Feedback Level
Chorus Delay Time
Chorus Rate
Chorus Depth
Chorus send level to reverb
Reverb Type
ROOM1, ROOM2, ROOM3, HALL1, HALL2, PLATE, DELAY,
PANNING DELAY
Character
Pre-LPF
Level
Time
Delay Feedback
Reverb Character
Reverb pre-low pass filter
Reverb Level
Reverb Time
Reverb Delay Feedback
0–7
0–127
0–127
0–127
Rhythm Patches
Rhythm Common parameters (p. 52)
Parameters
Value
Name
Rhythm Set Name
space, A–Z, a–z, 0–9, ! “ # $ % & ‘ ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ ¥ ] ^ _
` { | }
Rhythm Tone parameters (p. 52)
Parameters
Pitch
Level
Value
-60– +67
0–127
Pan
RND, L63–63R
0–127
0–127
Chorus Send Lvl
Reverb Send Lvl
Chorus Send Level
Reverb Send Level
Performance parameters
Performance Common parameters (p. 56)
Parameters
Value
Name
Performance Name
space, A–Z, a–z, 0–9, ! “ # $ % & ‘ ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ ¥ ] ^ _
` { | }
Voice Rsv 1–16
Level
Voice Reserve 1–16
Performance Level
0–32
0–127
MFX Source
PERFORM, PART1–PART16
Performance Effects parameters
Parameters
Value
Multi-effects group
Type
---
Multi-Effects Type
Multi-effects Parameters
00 THROUGH–47 FBK RIPPER
The number of parameters varies depending on the Multi-effects
Type. Refer to “Setting multi-effects parameters” (p. 68).
0–127
Send Lvl to Cho
Send Lvl to Rev
Ctrl 1
Multi-effect send level to chorus
Multi-effect send level to reverb
Multi-Effects Control 1
0–127
Refer to “Setting multi-effects parameters” (p. 68).
Refer to “Setting multi-effects parameters” (p. 68).
Ctrl 2
Multi-Effects Control 2
Chorus effects group
Type
Chorus type
CHORUS1, CHORUS2, CHORUS3, CHORUS4, FEEDBACK
CHORUS, FLANGER, SHORT DELAY, SHORT DELAY(FB)
Pre-LPF
Level
Feedback
Delay
Rate
Depth
Chorus pre-low pass filter
Chorus Level
Chorus Feedback Level
Chorus Delay Time
Chorus Rate
0–7
0–127
0–127
0–127
0–127
0–127
Chorus Depth
107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parameter list
Parameters
Value
Send Lvl to Rev
Reverb effects group
Type
Chorus send level to reverb
Reverb Type
0–127
ROOM1, ROOM2, ROOM3, HALL1, HALL2, PLATE, DELAY,
PANNING DELAY
Character
Pre-LPF
Level
Time
Delay Feedback
Reverb Character
Reverb pre-low pass filter
Reverb Level
Reverb Time
Reverb Delay Feedback
0–7
0–7
0–127
0–127
0–127
Performance Part Setup parameters (p. 56)
Parameters
Value
Level
Part Level
0–127
Pan
Part Pan
Receive Channel
Receive Switch
Receive Program Change Switch
Receive Bank Select Switch
RND, L63–63R
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
Receive Ch
Receive Sw
Receive Prg Chg
Receive Bank Sel
PART SCALE group
Type
Part Scale Tune Type
Part Scale Tune C–B
EQUAL, JUST(maj) in C, JUST(min) in C, ARABIC
-64–63
Tune C–TuneB
System parameters (p. 89)
Parameters
Value
GENERAL group
LCD Contrast
Master Tune
Master Key Sft
Master Level
Hold Pedal
Local Control
Clock Source
CONTROLLER group
Mod
1–10
415.3–466.2
-24– +24
Master Key Shift
0–127
Hold Pedal Polarity
Local Controller
STANDARD, REVERSE
OFF, ON
INT, MIDI
Modulation Assign
MODULATION, PORTA TIME, VOLUME, BALANCE, PAN,
EXPRESSION, PORTAMENTO, SOSTENUTO, SOFT, RESO-
NANCE, RELEASE TIME, ATTACK TIME, CUTOFF, DECAY
TIME, LFO RATE, LFO DEPTH, LFO DELAY, CHO SEND LEV-
EL, REV SEND LEVEL, MFX PARAMETER1, MFX
PARAMETER2, AFTERTOUCH
Pedal
C1–C3
Pedal Control Assign
C1–C3 Knob Assign
Values for Modulation Assign, TAP TEMPO
Values for Modulation Assign, PATCH MODIFY
MIDI group
Patch Rx Ch
Patch Tx Ch
Perform Ctrl Ch
Rx Prog Chg
Rx Bank Sel
Rx Sys Exc
Tx Prog Chg
Tx Bank Sel
Tx Edit Data
Tx Active Sens
Device ID
Patch Receive Channel
Patch Transmit Channel
1–16
1–16, RxCH, OFF
1–16, OFF
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
17–32
Performance Control Channel
Receive Program Change Switch
Receive Bank Select Switch
Receive System Exclusive Switch
Transmit Program Change Switch
Transmit Bank Select Switch
Transmit Edit Data Switch
Transmit Active Sensing Switch
Device ID Number
Soft Thru
Soft Through Switch
OFF, ON
PATCH SCALE group
Type
Tune C–Tune B
Patch Scale Tune Type
Patch Scale Tune C–B
EQUAL, JUST(maj) in C, JUST(min) in C, ARABIC
-64– +63
108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Original tone list
No.
Name
Voice
2
1
2
2
2
2
4
2
1
1
2
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
2
2
2
1
2
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
No.
Name
Voice
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
4
4
1
2
2
4
4
1
3
2
2
2
1
1
3
3
2
1
1
1
1
1
3
2
2
2
3
1
1
2
1
1
3
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
2
4
4
4
2
1
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
2
No.
Name
Voice
1
2
2
1
1
1
2
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
2
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
2
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
3
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
3
2
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
No.
Name
Voice
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
2
1
1
3
2
2
1
2
2
2
3
3
2
4
3
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
4
1
1
2
2
1
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
2
1
1
1
2
2
4
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
No.
Name
Voice
2
2
3
4
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
4
2
3
2
1
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
4
4
4
2
2
2
2
2
4
1
1
1
2
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
0001 Piano 1
0071 SA Vibe
0141 JUNO-D AGtr2
0142 Nylon+Steel
0143 12str Gtr 2
0144 Jazz Gt.
0211 106 Bass 2
0212 MG Bass
0281 Warm JP STR
0282 Saw Strings
0283 Soft JP Str.
0284 JP Strings
0002 Piano 1w
0072 Marimba
0003 European Pf
0004 JUNO-D Pno1
0005 JUNO-D Pno2
0006 Piano F
0073 Marimba w
0074 Xylophone
0075 Tubular-bell
0076 Church Bell
0077 Carillon
0213 MG PunchBass
0214 MG LiteBass
0215 Synth Bass 2
0216 Beef FM Bass
0217 RubberBass 2
0218 Attack Pulse
0219 TB Bass
0145 Pedal Steel
0146 Clean Gt.
0285 106 Strings4
0286 OB Str 1
0007 LA Piano
0147 Chorus Gt.
0148 Mid Tone GTR
0149 St.Strat Gtr
0150 12str EGtr
0151 E.Guitar
0287 OB Str 2
0008 Piano 2
0078 Singing Bell
0079 Analog Bell
0080 Hyper Bell
0081 Warm Bell
0082 JU-D Crystal
0083 Chime Bells
0084 Tiny Bell
0288 JU-2 Strings
0289 Choir Aahs 1
0290 Chorus Aahs
0291 Choir VSw
0292 Choir Aahs 2
0293 St.ChoirAahs
0294 Melted Choir
0295 JUNO-D Choir
0296 Church Choir
0297 Voice Oohs
0298 Humming
0299 Jazz Scat
0009 Piano 2w
0010 Mono Piano
0011 Piano 3
0220 FatTB Bass
0221 Acid TB Bs
0222 TB Dist Saw
0223 106 Bass 3
0224 PopSynthBass
0225 LightSynBass
0226 101Bass 3
0227 Smooth Bass
0228 Mild Bass
0229 Dark Bass
0230 Beef Bass
0012 Piano 3w
0152 Wah Gt.
0013 Rock Piano 1
0014 Rock Piano 2
0015 Dance Piano
0016 Brite Piano
0017 Honky-tonk 1
0018 Honky-tonk 2
0019 Honky-tonk 3
0020 E.Piano 1
0153 WahWah Gtr
0154 Muted Gt.
0155 Funk Pop
0085 Pretty Bell
0086 JUNO-D Bell
0087 SouthernWind
0088 Mysterious
0089 Santur
0156 Funk Gt.2
0157 Jazz Man
0158 D.Mute Gtr
0159 Overdrive Gt
0160 Guitar Pinch
0161 5th OverDrv.
0162 DistortionGt
0163 Feedback Gtr
0164 Dist Rhy Gtr
0165 Heavy Gtr.
0166 Dazed Guitar
0167 5th Dist.
0090 Organ 1
0300 Fem&Male Chr
0301 Female Oohs
0302 SynVox
0021 St.Soft EP
0022 FM+SA EP
0023 60’s EP
0091 Trem. Organ
0092 60’s Organ 1
0093 70’s E.Organ
0094 JUNO-D Org1
0095 JUNO-D Org2
0096 JUNO-D Org3
0097 JUNO-D Org4
0098 JUNO-D Org5
0099 Animal Organ
0100 Old Organ
0101 D-50 Organ
0102 Surf Organ
0103 Organ 2
0231 106 Bass 4
0232 Unison Bass
0233 OilDrum Bass
0234 Detune Bass
0235 Violin
0303 Analog Voice
0304 SH-2000 Vox
0305 JUNO-D Vox1
0306 JUNO-D Vox2
0307 SynVox Key
0308 FM Vox
0024 JUNO-D EP
0025 Touch EP
0026 70’s Ballad
0027 Dyno EP
0236 Slow Violin
0237 VlnSolo Marc
0238 Viola
0028 MKS20 EP
0029 Stage EP 1
0030 Stage EP 2
0031 Swurly
0168 Gt.Harmonics
0169 Gt. Feedback
0170 Acoustic Bs.
0171 JUNO-D A.Bs1
0172 JUNO-D A.Bs2
0173 Upright Bs
0174 Fingered Bs.
0175 Finger Slap
0176 JUNO-D F.Bs1
0177 JUNO-D F.Bs2
0178 JUNO-D JzBs
0179 Picked Bass1
0180 Picked Bass2
0181 JUNO-DRockBs
0182 Fretless Bs.
0183 JU-D Frtless
0184 Syn Fretless
0185 Mr.Smooth
0186 Slap Bass 1
0187 Unison Slap
0188 Slap Bass 2
0189 Slap Bass 3
0190 Synth Bass 1
0191 SynthBass101
0192 Acid Bass
0239 Cello
0309 Tape Choir
0310 Doos Arpeg
0311 ChaosChoir 1
0312 ChaosChoir 2
0313 ChaosChoir 3
0314 OrchestraHit
0315 Bass Hit
0240 VlcSolo Spic
0241 Contrabass
0242 Tremolo Str
0243 PizzicatoStr
0244 Captain Pizz
0245 Pizzy Techno
0246 Harp
0032 BalladPanner
0033 Sine EP
0034 Phase EP 1
0035 Phase EP 2
0036 Tremolo Dyno
0037 E.Piano 2
0104 Chorus Or.2
0105 Perc. Organ
0106 Garage Organ
0107 Club Organ
0108 R&B Organ
0109 FM PercOrg
0110 Org Perc
0316 6th Hit
0247 Yang Qin
0248 Brite Harp
0249 Timpani
0317 Euro Hit
0038 Detuned EP 2
0039 St.FM EP
0318 Club Hit
0319 Back Hit
0040 EP Legend
0041 EP Phase
0250 Strings
0320 Techno Hit
0321 Philly Hit
0111 Organ 3
0251 Orchestra
0252 60’s Strings
0253 Orchestra 1
0254 Orchestra 2
0255 Orchestra 3
0256 Dry Strings
0257 St.JV Str
0042 Pure EP
0112 Power B Slw
0113 Power B Fst
0114 Gospel B
0322 Noise&SawHit
0323 Trumpet
0043 FM EP 1
0044 FM EP 2
0324 Dark Trumpet
0325 Bright Tp
0045 Stack EPiano
0046 Hard FM
0115 Purple B
0116 JU-D MadOrg
0117 Church Org.1
0118 Church Org.2
0119 Church Org.3
0120 Reed Organ
0121 Puff Organ
0122 Accordion Fr
0123 Accordion It
0124 Harmonica
0125 Bandoneon
0126 Vodkakordion
0127 Squeeze Me!
0128 Guinguette
0129 Nylon-str.Gt
0130 Ukulele
0326 JUNO-D Tp 1
0327 JUNO-D Tp 2
0328 JUNO-D Tp 3
0329 Penny Tpt
0330 Flugel Horn
0331 Dual Horns
0332 Trombone 1
0333 Trombone 2
0334 Bright Tb
0047 Harpsichord1
0048 Coupled Hps.
0049 Harpsi.w
0258 JV Strings
0259 DanceStrings
0260 Str Spiccato
0261 JUNO-D Str
0262 Brite Str
0050 Harpsi.o
0051 Harpsichord2
0052 Harpsichord3
0053 Synth Harpsi
0054 Clav.
0193 Clavi Bass
0194 Hammer
0263 Velo Strings
0264 Oct Strings1
0265 Oct Strings2
0266 Tron Strings
0267 Slow Strings
0268 SlowStrings2
0269 Warm Strings
0270 St.Slow Str.
0271 Syn.Strings1
0272 Syn.Strings3
0273 StraightStr.
0274 LoFi Strings
0275 106 Strings1
0276 JP Saws
0055 Pulse Clav
0056 JUNO-D Clav1
0057 JUNO-D Clav2
0058 JUNO-D Clav3
0059 JUNO-D Clav4
0060 JUNO-D Clav5
0061 JUNO-D Clav6
0062 AnalogClav 1
0063 AnalogClav 2
0064 Celesta
0195 101Bass 1
0335 JUNO-D Tb 1
0336 JUNO-D Tb 2
0337 Tuba
0196 101Bass 2
0197 MC202 Bs
0198 House Bs 1
0199 House Bs 2
0200 Low Bass
0338 JUNO-D Tuba
0339 MuteTrumpet1
0340 MuteTrumpet2
0341 French Horns
0342 Fr.Horn 2
0131 Nylon Gt.o
0132 Nylon Gt.2
0133 Spanish Gtr
0134 Requint Gtr
0135 Steel-str.Gt
0136 12str Gtr 1
0137 Mandolin
0138 Steel + Body
0139 6str Gtr
0201 SH Dullbass
0202 Deep Bass
0203 No Rez 4 You
0204 Square Bass
0205 Jungle Bass
0206 Organ Bass
0207 Garage Bass
0208 SH-2 Bass
0209 106 Bass 1
0210 Mini Bs
0343 JUNO-D F.Hrn
0344 JU-D F.Hrns1
0345 JU-D F.Hrns2
0346 Wide Fr.Hrns
0347 Strings+Horn
0348 Orch Brass 1
0349 Orch Brass 2
0350 St.Orch Brs1
0065 Glockenspiel
0066 Music Box
0067 Vibraphone
0068 Vibraphone w
0069 JUNO-D Vibe
0070 Tremolo Vibe
0277 Hybrid Str
0278 106 Strings2
0279 Atk Syn Str.
0280 106 Strings3
0140 St.SteelGtr.
109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Original tone list
No.
Name
Voice
4
4
4
2
2
2
2
2
4
4
2
1
2
2
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
4
2
2
2
4
4
2
2
2
2
2
2
4
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
No.
Name
Voice
1
2
1
3
3
1
1
2
1
2
4
2
2
2
1
1
1
2
2
1
4
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
3
1
3
3
3
3
2
No.
Name
Voice
2
2
1
4
4
4
4
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
2
3
2
3
3
3
4
4
2
2
4
2
2
2
1
2
2
3
3
2
1
1
3
2
2
2
2
3
4
1
4
3
2
4
3
2
4
2
4
4
2
1
2
2
2
3
4
2
No.
Name
Voice
2
2
4
4
4
4
3
3
1
2
2
2
1
2
1
1
2
4
2
2
1
1
2
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
2
2
No.
Name
Voice
0351 St.Orch Brs2
0352 St.Orch Brs3
0353 Henry IV
0421 Pan Flute 1
0422 Bottle Blow1
0423 JUNO-D Sicu
0424 JU-DCalliope
0425 Bottle Blow2
0426 Shakuhachi 1
0427 Shakuhachi 2
0428 Nay
0491 TranceSaws 3
0492 Power Stack
0493 Alpha Rave
0494 Retro Rave
0495 Chrd Maj7
0496 RndmFltrChrd
0497 Cool Beam
0498 Syn.Calliope
0499 Chiffer Lead
0500 Charang
0561 RandomEnding
0562 Acid Copter
0563 Etherality
0564 Just Before
0565 Labo-Feedbak
0566 Faveoravo
0567 Time Warp
0568 JU-D WireKey
0569 Echo Drops
0570 Echo Bell
0571 Echo Pan
0572 Star Theme
0573 Sitar 1
0631 Applause
0632 Laughing
0633 Screaming
0634 Punch
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
0354 Brass 1
0355 Brass 2
0635 Heart Beat
0636 Footsteps
0637 Gun Shot
0638 Machine Gun
0639 Lasergun
0640 Explosion
0356 Brite Brass
0357 BigBand
0358 Octave Brass
0359 JUNO-D Brs1
0360 JUNO-D Brs2
0361 JUNO-D Brs3
0362 JUNO-D Brs4
0363 Lo Brass
0429 Tin Whistle1
0430 Tin Whistle2
0431 ShakuBamboo
0432 Whistle
0501 Wire Lead
0502 Solo Vox
0433 Ocarina
0503 5th Saw Wave
0504 Bass & Lead
0505 Delayed Lead
0506 Fantasia
0364 TP&TB Sect
0365 Tp Sect
0434 Square Wave1
0435 MG Square
0436 2600 Sine
0574 Sitar 2
0575 Banjo
0366 Tb Sect
0576 Shamisen 1
0577 Shamisen 2
0578 Time Vault
0579 Koto
0367 TSax Sect
0437 Sine
0507 Warm Pad
0508 Sine Pad
0368 St.Sax Sect
0369 FatPop Brass
0370 Brass sfz
0438 Twin Sine
0439 Shmoog
0509 Soft Pad
0440 Square Wave2
0441 Dual Sqr&Saw
0442 Hollow Lead
0443 OB Lead
0510 OB2 Pad 1
0511 OB2 Pad 2
0512 Stacked Pad
0513 FS Hollow 1
0514 FS Hollow 2
0515 JP8 Sqr Pad
0516 Warm Sqr Pad
0517 Pipe Pad
0580 Taisho Koto
0581 Kalimba
0582 Jublag
0371 Synth Brass1
0372 JP Brass
0373 Oct SynBrs 1
0374 Jump Brass
0375 Hybrid Brass
0376 BPF Brass
0377 Oct SynBrs 2
0378 Oct SynBrs 3
0379 Synth Brass2
0380 SynBrass sfz
0381 Velo Brass 1
0382 SoaringHorns
0383 Saw Brass 1
0384 Saw Brass 2
0385 Reso Brass
0386 DistSqrBrass
0387 JP8000SawBrs
0388 Velo Brass 2
0389 Transbrass
0390 LA Brass
0583 Bagpipe
0584 Fiddle
0444 JD Triangle
0445 800 Lead
0585 Shanai
0446 JUNO-D Lead1
0447 JP8Pls 05
0586 Tinkle Bell
0587 Agogo
0448 JP8Pls 15
0518 Square Pad
0519 JP8 Hollow
0520 JP8 Haunting
0521 Sugar Key
0522 BriteSaw Key
0523 SuperJupiter
0524 Polysynth
0525 Space Voice
0526 Itopia
0588 Steel Drum
0589 Woodblock
0590 Castanets
0591 Taiko
0449 JP8Pls 30
0450 JP8Pls 45
0451 TB Dst Sqr 1
0452 TB Dst Sqr 2
0453 260 Sub Osc
0454 Spectrum
0592 Concert BD
0593 Melo. Tom 1
0594 Melo. Tom 2
0595 Synth Drum
0596 TR808 Tom
0597 Elec Perc
0598 Reverse Cym.
0599 Gt.FretNoise
0600 Gt.Cut Noise
0601 String Slap
0602 NylonGtr Nz
0603 Breath Noise
0604 Fl.Key Click
0605 Seashore
0606 Rain
0455 Saw Wave
0456 OB2 Saw
0457 Doctor Solo
0458 Natural Lead
0459 SequencedSaw
0460 SequencedPls
0461 Pattern It
0527 D50 Heaven
0528 Heaven Pad
0529 Vox Pad
0530 Bowed Glass
0531 Metal Pad
0532 Halo Pad
0391 WarmSynBrass
0392 DeepSynBrass
0393 Spit Brass
0394 Soprano Sax
0395 JU-D SopSax
0396 Alto Sax
0462 Fat Saw
0463 D-50 FatSaw
0464 Waspy Synth
0465 Naked Cheese
0466 MG Saw
0533 Sweep Pad
0534 LFO Sweep
0535 Saws Sweep
0536 Soft Sweep
0537 ForwardSweep
0538 ReverseSweep
0539 Deep Sweep
0540 Shaku Pad
0541 JUNO-D Comb
0542 Killer Pad
0543 LFO Pad
0397 AltoSax Soft
0398 Alto Sax Vel
0399 Tenor Sax
0400 Tenor Sax F
0401 Blown Tenor
0402 Honky Tenor
0403 BaritoneSax1
0404 BaritoneSax2
0405 Oboe 1
0467 OB Warm Saw
0468 P5 Saw
0607 Thunder
0608 Wind
0469 JUNO-D Lead2
0470 MG Lead 1
0471 MG Lead 2
0472 Homey Lead
0473 GR500 Lead
0474 PM Lead
0609 Stream
0610 Bubble
0611 Bird 1
0612 Dog
0613 Horse-Gallop
0614 Bird 2
0544 JU-D RandmPd
0545 Ice Rain
0475 WindSyn Lead
0476 JUNO-D Lead3
0477 MG Lead 3
0478 JUNO-D Lead4
0479 PureFlatLead
0480 Air Wave
0615 Telephone 1
0616 Telephone 2
0617 DoorCreaking
0618 Door
0406 Oboe 2
0546 W.Chime Pad
0547 Saw Impulse
0548 Soundtrack
0549 Strobe
0407 EnglishHorn1
0408 EnglishHorn2
0409 Bassoon 1
0410 Bassoon 2
0411 Clarinet 1
0412 Clarinet 2
0413 Piccolo 1
0619 Scratch
0550 Riff the 5th
0551 Star Dust
0620 Wind Chimes
0621 Helicopter
0622 Car-Engine
0623 Car-Stop
0624 Car-Pass
0625 Car-Crash
0626 Siren
0481 Theramax
0482 JP SuperSaw
0483 JP8000Detune
0484 Velo Cheese
0485 Dance Saws
0486 DanceStack 1
0487 DanceStack 2
0488 TranceSaws 1
0489 Trance Keys
0490 TranceSaws 2
0552 Sweep Stack
0553 Crystal
0414 Piccolo 2
0554 Syn Mallet
0555 TarzanBottom
0556 Atmosphere
0557 Brightness
0558 Bell Sugar
0559 D-50 Retour
0560 Goblin
0415 Flute
0416 JUNO-D Flt 1
0417 JUNO-D Flt 2
0418 Tron Flute 1
0419 Tron Flute 2
0420 Recorder
0627 Train
0628 Jetplane
0629 Starship
0630 Burst Noise
110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Patch list
No.
Name
Cate-
gory
Patch
Select
GM2 Patch Voice
Select
Key
Mode
[1] PIANO
No.
Name
Cate-
gory
Patch
Select
GM2 Patch Voice
Select
Key
Mode
MSB = 87
MSB = 121
LSB
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
68
PC
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
56
LSB
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
0
PC
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
7
MSB = 87
MSB = 121
065
066
067
068
069
070
071
072
073
074
075
076
077
078
079
080
081
082
083
084
085
086
087
088
089
090
091
092
093
094
095
096
097
098
099
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
Ky11 JU-2 Bell
BEL
2
8
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
2
1
3
3
1
1
3
1
1
3
1
1
3
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
4
4
4
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
2
2
2
1
3
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
SINGLE
DUAL
LSB
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
PC
1
LSB
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
0
PC
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
1
Ky12 AEx SynBells
Ky13 Clav 1
BEL
001 Pf01
JUNO-D Grand
Soft Grand
Bright Grand
Dance Piano
EL.Grand
PNO
PNO
PNO
PNO
PNO
PNO
PNO
PNO
PNO
PNO
PNO
EP
2
2
2
2
2
2
4
2
4
4
6
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
4
2
2
1
2
1
2
2
2
2
4
2
1
2
2
1
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
2
2
SPLIT
KEY
KEY
KEY
KEY
KEY
KEY
KEY
KEY
MLT
MLT
MLT
ORG
ORG
ORG
ORG
ORG
ORG
ORG
ORG
ORG
ORG
ORG
ORG
ORG
ORG
ORG
ORG
ORG
ORG
ORG
ORG
ORG
ORG
ACD
ACD
ACD
KEY
KEY
KEY
KEY
KEY
KEY
KEY
BEL
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SPLIT
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
017
018
019
020
021
022
023
024
025
026
027
028
029
030
031
032
033
034
035
036
037
038
039
040
041
042
043
044
045
046
047
048
049
050
051
052
053
054
Pf02
Pf03
Pf04
Pf05
Pf06
Pf07
Pf08
Pf09
Pf10
Pf11
Pf12
Pf13
Pf14
Pf15
Pf16
Pf17
Pf18
Pf19
Pf20
Pf21
Pf22
Pf23
Pf24
Pf25
Pf26
Pf27
Pf28
Pf29
Pf30
Pf31
Pf32
Pf33
Pf34
Pf35
Pf36
Pf37
Pf38
Pf39
Pf40
Pf41
Pf42
Pf43
Pf44
Pf45
Pf46
Pf47
Pf48
Pf49
Pf50
Pf51
Pf52
Pf53
Pf54
2
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SPLIT
Ky14 Clav 2
3
Ky15 Clav 3
4
Ky16 Clav 4
5
Ky17 Phaser Clav
Ky18 JU-2 Clav 1
Ky19 JU-2 Clav 2
Ky20 Harpsichord2
Ky21 JUNO Marimba
Ky22 JUNO-D Vibe
Ky23 SA Vibe
Honky-tonk 3
LA Piano
6
7
GrandPNO/ABs
GrandPNO&Pad
GrandPNO&Vox
AEx PianoVox
Sweet Stage
JUNO-D EP
Chorus EP
70’s Ballad
Dyno EP
8
9
DUAL
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
1
DUAL
DUAL
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
DUAL
Ky24 JUNO-D Org 1
Ky25 JUNO-D Org 2
Ky26 JUNO-D Org 3
Ky27 JUNO-D Org 4
Ky28 JUNO-D Org 5
Ky29 Jazz Organ 1
Ky30 Jazz Organ 2
Ky31 R&B Organ
Ky32 Power B Slw
Ky33 Power B Fst
Ky34 Gospel B
EP
EP
EP
EP
Pure EP
EP
EP Panner
Tremolo EP
Tremolo Dyno
MKS20 EP 1
MKS20 EP 2
Touch EP
EP
EP
EP
EP
EP
EP
Ky35 Dist Mad Org
Ky36 Purple B
Phase EP 1
Phase EP 2
Phase EP 3
Psycho EP
Stage EP/Bs
Wurly EP
EP
EP
Ky37 Animal Organ
Ky38 Surf Organ
Ky39 Old Organ
Ky40 D-50 Organ
Ky41 House Organ
Ky42 Garage Organ
Ky43 Club Organ
Ky44 FM Prc Organ
Ky45 PipeOrgan/Bs
Ky46 Vodkakordion
Ky47 Squeeze Me!
Ky48 Guinguette
Ky49 Harpsichord
Ky50 Coupled Hps.
Ky51 Harpsi.w
EP
EP
SINGLE
SPLIT
EP
EP
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
DUAL
Sine EP
EP
FM EP 1
EP
St.FM EP
EP
Stacked EP
FM EP 2
EP
EP
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
Hard FM
EP
EP & Vox
EP
Piano 1
PNO
PNO
PNO
PNO
PNO
PNO
PNO
PNO
PNO
EP
SPLIT
Piano 1w
2
1
1
SPLIT
1
7
European Pf
Piano 2
3
2
1
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
2
7
4
0
2
Ky52 Harpsi.o
3
7
Piano 2w
5
1
2
Ky53 Clav.
0
8
Piano 3
6
0
3
Ky54 Pulse Clav
Ky55 Celesta
1
8
Piano 3w
7
1
3
0
9
Honky-tonk
Honky-tonk 2
E.Piano 1
8
0
4
Ky56 Glockenspiel
Ky57 Music Box
Ky58 Vibraphone
Ky59 Vibraphone w
Ky60 Marimba
0
10
11
12
12
13
13
14
15
15
15
17
17
17
17
18
18
18
19
20
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
24
99
9
1
4
BEL
0
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
0
5
MLT
MLT
MLT
MLT
MLT
BEL
0
St.Soft EP
EP
1
5
1
FM+SA EP
60’s EP
EP
2
5
0
EP
3
5
Ky61 Marimba w
Ky62 Xylophone
Ky63 Tubular-bell
Ky64 Church Bell
Ky65 Carillon
1
E.Piano 2
EP
0
6
0
Detuned EP 2
St.FM EP
EP
1
6
0
EP
2
6
BEL
1
EP Legend
EP Phase
EP
3
6
BEL
2
EP
4
6
Ky66 Organ 1
ORG
ORG
ORG
ORG
ORG
ORG
ORG
ORG
ORG
ORG
ORG
ORG
ORG
ACD
ACD
HRM
ACD
BEL
0
Ky67 Trem. Organ
Ky68 60’s Organ 1
Ky69 70’s E.Organ
Ky70 Organ 2
1
2
[2] KBD & ORG
No.
3
Name
Cate-
gory
Patch
Select
GM2 Patch Voice
Select
Key
Mode
0
Ky71 Chorus Or.2
Ky72 Perc. Organ
Ky73 Organ 3
1
MSB = 87
MSB = 121
2
LSB
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
PC
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
LSB
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
PC
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
0
055
056
057
058
059
060
061
062
063
064
Ky01 JUNO-D Fanta
Ky02 JUNO-D Bell
Ky03 Singing Bell
Ky04 Pretty Bell
Ky05 Hyper Bell
Ky06 Warm Bell
Ky07 SouthernWind
Ky08 MOD Bell
BEL
BEL
BEL
BEL
BEL
BEL
BEL
BEL
BEL
BEL
5
4
2
2
2
2
4
6
4
4
DUAL
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
DUAL
Ky74 Church Org.1
Ky75 Church Org.2
Ky76 Church Org.3
Ky77 Reed Organ
Ky78 Puff Organ
Ky79 Accordion Fr
Ky80 Accordion It
Ky81 Harmonica
Ky82 Bandoneon
Ky83 Crystal
0
1
2
0
1
0
1
0
Ky09 MOD 5th Bell
Ky10 Mysterious
DUAL
0
SINGLE
0
111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Patch list
No.
Name
Cate-
gory
Patch
Select
GM2 Patch Voice
Select
Key
Mode
No.
Name
Cate-
gory
Patch
Select
GM2 Patch Voice
Select
Key
Mode
MSB = 87
MSB = 121
MSB = 87
MSB = 121
LSB
68
PC
57
75
77
LSB
PC
99
LSB
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
68
PC
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
1
LSB
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
0
PC
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
41
41
42
43
44
45
46
49
49
49
50
51
51
56
56
56
56
69
138
139
140
Ky84 Syn Mallet
Ky85 Tinkle Bell
Ky86 Steel Drums
BEL
BEL
MLT
1
0
0
1
3
1
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
Oc05 StringsSect1
Oc06 StringsSect2
Oc07 StringsSect3
Oc08 StringsSect4
Oc09 VeloStrings
Oc10 SlowStrings1
Oc11 SlowStrings2
Oc12 Oct Strings
Oc13 Str Spic 1
STR
STR
STR
STR
STR
STR
STR
STR
STR
STR
STR
STR
STR
STR
STR
STR
STR
STR
STR
STR
STR
STR
STR
STR
STR
STR
STR
STR
STR
STR
STR
STR
STR
STR
STR
STR
STR
STR
STR
STR
STR
OCH
WND
WND
WND
FLT
FLT
FLT
FLT
FLT
FLT
HIT
HIT
HIT
HIT
STR
STR
STR
STR
STR
STR
STR
STR
OCH
STR
STR
STR
STR
HIT
HIT
HIT
HIT
WND
4
4
4
3
5
2
2
2
1
2
1
4
1
4
5
3
4
5
5
3
3
6
3
4
5
2
5
2
6
6
2
2
1
1
3
2
1
1
5
5
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
3
4
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
DUAL
DUAL
68
113
115
68
DUAL
DUAL
[3] GUITAR
No.
DUAL
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
DUAL
Name
Cate-
gory
Patch
Select
GM2 Patch Voice
Select
Key
Mode
MSB = 87
MSB = 121
LSB
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
68
68
68
68
PC
85
LSB
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
0
PC
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
25
25
25
25
26
26
26
26
27
27
28
28
28
29
29
29
29
30
30
31
31
31
32
32
100
121
121
121
Oc14 Str Spic 2
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
Gt01 JUNO-D Gtr
Gt02 JUNO-D AcGtr
Gt03 JUNO-D AGtr2
Gt04 12str Gtr 2
Gt05 Nylon Guitar
Gt06 Spanish Gtr
Gt07 Requint Gtr
Gt08 AEx BeyondGt
Gt09 JUNO-D EG 1
Gt10 JUNO-D EG 2
Gt11 St.Strat Gtr
Gt12 12str E-Gtr
Gt13 JUNO-D JazzG
Gt14 E.Guitar
AGT
AGT
AGT
AGT
AGT
AGT
AGT
AGT
EGT
EGT
EGT
EGT
EGT
EGT
EGT
EGT
EGT
DGT
DGT
DGT
DGT
DGT
DGT
DGT
DGT
AGT
AGT
AGT
AGT
AGT
AGT
AGT
AGT
EGT
EGT
EGT
EGT
EGT
EGT
EGT
EGT
EGT
DGT
DGT
DGT
DGT
DGT
EGT
EGT
AGT
AGT
AGT
AGT
4
2
1
2
2
2
2
6
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
4
2
2
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
2
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
DUAL
Oc15 Tron Strings
Oc16 Tekno Str
SINGLE
DUAL
86
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
DUAL
87
Oc17 Dance Str
SINGLE
DUAL
88
Oc18 JUNO-D Orch1
Oc19 JUNO-D Orch2
Oc20 JUNO-D Orch3
Oc21 JUNO-D Orch4
Oc22 HybrdStrings
Oc23 JP Strings 1
Oc24 JP Strings 2
Oc25 JP Strings 3
Oc26 JUNO-60 Str
Oc27 106 Strings
Oc28 JU-2 Str 1
89
DUAL
90
SINGLE
DUAL
91
2
92
3
DUAL
93
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
DUAL
4
DUAL
94
5
DUAL
95
6
SINGLE
DUAL
96
7
97
8
DUAL
98
9
DUAL
Gt15 Funk Gtr
99
Oc29 JU-2 Str 2
10
DUAL
Gt16 Wah Guitar
Gt17 Wah-Wah Gtr
Gt18 Darmstrat
Gt19 Dazed Guitar
Gt20 OD-Gtr
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
54
Oc30 OB Strings 1
Oc31 OB Strings 2
Oc32 SawStrings 1
Oc33 SawStrings 2
Oc34 AEx Orchstra
Oc35 JUNO-D Vln 1
Oc36 JUNO-D Vln 2
Oc37 Violin Marc
Oc38 JUNO-D Viola
Oc39 JUNO-D Vc 1
Oc40 JUNO-D Vc 2
Oc41 Cello Spic
Oc42 JUNO-D CB
Oc43 JUNO-D Pizz1
Oc44 JUNO-D Pizz2
Oc45 Trad Pizz
11
SINGLE
DUAL
12
13
SINGLE
DUAL
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
14
15
DUAL
Gt21 Heavy Gtr
Gt22 Dist Mute
16
DUAL
17
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
DUAL
Gt23 D.Mute Gtr
Gt24 5th OverDrv.
Gt25 Power Chord
Gt26 Nylon-str.Gt
Gt27 Ukulele
18
19
20
21
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
DUAL
55
1
22
Gt28 Nylon Gt.o
Gt29 Nylon Gt.2
Gt30 Steel-str.Gt
Gt31 12-str.Gt
56
2
23
57
3
24
58
0
25
DUAL
59
1
26
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
Gt32 Mandolin
60
2
Oc46 JUNO-D Harp
Oc47 JUNO-D Oboe
Oc48 JUNO-D E.Hrn
Oc49 JUNO-D Clar
Oc50 JUNO-D Flt 1
Oc51 JUNO-D Flt 2
Oc52 Tron Flute
Oc53 Calliope-D
Oc54 JUNO-D Sicu
Oc55 JUNO-D Blow
Oc56 Club Hit
27
Gt33 Steel + Body
Gt34 Jazz Gt.
61
3
28
62
0
29
Gt35 Pedal Steel
Gt36 Clean Gt.
63
1
30
64
0
31
Gt37 Chorus Gt.
Gt38 Mid Tone GTR
Gt39 Muted Gt.
Gt40 Funk Pop
65
1
32
66
2
33
67
0
34
68
1
35
Gt41 Funk Gt.2
69
2
36
Gt42 Jazz Man
70
3
37
Gt43 Overdrive Gt
Gt44 Guitar Pinch
Gt45 DistortionGt
Gt46 Feedback Gt.
Gt47 Dist Rtm GTR
Gt48 Gt.Harmonics
Gt49 Gt. Feedback
Gt50 Atmosphere
Gt51 Gt.FretNoise
Gt52 Gt.Cut Noise
Gt53 String Slap
71
0
Oc57 Back Hit
38
72
1
Oc58 Techno Hit
Oc59 Philly Hit
39
73
0
40
74
1
Oc60 Violin
94
75
2
Oc61 Slow Violin
Oc62 Viola
95
1
76
0
96
0
77
1
Oc63 Cello
97
0
58
0
Oc64 Contrabass
Oc65 Tremolo Str
Oc66 PizzicatoStr
Oc67 Strings
98
0
88
0
99
0
89
1
100
104
105
106
107
108
109
117
118
119
120
16
0
90
2
0
Oc68 Orchestra
1
[4] ORCH
No.
Oc69 60s Strings
Oc70 Slow Strings
Oc71 Syn.Strings1
Oc72 Syn.Strings3
Oc73 OrchestraHit
Oc74 Bass Hit
2
0
Name
Cate-
gory
Patch
Select
GM2 Patch Voice
Select
Key
Mode
0
1
MSB = 87
MSB = 121
0
LSB
64
PC
110
111
112
113
LSB
—
PC
—
—
—
—
1
194
195
196
197
Oc01 JUNO-D Str 1
Oc02 JUNO-D Str 2
Oc03 JUNO-D Str 3
Oc04 PortaStrings
STR
STR
STR
STR
4
4
4
4
SINGLE
DUAL
Oc75 6th Hit
2
64
—
Oc76 Euro Hit
3
64
—
DUAL
Oc77 Oboe
0
64
—
SINGLE
112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Patch list
No.
Name
Cate-
gory
Patch
Select
GM2 Patch Voice
Select
Key
Mode
No.
Name
Cate-
gory
Patch
Select
GM2 Patch Voice
Select
Key
Mode
MSB = 87
MSB = 121
MSB = 87
MSB = 121
LSB
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
PC
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
26
27
73
LSB
PC
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
79
80
111
LSB
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
PC
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
1
LSB
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
0
PC
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
57
57
58
58
58
59
60
60
61
61
62
62
63
63
63
63
64
64
64
65
66
67
68
271 Oc78 English Horn
WND
WND
WND
FLT
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
331 Br28
Oct Syn Brs
Soft SynBrs
Deep SynBrs
VeloBrass
SBR
SBR
SBR
SBR
SBR
SBR
SBR
SBR
SBR
BRS
BRS
BRS
BRS
BRS
BRS
BRS
BRS
BRS
BRS
BRS
SAX
SAX
SAX
SAX
SAX
SAX
SAX
BRS
BRS
BRS
BRS
BRS
BRS
BRS
BRS
BRS
BRS
BRS
BRS
SBR
SBR
SBR
SBR
SBR
SBR
SBR
SAX
SAX
SAX
SAX
6
4
4
2
4
5
4
2
4
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
DUAL
DUAL
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
Oc79 Bassoon
Oc80 Clarinet
Oc81 Piccolo
Oc82 Flute
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
Br29
Br30
Br31
Br32
Br33
Br34
Br35
Br36
Br37
Br38
Br39
Br40
Br41
Br42
Br43
Br44
Br45
Br46
Br47
Br48
Br49
Br50
Br51
Br52
Br53
Br54
Br55
Br56
Br57
Br58
Br59
Br60
Br61
Br62
Br63
Br64
Br65
Br66
Br67
Br68
Br69
Br70
Br71
Br72
Br73
Br74
Br75
Br76
Br77
DUAL
SINGLE
DUAL
FLT
JP Saw Brs
Oc83 Recorder
Oc84 Pan Flute
Oc85 Bottle Blow
Oc86 Whistle
Oc87 Ocarina
Oc88 Fiddle
FLT
OB Brass
DUAL
FLT
BPF Brass
DUAL
FLT
Dist SqrBrs
Soaring Horn
JUNO-D Tp 1
JUNO-D Tp 2
Bright Tp
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
FLT
FLT
STR
[5] WORLD
Flugel Horn
Dual Tp
No.
Name
Cate-
gory
Patch
Select
GM2 Patch Voice
Select
Key
Mode
MuteTrumpt 1
MuteTrumpt 2
JUNO-D Tb 1
JUNO-D Tb 2
JUNO-D Tuba
JUNO-D F.Hrn
JUNO-D S.Sax
JUNO-D A.Sax
AltoSax Sft
Honky Tenor
JUNO-D T.Sax
Blown Tenor
JUNO-D B.Sax
Trumpet
MSB = 87
MSB = 121
LSB
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
67
67
67
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
PC
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
36
101
102
25
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
74
LSB
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
0
PC
—
282 Wr01 JUNO-D Sitar
PLK
ETH
ETH
ETH
ETH
ETH
ETH
ETH
ETH
PLK
PLK
PLK
ETH
PLK
PLK
FRT
PLK
PLK
PLK
PLK
ETH
ETH
1
2
1
1
1
1
4
2
2
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
2
2
1
2
1
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
DUAL
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
Wr02 JUNO-D Shami
Wr03 JUNO-D Klmba
Wr04 Jublag
—
—
—
Wr05 Tin Whistle
Wr06 JUNO-D Shaku
Wr07 ShakuBamboo
Wr08 Nay
—
—
—
—
Wr09 AEx CelticFl
Wr10 Santur
—
16
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
Wr11 Harp
0
47
Dark Trumpet
Trombone
1
Wr12 Yang Qin
Wr13 Shakuhachi
Wr14 Sitar
1
47
0
0
78
Trombone 2
Bright Tb
1
0
105
105
106
107
108
108
109
110
112
2
Wr15 Sitar 2
1
Tuba
0
Wr16 Banjo
0
MutedTrumpet
MuteTrumpet2
French Horns
Fr.Horn 2
0
Wr17 Shamisen
Wr18 Koto
0
1
0
0
Wr19 Taisho Koto
Wr20 Kalimba
Wr21 Bagpipe
Wr22 Shanai
1
2
1
0
Brass 1
3
0
0
Brass 2
4
1
0
Synth Brass1
JP Brass
5
0
6
1
[6] BRASS
Oct SynBrass
Jump Brass
Synth Brass2
SynBrass sfz
Velo Brass 1
Soprano Sax
Alto Sax
7
2
8
3
No.
Name
Cate-
gory
Patch
Select
GM2 Patch Voice
Select
Key
Mode
9
0
10
11
12
13
14
15
1
MSB = 87
MSB = 121
2
LSB
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
PC
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
LSB
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
PC
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
0
304 Br01
JUNO-D Brass
Brass Sect 1
Brass Sect 2
Brass Sect 3
Brass Sect 4
Tp&Tb Sect 1
Tp&Tb Sect 2
Tp Sect
BRS
BRS
BRS
BRS
BRS
BRS
BRS
BRS
BRS
BRS
BRS
BRS
BRS
BRS
BRS
BRS
BRS
BRS
BRS
BRS
BRS
BRS
BRS
SBR
SBR
SBR
SBR
8
2
4
2
2
2
2
1
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
4
4
4
2
3
6
6
4
DUAL
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
DUAL
0
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
Br02
Br03
Br04
Br05
Br06
Br07
Br08
Br09
Br10
Br11
Br12
Br13
Br14
Br15
Br16
Br17
Br18
Br19
Br20
Br21
Br22
Br23
Br24
Br25
Br26
Br27
Tenor Sax
0
Baritone Sax
0
[7] VOCAL & PAD
No.
Name
Cate-
gory
Patch
Select
GM2 Patch Voice
Select
Key
Mode
Tb Sect
MSB = 87
MSB = 121
Brass sfz
LSB
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
PC
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
LSB
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
PC
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
St.Sax Sect
AEx UniTp+Tb
F.HornSect 1
F.HornSect 2
Wide FrHorns
Str + Horns
Orch Brass 1
Orch Brass 2
St.OrchBrs 1
St.OrchBrs 2
St.OrchBrs 3
Henry IV
381 Vo01 Jazz Scat
VOX
VOX
VOX
VOX
VOX
VOX
VOX
VOX
VOX
VOX
VOX
SPD
SPD
SPD
SPD
SPD
1
2
2
1
4
1
1
2
8
7
4
4
5
2
4
3
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
DUAL
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
Vo02 JUNO-D Choir
SINGLE
DUAL
Vo03 JUNO-D Vox
Vo04 FemMm Choir
Vo05 St.ChoirAhs
Vo06 SH-2000 Vox
Vo07 FM Vox
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
DUAL
Vo08 Vox Pad
Vo09 ChaosChoir 1
Vo10 ChaosChoir 2
Vo11 AEx StackVox
Vo12 JUNO-D Cosmo
Vo13 JUNO-D Space
Vo14 Heaven Pad
Vo15 D-50 Retour
Vo16 Warm Sqr Pad
DUAL
DUAL
DUAL
Oct Brass
DUAL
Power Saws
106 Brass 1
106 Brass 2
LA Brass
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
DUAL
DUAL
SINGLE
113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Patch list
No.
Name
Cate-
gory
Patch
Select
GM2 Patch Voice
Select
Key
Mode
No.
Name
Cate-
gory
Patch
Select
GM2 Patch Voice
Select
Key
Mode
MSB = 87
MSB = 121
MSB = 87
MSB = 121
LSB
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
PC
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
1
LSB
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
0
PC
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
52
53
53
54
54
55
55
90
90
92
92
93
94
95
96
98
103
103
103
104
LSB
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
PC
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
47
54
59
60
91
92
LSB
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
0
PC
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
81
81
81
82
82
82
82
82
83
84
85
85
86
87
88
88
89
91
97
101
102
122
122
397 Vo17 Hollow Pad 1
SPD
SPD
SPD
SPD
SPD
SPD
SPD
SPD
SPD
SPD
SPD
SPD
BPD
BPD
BPD
BPD
BPD
BPD
BPD
BPD
BPD
BPD
BPD
BPD
BPD
BPD
SPD
VOX
VOX
VOX
VOX
VOX
VOX
SPD
SPD
VOX
VOX
SPD
BPD
BPD
SPD
SPD
BPD
BPD
BPD
BPD
8
4
4
2
1
3
2
3
3
1
6
6
4
4
2
5
4
4
8
4
7
3
4
2
2
6
2
2
2
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
2
1
2
1
2
2
2
DUAL
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
DUAL
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
Sy21 Saw Impulse
Sy22 Slicer
PLS
3
5
3
2
3
4
4
6
4
4
4
2
4
2
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
2
2
1
1
2
1
3
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
SINGLE
DUAL
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
Vo18 JP8 Hollow
Vo19 JP8Haunting
Vo20 OB2 Pad 1
Vo21 OB2 Pad 2
Vo22 Saw Sweep 1
Vo23 Saw Sweep 2
Vo24 Saw Sweep 3
Vo25 Soft Pad 1
Vo26 Soft Pad 2
Vo27 Oct SynStr
Vo28 Stacked Pad
Vo29 JUNO-D Pad
Vo30 SuperJupiter
Vo31 ReverseSweep
Vo32 JUNO-D Atmos
Vo33 JUNO-D Comb
Vo34 Comb Pad
Vo35 Saws Strobe
Vo36 Star Dust
PLS
Sy23 Power Slice
Sy24 Rndm Ending
Sy25 Rndm Pad
Sy26 Etherality
Sy27 LFO Pad
PLS
DUAL
PLS
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
DUAL
PLS
PLS
PLS
Sy28 Strobe-J
PLS
Sy29 Step Pad
PLS
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
DUAL
SINGLE
DUAL
Sy30 RndmFltrChrd
Sy31 Just Before
Sy32 JUNO-D Lead1
Sy33 JUNO-D Lead2
Sy34 JUNO-D Lead3
Sy35 MG Lead 1
Sy36 MG Lead 2
Sy37 MG Lead 3
Sy38 MG Lead 4
Sy39 PM Lead
PLS
2
FX
3
DUAL
HLD
HLD
HLD
HLD
HLD
HLD
HLD
HLD
HLD
HLD
HLD
HLD
HLD
HLD
HLD
HLD
HLD
SLD
SLD
SLD
SLD
SLD
SLD
SLD
SLD
HLD
HLD
HLD
HLD
HLD
HLD
HLD
HLD
SLD
SLD
HLD
HLD
SLD
HLD
HLD
HLD
SYN
SYN
SYN
SYN
PLS
4
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
DUAL
5
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
6
7
8
SINGLE
SINGLE
DUAL
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
45
46
48
49
50
51
52
53
55
61
62
63
64
SINGLE
DUAL
Sy40 Sqr&Saw Ld
Sy41 Homey Lead
Sy42 D-50 FatSaw
Sy43 P5 Saw
Vo37 Wind Pad
Vo38 Shakupad
Vo39 Sweep Stack
Vo40 Reso Pad
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
DUAL
Sy44 MG Saw
Vo41 ForwardSweep
Vo42 AEx StackPad
Vo43 Syn.Strings2
Vo44 Choir Aahs
Vo45 Chorus Aahs
Vo46 Voice Oohs
Vo47 Humming
Vo48 SynVox
Sy45 OB Saw
Sy46 Waspy Synth
Sy47 Naked Cheese
Sy48 Velo Cheese
Sy49 800 Lead
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
0
1
0
Sy50 OB Lead
1
Sy51 Shmoog
0
Sy52 JUNO-D SftLd
Sy53 Theramax
Sy54 JD Triangle
Sy55 Sine
Vo49 Analog Voice
Vo50 Warm Pad
Vo51 Sine Pad
1
0
1
Vo52 Space Voice
Vo53 Itopia
0
Sy56 Twin Sine
Sy57 Square Wave
Sy58 MG Square
Sy59 2600 Sine
Sy60 Saw Wave
Sy61 OB2 Saw
1
Vo54 Bowed Glass
Vo55 Metal Pad
Vo56 Halo Pad
0
1
0
2
0
0
Vo57 Sweep Pad
Vo58 Soundtrack
Vo59 Echo Drops
Vo60 Echo Bell
0
1
0
Sy62 Doctor Solo
Sy63 Natural Lead
Sy64 SequencedSaw
Sy65 Syn.Calliope
Sy66 Chiffer Lead
Sy67 Charang
2
0
3
1
4
Vo61 Echo Pan
2
0
Vo62 Star Theme
0
0
0
[8] SYNTH
Sy68 Wire Lead
Sy69 Solo Vox
1
0
No.
Name
Cate-
gory
Patch
Select
GM2 Patch Voice
Select
Key
Mode
Sy70 5th Saw Wave
Sy71 Bass & Lead
Sy72 Delayed Lead
Sy73 Fantasia
0
0
MSB = 87
MSB = 121
1
LSB
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
PC
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
LSB
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
PC
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
0
443 Sy01 JUNO-DTrance
SYN
SYN
SYN
SYN
SYN
SYN
SYN
SYN
SYN
SYN
SYN
SYN
SYN
TEK
TEK
TEK
TEK
TEK
TEK
PLS
6
3
2
5
4
2
4
4
2
2
3
5
4
5
6
3
2
2
4
3
DUAL
SINGLE
SINGLE
DUAL
Sy74 Polysynth
Sy75 Ice Rain
0
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
Sy02 Trance Keys
Sy03 Trance Pad
Sy04 DanceStack
Sy05 JUNO-D Power
Sy06 106 SawStack
Sy07 JUNO-D Sweep
Sy08 Pizz Saw
0
Sy76 Brightness
Sy77 Goblin
0
0
DUAL
Sy78 Breath Noise
Sy79 Fl.Key Click
FX
0
DUAL
FX
1
DUAL
DUAL
Sy09 Sugar Key
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
DUAL
Sy10 BriteSawKey
Sy11 Wire Keys
Sy12 DualWireKeys
Sy13 JUNO-D Poly
Sy14 JUNO-D Rave
Sy15 Feedback 5th
Sy16 Time Warp
Sy17 Riff the 5th
Sy18 Seq Pulse
DUAL
DUAL
DUAL
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
DUAL
Sy19 Chord Maj7
Sy20 JUNO-D Slice
114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Patch list
[9] BASS
[0] RHYTHM & SFX
No.
Name
Cate-
gory
Patch
Select
GM2 Patch Voice
Select
Key
Mode
No.
Name
Cate-
gory
Patch
Select
GM2 Patch Voice
Select
Key
Mode
MSB = 87
MSB = 121
MSB = 87
MSB = 121
LSB
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
PC
74
LSB
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
0
PC
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
33
34
34
35
36
37
38
39
39
39
39
39
40
40
40
40
LSB
PC
LSB
PC
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
Bs01
Bs02
Bs03
Bs04
Bs05
Bs06
Bs07
Bs08
Bs09
Bs10
Bs11
Bs12
Bs13
Bs14
Bs15
Bs16
Bs17
Bs18
Bs19
Bs20
Bs21
Bs22
Bs23
Bs24
Bs25
Bs26
Bs27
Bs28
Bs29
Bs30
Bs31
Bs32
Bs33
Bs34
Bs35
Bs36
Bs37
Bs38
Bs39
Bs40
Bs41
Bs42
Bs43
Bs44
Bs45
Bs46
Bs47
Bs48
Bs49
Bs50
Bs51
Bs52
Bs53
Bs54
Bs55
Bs56
Bs57
Bs58
Bs59
Bs60
Bs61
Bs62
Bs63
Bs64
Bs65
Bs66
Bs67
Bs68
TB Dist Saw
Acid TB Bs
FatTB Bass
SBS
SBS
SBS
SBS
SBS
SBS
SBS
SBS
SBS
SBS
SBS
SBS
SBS
SBS
SBS
SBS
SBS
SBS
SBS
SBS
SBS
SBS
SBS
SBS
SBS
SBS
SBS
SBS
SBS
SBS
SBS
SBS
SBS
SBS
SBS
SBS
SBS
BS
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
2
2
1
1
1
5
1
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
3
1
2
2
2
3
3
2
4
3
3
2
2
2
4
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
1
2
3
2
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
1
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
DUAL
Rh01–Rh20: Rhythm set list (p. 116)
75
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
Rh21 W.Chime Down
Rh22 Nz & SawHit
Rh23 NylonGtr Nz
Rh24 Timpani
Rh25 Agogo
PRC
SFX
SFX
PRC
PRC
PRC
PRC
PRC
PRC
PRC
PRC
PRC
PRC
PRC
PRC
SFX
SFX
SFX
SFX
SFX
SFX
SFX
SFX
SFX
SFX
SFX
SFX
SFX
SFX
SFX
SFX
SFX
SFX
SFX
SFX
SFX
SFX
SFX
SFX
SFX
SFX
SFX
SFX
SFX
SFX
SFX
SFX
SFX
SFX
SFX
SFX
66
66
66
67
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
126
127
128
103
76
—
—
—
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
2
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
4
5
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
2
3
4
5
0
1
2
3
—
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
76
—
TB Bass
77
—
MC202 Bass
House Bass 1
SH101 Bass 1
SH101 Bass 2
Dark Bass
78
48
79
114
116
116
117
117
118
118
119
119
119
120
123
123
123
123
123
123
124
124
124
124
125
125
125
125
125
125
126
126
126
126
126
126
126
126
126
126
127
127
127
127
127
127
128
128
128
128
80
Rh26 Woodblock
Rh27 Castanets
Rh28 Taiko
78
81
79
82
80
Smooth Bass
Low Bass
83
Rh29 Concert BD
Rh30 Melo. Tom 1
Rh31 Melo. Tom 2
Rh32 Synth Drum
Rh33 808 Tom
Rh34 Elec Perc
Rh35 Reverse Cym.
Rh36 Seashore
Rh37 Rain
81
84
82
Deep Bass
85
83
SH DullBass
Square Bass
Jungle Bass
Organ Bass
Garage Bass
Attack Bass
House Bass 2
SH-2 Bass
86
84
87
85
88
86
89
87
90
93
91
94
92
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
DUAL
Rh38 Thunder
Rh39 Wind
95
93
96
MG Punch Bs
MG Lite Bs
PopSynthBass
BriteSawBass
Mini Bass
94
Rh40 Stream
97
95
Rh41 Bubble
98
96
Rh42 Bird
99
97
Rh43 Dog
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
98
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
DUAL
Rh44 Horse-Gallop
Rh45 Bird 2
JU-2 Bass
99
106 Bass 1
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
78
Rh46 Telephone 1
Rh47 Telephone 2
Rh48 DoorCreaking
Rh49 Door
106 Bass 2
MG Bass 1
MG Bass 2
Unison Bs 1
Unison Bs 2
Unison Bs 3
Unison Bs 4
Unison Bs 5
Detune Bass
AEx Synth Bs
JUNO-D AcBs1
JUNO-D AcBs2
Upright Bs
Rh50 Scratch
Rh51 Wind Chimes
Rh52 Helicopter
Rh53 Car-Engine
Rh54 Car-Stop
Rh55 Car-Pass
Rh56 Car-Crash
Rh57 Siren
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
DUAL
BS
Rh58 Train
BS
Rh59 Jetplane
Rh60 Starship
Rh61 Burst Noise
Rh62 Applause
Rh63 Laughing
Rh64 Screaming
Rh65 Punch
JUNO-D Bs 1
JUNO-D Bs 2
JUNO-D Bs 3
JUNO-DJazzBs
Bright Bass
JUNO-DRockBs
JUNO-DFlsBs1
JUNO-DFlsBs2
Mr.Smooth
JUNO-D Slap1
JUNO-D Slap2
AEx FingerBs
Acoustic Bs.
Fingered Bs.
Finger Slap
Picked Bass
Fretless Bs.
Slap Bass 1
BS
BS
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
DUAL
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
Rh66 Heart Beat
Rh67 Footsteps
Rh68 Gun Shot
Rh69 Machine Gun
Rh70 Lasergun
Rh71 Explosion
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
BS
79
0
BS
80
1
BS
81
0
BS
82
0
BS
83
0
Slap Bass 2
BS
84
0
Synth Bass 1
SynthBass101
Acid Bass
SBS
SBS
SBS
SBS
SBS
SBS
SBS
SBS
SBS
85
0
86
1
87
2
Clavi Bass
88
3
Hammer
89
4
Synth Bass 2
Beef FM Bass
RubberBass 2
Attack Pulse
90
0
91
1
92
2
93
3
115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rhythm set list
Rh01:Standard Kit
(PC:001)
Rh02:Rock Kit
(PC:002)
Rh03:Jazz Kit
(PC:003)
Rh04:Brush Kit
(PC:004)
Rh05:Orch Kit
(PC:005)
Voice
Voice
Voice
Voice
Voice
16
17
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
18
20
22
19
21
23
-----
-----
-----
R&B Snr 1
Sharp Kick
Old Kick
-----
-----
-----
JU-D Snr 3
Old Kick
-----
-----
-----
Dry Snr 1
Sharp Kick
Mix Kick
-----
-----
-----
Dry Snr 2
Mix Kick
Tubular-bell
Tubular-bell
Tubular-bell
Tubular-bell
Tubular-bell
Tubular-bell
Tubular-bell
Tubular-bell
Tubular-bell
Tubular-bell
Tubular-bell
Tubular-bell
Concert BD
Side Stick
Concert Snr
TR909 Clap 1
Concert Snr
Timpani
Timpani
Timpani
Timpani
Timpani
Timpani
Timpani
Timpani
Timpani
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
C1 24
26
25
27
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
3
2
2
2
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
1
2
3
2
1
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
3
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
28
Sharp Kick
JU-D Snr 4
JU-D Kick 1
JU-D Snr 1
JU-D Kick 2
JU-D PHH
Power Kick
Hard Kick
JU-D Stick
JU-D Snr 1
Ghost&Flm
Rock Snr
JU-D Tom L
JU-D CHH 1
JU-D Tom L
JU-D CHH 2
JU-D Tom M
JU-D OHH 1
JU-D Tom M
JU-D Tom H
Crash Cym.3
JU-D Tom H
Rock Ride 3
ChinaCymbal2
Rock Ride 2
Tambourine 1
ChinaCymbal2
Cowbell
JazzDryKick2
Jazz Rim
29
30
32
34
JU-D Snr 4
OldSharpKick
JU-D Snr 3
JU-D Kick 3
JU-D PHH
JU-D Kick 1
JU-D Kick 2
JU-D Stick
JU-D Snr 1
Ghost&Flm
JU-D Snr 2
JU-D Tom L
JU-D CHH 3
JU-D TomLFlm
JU-D CHH 4
JU-D Tom M
JU-D OHH 2
JU-D TomMFlm
JU-D Tom H
Crash Cym.3
JU-D TomHFlm
Rock Ride 1
ChinaCymbal2
Ride Bell 1
Tambourine 1
Splash Cym
Cowbell
Dry Snr 2
JazzDryKick1
Brush Slap 1
Jazz Kick 2
Jazz PHH
Jazz Kick 3
JazzDryKick2
Dry Stick 1
Jazz Rim
SnareGhost
JU-D JazzSnr
JazzTom L
JU-D CHH 1
JazzTomL/Flm
JU-D CHH 2
JazzTom M
JU-D OHH 1
JazzTomM/Flm
JazzTom H
Jazz Crash
JazzTomH/Flm
Jazz Ride 1
ChinaCymbal1
Ride Bell 2
Tambourine 1
Splash Cym
Cowbell
Crash Cym.2
Vibraslap
Jazz Ride 2
Bongo High 2
Bongo Low 2
Conga Hi Mt2
CongHiOp/Slp
CongLwOp/Slp
Timbale Hi 2
Timbale Lw 2
Agogo
Agogo
Cabasa
Maracas
ShortWhistle
LongWhistle2
Guiro Sw
Castanets 2
Claves
Woodblock
Woodblock
Cuica Sw
Shaker Sw
Triangl Mt 1
Triangl Op 1
Bell Tree
Jingle Bell
WindChimeDwn
W.ChimeShort
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
FingerSnap
TR909 Clap 1
TR808 Clap
Bass Hit
JazzDryKick1
JU-D JazzSnr
Jazz Kick 2
Brush PHH
Jazz Kick 1
Jazz Kick 3
Brush Slap 2
BrushSwirl 2
Brush Slap 1
BrushSwirl 1
Brush Tom L
Brush CHH
Brush Tom L
Brush PHH
Brush Tom M
Brush OHH
Brush Tom M
Brush Tom H
Brush Crash
Brush Tom H
Jazz Ride 1
ChinaCymbal1
Ride Bell 1
Tambourine 3
Splash Cym
Cowbell
Crash Cym.2
Vibraslap
Jazz Ride 2
Bongo High 2
Bongo Low 2
Conga Hi Mt2
CongHiOp/Slp
CongLwOp/Slp
Timbale Hi 2
Timbale Lw 2
Agogo
Agogo
Cabasa
Maracas
ShortWhistle
LongWhistle2
Guiro Sw
Castanets 2
Claves
Woodblock
Woodblock
Cuica Sw
Shaker Sw
Triangl Mt 1
Triangl Op 1
Bell Tree
Jingle Bell
WindChimeDwn
W.ChimeShort
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
FingerSnap
TR909 Clap 1
TR808 Clap
Bass Hit
31
33
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
35
C2 36
38
37
39
40
41
42
44
46
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
43
45
47
C3 48
50
49
51
Timpani
Timpani
Timpani
Timpani
52
53
54
56
58
Tambourine 3
Splash Cym
ChinaCymbal2
ConcertCym 1
Rev.Cymbl 2
ConcertCym 2
SlowAtackCym
SlowAtackCym
Taiko
CongHiOp/Slp
CongLwOp/Slp
Timbale Hi 2
Timbale Lw 2
Agogo
55
57
Rock Crash
Vibraslap
Rock Crash
Vibraslap
Ride Cymbal
Bongo High 2
Bongo Low 2
Conga Hi Mt2
CongHiOp/Slp
CongLwOp/Slp
Timbale Hi 2
Timbale Lw 2
Agogo
59
Rock Ride 2
Bongo High 2
Bongo Low 2
Conga Hi Mt2
CongHiOp/Slp
CongLwOp/Slp
Timbale Hi 2
Timbale Lw 2
Agogo
C4 60
62
61
63
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
64
65
66
68
70
67
Agogo
Cabasa
Maracas
Agogo
Cabasa
Maracas
Agogo
Cabasa
Maracas
69
71
ShortWhistle
LongWhistle2
Guiro Short
Guiro Long
Claves
Woodblock
Woodblock
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Triangl Mt 1
Triangl Op 1
Shaker 1
Jingle Bell
WindChimeDwn
Castanets 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
FingerSnap
TR909 Clap 2
Cheap Clap
Bass Hit
OrchestraHit
6th Hit
Euro Hit
Mtrnm Click
Mtrnm Bell
-----
-----
-----
-----
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
ShortWhistle
LongWhistle2
Guiro Sw
Castanets 2
Claves
Woodblock
Woodblock
Cuica Sw
Shaker Sw
Triangl Mt 1
Triangl Op 1
Bell Tree
Jingle Bell
WindChimeDwn
W.ChimeShort
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
FingerSnap
TR909 Clap 2
TR808 Clap
Bass Hit
OrchestraHit
6th Hit
Euro Hit
Mtrnm Click
Mtrnm Bell
-----
-----
-----
-----
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
ShortWhistle
LongWhistle2
Cowbell
Vibraslap
Claves
Woodblock
Woodblock
Castanets 2
Cuica Sw
Triangl Mt 1
Triangl Op 1
Shaker Sw
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
C5 72
74
73
75
76
77
78
80
82
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
79
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
81
83
C6 84
86
WindChimeDwn
W.ChimeShort
Bird 1
85
87
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
88
Church Bell
Church Bell
FingerSnap
TR909 Clap 2
TR808 Clap
OrchestraHit
Applause
Mtrnm Click
Mtrnm Bell
-----
89
90
92
94
91
OrchestraHit
6th Hit
Applause
Mtrnm Click
Mtrnm Bell
-----
-----
-----
-----
OrchestraHit
6th Hit
Applause
Mtrnm Click
Mtrnm Bell
-----
-----
-----
-----
93
95
C7 96
98
97
99
-----
-----
-----
100
[EXC]: Percussion sound of the same number will not be heard at the same time.
PC: Program Number
Rh01–Rh05: MSB=086, LSB=064
116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rhythm set list
Rh06:R&B/HHop Kit
(PC:006)
Rh07:Techno Kit
(PC:007)
Rh08:House Kit
(PC:008)
Rh09:808&909 Kit
(PC:009)
Rh10:Perc Menu
(PC:010)
Voice
Voice
Voice
Voice
Voice
16
17
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
18
20
22
19
21
23
-----
-----
-----
Dry Snr 2
Sharp Kick
Old Kick
Jazz Rim
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
R&B Snr 2
Old Kick
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
Mtrnm Click
Mtrnm Bell
Scratch 1
C1 24
26
25
27
1
2
2
1
1
1
2
1
2
2
3
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Elec Snare 2
PlasticKick1
House Kick
Elec Snare 1
SH32 Kick
Flnger Snr
TR909 Kick 1
TR909 PHH
TR909 Kick 2
TechnoKick 1
TR909 Rim
TR909 Snr 1
TR909 Clap 1
TR909 Snr 2
TR909 Tom
TR909 CHH 2
TR909 Tom
TR909 CHH 1
TR909 Tom
TR909 OHH
TR909 Tom
TR909 Tom
TR909 Crash
TR909 Tom
TR909 Ride 1
ChinaCymbal2
TR909RideBl2
Tambourine 2
NoiseCymbal
TR808Cowbell
TR808 Crash
Vibraslap
2
2
2
1
2
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
2
2
2
1
2
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
House Snr
House Kick
SH32 Kick
Elec Snare 2
PlasticKick1
Elec Snare 3
TR808 Kick 1
TR909 PHH
TR808 Kick 2
TR808 Kick 3
TR808 Rim
TR808 Snr 1
TR808 Clap
TR808 Snr 2
TR808 Tom 2
TR808 CHH 1
TR808 Tom
TR808 CHH 2
TR808 Tom 2
TR808 OHH
TR808 Tom
TR808 Tom 2
TR808 Crash
TR808 Tom
TR909 Ride 3
TR909 Splash
TR909RideBl2
TR808Conga 1
TR909 Splash
TR808Cowbell
TR808 Crash
TR909 PHH
TR909 Kick 1
TR909 Kick 2
TR909 Rim
TR909 Snr 1
TR909 Clap 2
TR909 Snr 2
TR909 Tom
TR909 CHH 1
TR909 Tom
TR909 CHH 2
TR909 Tom
TR909 OHH
TR909 Tom
TR909 Tom
TR909 Crash
TR909 Tom
TR909 Ride 1
ChinaCymbal2
TR909RideBl1
TR808Maracas
TR909 Splash
TR808Cowbell
TR909 Crash
TR808 Clave
TR909 Ride 2
NoiseCymbal
TR909 Clap 1
TR909 Clap 2
TR808 Clap
Rev.909Kick2
Rev.909Crash
Rev.909 OHH
Rev.909HClap
Square Click
High-Q
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
28
House Kick
TR808 Snr 2
SH32 Kick
Elec Snare 3
TR909 Kick 2
TR909 PHH
TechnoKick 1
PlasticKick1
Dry Stick 2
TR909 Snr 3
TR909 Clap 2
House Snr
TR909 Tom
TR909 CHH 2
TR909 Tom
TR909 CHH 1
TR909 Tom
TR909 OHH
TR909 Tom
TR909 Tom
TR909 Crash
TR909 Tom
TR909 Ride 2
ChinaCymbal2
TR909RideBl1
Tambourine 3
TR909 Splash
Cowbell
29
30
32
34
Scratch 2
TR909 Kick 2
JU-D JazzSnr
TechnoKick 1
JU-D PHH
R&B Kick 2
R&B Kick 1
R&B Stick
R&B Snr 1
Cheap Clap
R&B Snr 2
R&B Tom L
JU-D CHH 5
TR808 Kick 1
JU-D CHH 6
R&B Tom M
JU-D OHH 3
TR808 Kick 1
R&B Tom H
Crash Cym.3
TR808 Kick 1
R&B Ride
TR808 Crash
TR909RideBl1
Tambourine 1
TR909 Splash
TR808Cowbell
TR909 Crash
Vibraslap
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
ScratchPush2
ScratchPull2
Beam HiQ
Taiko
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
31
33
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
35
C2 36
38
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Bongo High 1
Bongo Low 1
Bongo High 2
Bongo Low 2
Conga Hi Mt
CongaHi Open
CongaLowOpen
Conga Hi Mt2
CongHiOp/Slp
CongLwOp/Slp
TR808Conga 1
Timbale Hi 1
Timbale Lw 1
Timbale Hi 2
Timbale Lw 2
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cuica Sw
Castanets
Castanets 2
Tambourine 1
Tambourine 2
Tambourine 3
Cabasa
Maracas
TR808Maracas
Claves
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
37
39
40
41
42
44
46
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
43
45
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
47
C3 48
50
49
51
52
53
54
56
58
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
55
57
TR808 Crash
Vibraslap
[EXC1]
59
TR909 Ride 2
Bongo High 2
Bongo Low 2
Conga Hi Mt2
CongHiOp/Slp
CongLwOp/Slp
Timbale Hi 2
Timbale Lw 2
Agogo
TR909 Ride 3
Bongo High 2
Bongo Low 2
TR808Conga 1
CongHiOp/Slp
CongLwOp/Slp
Timbale Hi 2
Timbale Lw 2
Agogo
TR909 Ride 3
Bongo High 2
Bongo Low 2
Conga Hi Mt2
CongHiOp/Slp
CongLwOp/Slp
Timbale Hi 2
Timbale Lw 2
Agogo
C4 60
62
61
63
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
64
65
66
68
70
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
TR808 Clave
Woodblock
Woodblock
Cowbell
TR808Cowbell
Vibraslap
67
Agogo
Cabasa
Maracas
Agogo
Cabasa
Agogo
Cabasa
Maracas
69
TR808Maracas
ShortWhistle
LongWhistle2
Cuica Sw
Shaker Sw
TR808 Clave
Guiro Sw
Castanets 2
Triangl Mt 1
Triangl Op 1
Jingle Bell
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
FingerSnap
TR909 Clap 2
TR808 Clap
Rev.909Crash
Rev.909 OHH
Rev.909Kick2
Rev.909HClap
Beam HiQ
Techno Hit
Bass Hit
71
ShortWhistle
LongWhistle2
Shaker Sw
Cuica Sw
Castanets 2
Triangl Mt 2
Triangl Op 2
Bell Tree
Jingle Bell
WindChimeDwn
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
FingerSnap
TR909 Clap 2
TR808 Clap
TR909 Clap 1
ScratchPush2
ScratchPull2
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Scratch 2
Rev.909HClap
Philly Hit
Siren
Mtrnm Click
Mtrnm Bell
-----
-----
-----
-----
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
ShortWhistle
LongWhistle2
Guiro Short
Guiro Long
Shaker 2
Castanets
TR808 Clave
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Bell Tree
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
FingerSnap
TR909 Clap 1
TR808 Clap
Rev.909Crash
Rev.909 OHH
Rev.909Kick2
Rev.909HClap
Beam HiQ
Techno Hit
Bass Hit
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
Shaker 1
Shaker 2
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
C5 72
74
73
75
Shaker Sw
Guiro Short
Guiro Long
Guiro Sw
Triangl Mt 1
Triangl Op 1
Triangl Mt 2
Triangl Op 2
Agogo
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
76
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
77
78
80
82
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC8]
[EXC8]
[EXC9]
[EXC9]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
79
81
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
83
Agogo
ShortWhistle
Long Whistle
LongWhistle2
FingerSnap
Cheap Clap
TR909 Clap 1
TR909 Clap 2
TR808 Clap
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
W.ChimeShort
WindChimeDwn
Church Bell
-----
-----
-----
[EXC10]
[EXC10]
[EXC10]
C6 84
86
85
87
[EXC8]
[EXC8]
[EXC9]
[EXC9]
88
89
90
92
94
91
93
6th Hit
Euro Hit
MC500 Beep 2
MC500 Beep 1
-----
-----
-----
-----
6th Hit
Euro Hit
MC500 Beep 2
MC500 Beep 1
-----
-----
-----
-----
Beam HiQ
95
MC500 Beep 2
MC500 Beep 1
-----
-----
-----
C7 96
98
97
99
100
-----
-----
[EXC]: Percussion sound of the same number will not be heard at the same time.
PC: Program Number
Rh06–Rh10: MSB=086, LSB=064
117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rhythm set list
Rh11:Drums Menu
(PC:011)
Rh12:GM2 STANDARD
(PC:001)
Rh13:GM2 ROOM
(PC:009)
Rh14:GM2 POWER
(PC:017)
Rh15:GM2 ELECTRIC
(PC:025)
Voice
Voice
Voice
Voice
Voice
16
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
High-Q
Slap
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
Square Click
Mtrnm Click
Mtrnm Bell
Mix Kick
StandardKick
Side Stick
Standard Snr
TR909 Clap 1
Elec Snare 3
Real Tom 3
Close HiHat
Real Tom 3
Standard PHH
Real Tom 2
Standard OHH
Real Tom 2
Real Tom 1
Crash Cym.1
Real Tom 1
Ride Cymbal
ChinaCymbal1
Ride Bell 2
Tambourine 3
Splash Cym
Cowbell
Crash Cym.2
Vibraslap
Ride Cymbal
Bongo High 1
Bongo Low 1
Conga Hi Mt
CongaHi Open
CongaLowOpen
Timbale Hi 1
Timbale Lw 1
Agogo
Agogo
Cabasa
Maracas
ShortWhistle
Long Whistle
Guiro Short
Guiro Long
Claves
Woodblock
Woodblock
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Triangl Mt 1
Triangl Op 1
Shaker 1
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
High-Q
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
High-Q
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
High-Q
17
18
20
22
19
21
-----
JU-D Kick 1
JU-D Kick 2
JU-D Kick 3
StandardKick
Jazz Kick 1
Jazz Kick 2
Jazz Kick 3
JazzDryKick1
JazzDryKick2
Mix Kick
2
2
2
1
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
1
4
1
1
1
3
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
2
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
23
C1 24
26
25
27
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
28
Slap
Slap
Slap
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
29
30
32
34
Power Kick
Hard Kick
31
Square Click
Mtrnm Click
Mtrnm Bell
Mix Kick
StandardKick
Side Stick
Standard Snr
TR909 Clap 1
Elec Snare 3
Room Tom 2
Close HiHat
Room Tom 2
Standard PHH
Room Tom 1
Standard OHH
Room Tom 1
Room Tom 1
Crash Cym.1
Room Tom 1
Ride Cymbal
ChinaCymbal1
Ride Bell 2
Tambourine 3
Splash Cym
Cowbell
Crash Cym.2
Vibraslap
Ride Cymbal
Bongo High 1
Bongo Low 1
Conga Hi Mt
CongaHi Open
CongaLowOpen
Timbale Hi 1
Timbale Lw 1
Agogo
Square Click
Mtrnm Click
Mtrnm Bell
Mix Kick
Power Kick
Side Stick
Dance Snare
TR909 Clap 1
Elec Snare 3
Rock Tom 2
Close HiHat
Rock Tom 2
Standard PHH
Rock Tom 2
Standard OHH
Rock Tom 2
Rock Tom 1
Crash Cym.1
Rock Tom 1
Ride Cymbal
ChinaCymbal1
Ride Bell 2
Tambourine 3
Splash Cym
Cowbell
Crash Cym.2
Vibraslap
Ride Cymbal
Bongo High 1
Bongo Low 1
Conga Hi Mt
CongaHi Open
CongaLowOpen
Timbale Hi 1
Timbale Lw 1
Agogo
Square Click
Mtrnm Click
Mtrnm Bell
Mix Kick
Elec Kick
Side Stick
Elec Snare 1
TR909 Clap 1
Elec Snare 2
Synth Drum
Close HiHat
Synth Drum
Standard PHH
Synth Drum
Standard OHH
Synth Drum
Synth Drum
Crash Cym.1
Synth Drum
Ride Cymbal
Rev.Cymbl 1
Ride Bell 2
Tambourine 3
Splash Cym
Cowbell
Crash Cym.2
Vibraslap
Ride Cymbal
Bongo High 1
Bongo Low 1
Conga Hi Mt
CongaHi Open
CongaLowOpen
Timbale Hi 1
Timbale Lw 1
Agogo
33
R&B Kick 1
R&B Kick 2
OldSharpKick
Sharp Kick
Old Kick
SH32 Kick
TechnoKick 1
TR909 Kick 1
TR909 Kick 2
Elec Kick
TR808 Kick 1
TR808 Kick 2
TR808 Kick 3
House Kick
PlasticKick1
PlasticKick2
JU-D Snr 1
JU-D Snr 2
JU-D Snr 3
JU-D Snr 4
Standard Snr
Rock Snr
35
C2 36
38
37
39
40
41
42
44
46
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
43
45
47
C3 48
50
49
51
52
53
54
56
58
JU-D JazzSnr
Jazz Snr
55
57
Brush Slap 1
Brush Slap 2
BrushSwirl 1
BrushSwirl 2
R&B Snr 1
R&B Snr 2
Dry Snr 1
59
C4 60
62
61
63
64
Dry Snr 2
TR909 Snr 1
TR909 Snr 2
TR909 Snr 3
TR808 Snr 1
TR808 Snr 2
House Snr
Flnger Snr
Dance Snare
Elec Snare 1
Elec Snare 2
Elec Snare 3
Jazz Rim
JU-D Stick
Dry Stick 1
Dry Stick 2
R&B Stick
Sticks
Side Stick
TR909 Rim
TR808 Rim
JU-D CHH 1
JU-D CHH 2
JU-D CHH 3
JU-D CHH 4
JU-D CHH 5
JU-D CHH 6
Close HiHat
Brush CHH
TR909 CHH 1
TR909 CHH 2
TR808 CHH 1
TR808 CHH 2
JU-D OHH 1
JU-D OHH 2
JU-D OHH 3
Standard OHH
Brush OHH
TR909 OHH
TR808 OHH
JU-D PHH
Jazz PHH
65
66
68
70
67
Agogo
Cabasa
Agogo
Cabasa
Agogo
Cabasa
69
Maracas
ShortWhistle
Long Whistle
Guiro Short
Guiro Long
Claves
Woodblock
Woodblock
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Triangl Mt 1
Triangl Op 1
Shaker 1
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
Maracas
ShortWhistle
Long Whistle
Guiro Short
Guiro Long
Claves
Woodblock
Woodblock
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Triangl Mt 1
Triangl Op 1
Shaker 1
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
Maracas
ShortWhistle
Long Whistle
Guiro Short
Guiro Long
Claves
Woodblock
Woodblock
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Triangl Mt 1
Triangl Op 1
Shaker 1
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
71
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
C5 72
74
73
75
76
77
78
80
82
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
79
81
83
C6 84
86
85
87
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
88
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
89
90
92
94
91
93
95
C7 96
98
97
99
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
100
101
103
105
107
102
104
106
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
Brush PHH
TR909 PHH
[EXC]: Percussion sound of the same number will not be heard at the same time.
PC: Program Number
Rh11: MSB=086, LSB=064
Rh12–Rh15: MSB=120, LSB=000
118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rhythm set list
Rh16:GM2 ANALOG
(PC:026)
Rh17:GM2 JAZZ
(PC:033)
Rh18:GM2 BRUSH
(PC:041)
Rh19:GM2 ORCHSTRA
(PC:049)
Rh20:GM2 SFX
(PC:057)
Voice
Voice
Voice
Voice
Voice
16
17
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
18
20
22
19
21
23
-----
-----
-----
High-Q
-----
-----
-----
High-Q
-----
-----
-----
High-Q
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
High-Q
Slap
C1 24
26
25
27
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Close HiHat
Standard PHH
Standard OHH
Ride Cymbal
Sticks
Square Click
Mtrnm Click
Mtrnm Bell
Concert BD
ConcertBD Mt
Side Stick
Concert Snr
Castanets
Concert Snr
Timpani
Timpani
Timpani
Timpani
Timpani
Timpani
Timpani
Timpani
Timpani
Timpani
Timpani
Timpani
Timpani
Tambourine 3
Splash Cym
Cowbell
ConcertCym 1
Vibraslap
ConcertCym 2
Bongo High 1
Bongo Low 1
Conga Hi Mt
CongaHi Open
CongaLowOpen
Timbale Hi 1
Timbale Lw 1
Agogo
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
28
Slap
Slap
Slap
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
Square Click
Mtrnm Click
Mtrnm Bell
Mix Kick
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
29
30
32
34
31
Square Click
Mtrnm Click
Mtrnm Bell
Jazz Kick 2
Jazz Kick 1
Side Stick
Jazz Snr
TR909 Clap 1
Elec Snare 3
Real Tom 3
Close HiHat
Real Tom 3
Standard PHH
Real Tom 2
Standard OHH
Real Tom 2
Real Tom 1
Crash Cym.1
Real Tom 1
Ride Cymbal
ChinaCymbal1
Ride Bell 2
Tambourine 3
Splash Cym
Cowbell
Crash Cym.2
Vibraslap
Ride Cymbal
Bongo High 1
Bongo Low 1
Conga Hi Mt
CongaHi Open
CongaLowOpen
Timbale Hi 1
Timbale Lw 1
Agogo
Agogo
Cabasa
Maracas
ShortWhistle
Long Whistle
Guiro Short
Guiro Long
Claves
Woodblock
Woodblock
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Triangl Mt 1
Triangl Op 1
Shaker 1
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
-----
Square Click
Mtrnm Click
Mtrnm Bell
Jazz Kick 2
Jazz Kick 1
Side Stick
BrushSwirl 2
Brush Slap 1
BrushSwirl 1
Real Tom 3
Brush CHH
Real Tom 3
Brush PHH
Real Tom 2
Brush OHH
Real Tom 2
Real Tom 1
Brush Crash
Real Tom 1
Ride Cymbal
ChinaCymbal1
Ride Bell 2
Tambourine 3
Splash Cym
Cowbell
Crash Cym.2
Vibraslap
Ride Cymbal
Bongo High 1
Bongo Low 1
Conga Hi Mt
CongaHi Open
CongaLowOpen
Timbale Hi 1
Timbale Lw 1
Agogo
Agogo
Cabasa
Maracas
ShortWhistle
Long Whistle
Guiro Short
Guiro Long
Claves
Woodblock
Woodblock
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Triangl Mt 1
Triangl Op 1
Shaker 1
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
-----
33
35
TR808 Kick 1
TR808 Rim
TR808 Snr 2
TR909 Clap 1
Elec Snare 3
TR808 Tom 2
TR808 CHH 2
TR808 Tom 2
TR808 CHH 1
TR808 Tom 2
TR808 OHH
TR808 Tom 2
TR808 Tom 2
TR808 Crash
TR808 Tom 2
Ride Cymbal
ChinaCymbal1
Ride Bell 2
Tambourine 3
Splash Cym
TR808Cowbell
Crash Cym.2
Vibraslap
Ride Cymbal
Bongo High 1
Bongo Low 1
TR808Conga 1
TR808Conga 1
TR808Conga 1
Timbale Hi 1
Timbale Lw 1
Agogo
C2 36
38
37
39
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
40
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
41
42
44
46
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
43
Square Click
Mtrnm Click
Mtrnm Bell
Gt.FretNoise
Gt.CutNoise
Gt.CutNoise
String Slap
Fl.KeyClick
Laughing
Screaming
Punch
Heart Beat
Footsteps
Footsteps
Applause
Creaking
Door
Scratch 1
Wind Chimes
Car-Engine
Car-Stop
Car-Pass
Car-Crash
Siren
45
47
C3 48
50
49
51
52
53
54
56
58
55
57
59
C4 60
62
61
63
64
65
66
68
70
67
Agogo
Cabasa
Agogo
Cabasa
Train
69
Jetplane
Helicopter
Starship
Gun Shot
Machine Gun
Lasergun
Explosion
Dog
Horse-Gallop
Bird 1
Rain
Thunder
Wind
Seashore
Stream
Bubble
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
TR808Maracas
ShortWhistle
Long Whistle
Guiro Short
Guiro Long
TR808 Clave
Woodblock
Woodblock
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Triangl Mt 1
Triangl Op 1
Shaker 1
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
-----
Maracas
ShortWhistle
Long Whistle
Guiro Short
Guiro Long
Claves
Woodblock
Woodblock
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Triangl Mt 1
Triangl Op 1
Shaker 1
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Applause
-----
71
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
C5 72
74
73
75
76
77
78
80
82
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
79
81
83
C6 84
86
85
87
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
88
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
89
90
92
94
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
91
93
-----
-----
95
[EXC]: Percussion sound of the same number will not be heard at the same time.
PC: Program Number
Rh16–Rh20: MSB=120, LSB=000
119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance list
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
Name
No.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Name
106 Brass
No.
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Name
No.
31
32
Name
Big Atmos
SEQ Template
JUNO-D Stack
Big Power
Big Trance
Big Comb
Maj7
JUNO-D EP
Cosmos
JUNO-D SftLd
Fat TB
JUNO-D Blow
Finger Bass
Bs/Piano
JU-2 Strings
JU-2 Clavi
Tekno Strng
80’s EPiano
Pizz Saw
JUNO-D AcGtr
Power B
Strings Sect
JUNO-D Choir
Clavi
MKS-20 EP
Analog Organ
JUNO-D Orch
JUNO-D Porta
Marimba
JUNO-60 Str
JUNO-D Lead
Rhythm guide list
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
Name
Pop 1
Pop 2
Pop 3
Pop 4 (Bld)
Pop 5 (Shfl)
Pop 6 (Shfl)
Pop 7 (Vari)
Pop 8 (Vari)
Pop 9 (Vari)
Rock 1
No.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Name
Rock 2
Rock 3
Contmporary1
Contmporary2
Funk 1
Funk 2
Jazz 1
No.
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Name
No.
31
32
---
---
Name
Reggae 1
Reggae 2
Metronm 4/4
Metronm 2/4
Metronm 3/4
Techno 2
Trance 1
Trance 2
House 1
House 2
Hip Hop 1
Hip Hop 2
R&B 1
---
Jazz 2
Bossa
Techno 1
R&B 2
Drum’n’Bass
*
Bld: Ballad, Shfl: Shuffle, Vari: Variation
Arpeggio template list
Category Button Name
Category Button Name
Category Button Name
Category Button Name
Ac.Piano
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
Piano Phr 1
Piano Phr 2
Piano Phr 3
Piano Phr 4
Piano Phr 5
Piano Arp 1
Piano Arp 2
Piano Arp 3
Piano Arp 4
Bell
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
Bell Phr 1
Bell Phr 2
Bell Phr 3
Bell Phr 4
Bell Phr 5
Bell Arp 1
Bell Arp 2
Bell Arp 3
Bell Arp 4
Accordion
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
ACD Phr 1
ACD Phr 2
ACD Phr 3
ACD Phr 4
ACD Arp 1
ACD Arp 2
ACD Arp 3
ACD Arp 4
ACD Arp 5
El.Guitar
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
E.Gt Phr 1
E.Gt Phr 2
E.Gt Phr 3
E.Gt Phr 4
E.Gt Phr 5
E.Gt Arp 1
E.Gt Arp 2
E.Gt Arp 3
E.Gt Arp 4
Category Button Name
Category Button Name
Category Button Name
Category Button Name
El.Piano
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
E.Piano Phr1
E.Piano Phr2
E.Piano Phr3
E.Piano Phr4
E.Piano Phr5
E.Piano Arp1
E.Piano Arp2
E.Piano Arp3
E.Piano Arp4
Mallet
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
Marimba Phr1
Marimba Phr2
Xylophne Phr
Vibrphne Phr
Steel Dr Phr
MLT Arp 1
MLT Arp 2
MLT Arp 3
MLT Arp 4
Harmonica
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
HRM Phr 1
HRM Phr 2
HRM Phr 3
HRM Phr 4
HRM Phr 5
HRM Arp 1
HRM Arp 2
HRM Arp 3
HRM Arp 4
Dist.Gui-
tar
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
D.Gt Phr 1
D.Gt Phr 2
D.Gt Phr 3
D.Gt Phr 4
D.Gt Phr 5
D.Gt Arp 1
D.Gt Arp 2
D.Gt Arp 3
D.Gt Arp 4
Category Button Name
Category Button Name
Category Button Name
Category Button Name
Keyboard
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
Clavi Phr 1
Clavi Phr 2
Clavi Phr 3
Clavi Phr 4
Clavi Phr 5
Harpsi Phr
Clavi Arp1
Clavi Arp2
Clavi Arp3
Organ
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
Organ Phr 1
Organ Phr 2
Organ Phr 3
Organ Phr 4
Organ Phr 5
Organ Arp 1
Organ Arp 2
Organ Arp 3
Organ Arp 4
Ac.Guitar
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
A.Gt Phr 1
A.Gt Phr 2
A.Gt Phr 3
A.Gt Phr 4
A.Gt Phr 5
A.Gt Arp 1
A.Gt Arp 2
A.Gt Arp 3
A.Gt Arp 4
Strings
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
Strings Phr1
Strings Phr2
Strings Phr3
Pizz Phr
Violin Phr
Strings Arp1
Strings Arp2
Strings Arp3
Strings Arp4
120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Arpeggio template list
Category Button Name
Category Button Name
Category Button Name
Category Button Name
Orchestra
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
Orch Phr 1
Orch Phr 2
Orch Phr 3
Orch Phr 4
Orch Phr 5
Orch Arp 1
Orch Arp 2
Orch Arp 3
Orch Arp 4
Ac.Brass
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
Brass Phr 1
Brass Phr 2
Brass Phr 3
Brass Phr 4
MuteTp Phr
TrombonePhr1
TrombonePhr2
Trumpet Phr1
Trumpet Phr2
Soft Lead
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
Soft Ld Phr1
Soft Ld Phr2
Soft Ld Phr3
Soft Ld Phr4
Soft Ld Phr5
Soft Ld Arp1
Soft Ld Arp2
Soft Ld Arp3
Soft Ld Arp4
Drums
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
Fill Phr 1
Fill Phr 2
Fill Phr 3
Fill Phr 4
Fill Phr 5
SnrRol Phr
Tamb Phr
Conga Phr
Triangle Phr
Category Button Name
Category Button Name
Category Button Name
Category Button Name
Hit & Stab
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
Hit Phr 1
Hit Phr 2
Hit Phr 3
Hit Phr 4
Hit Phr 5
Hit Arp 1
Hit Arp 2
Hit Arp 3
Hit Arp 4
Synth
Brass
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
SynBrassPhr1
SynBrassPhr2
SynBrassPhr3
SynBrassPhr4
SynBrassPhr5
SynBrassArp1
SynBrassArp2
SynBrassArp3
SynBrassArp4
Techno
Synth
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
TekSyn Phr 1
TekSyn Phr 2
TekSyn Phr 3
TekSyn Phr 4
TekSyn Phr 5
TekSyn Arp 1
TekSyn Arp 2
TekSyn Arp 3
TekSyn Arp 4
Percus-
sion
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
Timpani Phr
Timpani Roll
CastanetPhr
Taiko Phr
Perc Arp 1
Perc Arp 2
Perc Arp 3
Perc Arp 4
Perc Arp 5
Category Button Name
Category Button Name
Category Button Name
Category Button Name
Wind
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
ClarinetPhr1
ClarinetPhr2
Oboe Phr 1
Oboe Phr 2
Oboe Phr 3
Wind Arp 1
Wind Arp 2
Wind Arp 3
Wind Arp 4
Sax
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
Sax Phr 1
Sax Phr 2
Sax Phr 3
Sax Phr 4
Sax Phr 5
Sax Arp 1
Sax Arp 2
Sax Arp 3
Sax Arp 4
Pulsating
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
Plsatng Phr1
Plsatng Phr2
Plsatng Phr3
Plsatng Phr4
Plsatng Phr5
Plsatng Arp1
Plsatng Arp2
Plsatng Arp3
Plsatng Arp4
Sound FX
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
Car Pass Phr
FootStep Phr
Heart Bt Phr
SFX Arp 1
SFX Arp 2
SFX Arp 3
SFX Arp 4
SFX Arp 5
SFX Arp 6
Category Button Name
Category Button Name
Category Button Name
Category Button Name
Flute
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
Flute Phr 1
Flute Phr 2
Flute Phr 3
Flute Phr 4
Piccolo Phr
Flute Arp 1
Flute Arp 2
Flute Arp 3
Flute Arp 4
Bright Pad
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
BrghtPd Phr1
BrghtPd Phr2
BrghtPd Phr3
BrghtPd Phr4
BrghtPd Phr5
BrghtPd Arp1
BrghtPd Arp2
BrghtPd Arp3
BrghtPd Arp4
Synth FX
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
FX Phr 1
FX Phr 2
FX Phr 3
FX Phr 4
FX Phr 5
FX Phr 6
FX Arp 1
FX Arp 2
FX Arp 3
Beat &
Groove
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
BTS Phr 1
BTS Phr 2
BTS Phr 3
BTS Phr 4
BTS Phr 5
BTS Arp 1
BTS Arp 2
BTS Arp 3
BTS Arp 4
Category Button Name
Category Button Name
Category Button Name
Category Button Name
Plucked
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
Harp Phr 1
Harp Phr 2
Harp Phr 3
Kalimba Phr
Koto Phr
PLK Arp 1
PLK Arp 2
PLK Arp 3
PLK Arp 4
Soft Pad
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
SoftPad Phr1
SoftPad Phr2
SoftPad Phr3
SoftPad Phr4
SoftPad Phr5
SoftPad Arp1
SoftPad Arp2
SoftPad Arp3
SoftPad Arp4
Other
Synth
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
Synth Phr 1
Synth Phr 2
Synth Phr 3
Synth Phr 4
Synth Phr 5
Synth Phr 6
Synth Phr 7
Synth Phr 8
Synth Arp
Combina-
tion
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
CMB Phr 1
CMB Phr 2
CMB Arp 1
CMB Arp 2
CMB Arp 3
CMB Arp 4
CMB Arp 5
CMB Arp 6
CMB Arp 7
Category Button Name
Category Button Name
Category Button Name
Ethnic
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
Shamisen Phr
SitarGls Phr
Bug Pipe Phr
ShakuhatiPhr
Mizmar Phr
Gamelan Phr
Tabla Phr
Vox
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
Vox Phr 1
Vox Phr 2
Vox Phr 3
Vox Phr 4
Vox Phr 5
Vox Arp 1
Vox Arp 2
Vox Arp 3
Vox Arp 4
Bass
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
FngerBs Phr1
FngerBs Phr2
FngerBs Phr3
FngerBs Phr4
SlapBs Phr 1
SlapBs Phr 2
FretlsBs Phr
AcBass Phr
Ethnic Arp 1
Ethnic Arp 2
BsSlide Phr
Category Button Name
Category Button Name
Category Button Name
Fretted
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
Banjo Phr 1
Banjo Phr 2
Banjo Phr 3
Banjo Arp 1
Banjo Arp 2
Banjo Arp 3
Fretted Arp1
Fretted Arp2
Fretted Arp3
Hard
Lead
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
Hard Ld Phr1
Hard Ld Phr2
Hard Ld Phr3
Hard Ld Phr4
Hard Ld Phr5
Hard Ld Arp1
Hard Ld Arp2
Hard Ld Arp3
Hard Ld Arp4
Synth
Bass
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
SynBass Phr1
SynBass Phr2
SynBass Phr3
SynBass Phr4
SynBass Phr5
SynBass Phr6
SynBass Phr7
SynBass Phr8
SynBass Phr9
121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Arpeggio style list
No. Name
Variation
No. Name
Variation
No. Name
Variation
No. Name
Variation
01 Note Values *
02 1/8 Basic 1
03 1/8 Basic 2
04 1/8 Basic 3
05 1/8 Basic 4
06 1/8 Sync 1-1
07 1/8 Sync 1-2
08 1/8 Sync 1-3
09 1/8 Sync 1-4
10 1/8 Sync 2-1
11 1/8 Sync 2-2
12 1/8 Sync 2-3
13 1/8 Sync 2-4
14 1/8 Drive 1
15 1/8 Drive 2
16 1/8 Drive 3
17 1/8 Drive 4
18 1/8 Triplet1
19 1/8 Triplet2
20 1/16 Basic 1
21 1/16 Basic 2
22 1/16 Basic 3
23 1/16 Basic 4
24 1/16 Sync1-1
25 1/16 Sync1-2
12
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
26 1/16 Sync1-3
27 1/16 Sync1-4
28 1/16 Sync2-1
29 1/16 Sync2-2
30 1/16 Sync2-3
31 1/16 Sync2-4
32 1/16 Drive 1
33 1/16 Drive 2
34 1/16 Drive 3
35 1/16 Drive 4
36 Rhythmix 1
37 Rhythmix 2
38 Piano Phr
39 E.Piano Phr
40 Pno&EpBackng
41 Clavi Phr
42 Harpsi Phr
43 Bell Phr
44 Mallet Phr
45 Organ Phr
46 Org Backing
47 AccordionPhr
48 ACD Backing
49 Harm Phr
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
6
6
9
6
1
6
6
8
4
5
2
6
6
51 A.Gt Backing
52 E.Gt Phr
53 E.Gt Backing
54 D.Gt Phr
8
5
5
6
4
12
6
6
6
6
8
4
3
10
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
7
9
76 Ac&E.Bass
77 Synth Bs
78 Drum Phr
79 Perc Phr
80 SFX Phr
81 BTS Phr
82 CMB Phr
12
11
10
5
4
6
55 D.Gt Backing
56 Str&Orc Phr
57 Hit&Stab Phr
58 Wind Phr
59 Flute Phr
60 Plucked Phr
61 Ethnic Phr
62 Banjo Phr
63 BanjoBacking
64 Brass Phr
65 SynBrs Phr
66 Sax Phr
67 BrightPadPhr
68 SoftPad Phr
69 Vox Phr
70 Hard Ld Phr
71 Soft Ld Phr
72 TeknoSyn Phr
73 Pulse Phr
74 FX Phr
3
50 A.Gt Phr
75 Synth Phr
* Variations based on note values : 1/4, 1/8, 1/12, 1/16, 1/32 (Single and Dual)
Multi-chord set list
1. Pop 1
3. Jazz 1
5. Blues
Assign Chord Name
Key
Constituent Notes of
Chord Forms
Assign Chord Name
Key
Constituent Notes of
Chord Forms
Assign Chord Name
Key
Constituent Notes of
Chord Forms
C3, A#3, D4, E4
C#3, F3, B3, D#4
D3, F#3, C4, E4
D#3, G3, C#4, F4
E3, G#3, D4, G4
F2, A3, D#4, G4
F#2, A3, C4, D#4
G2, F3, B3, E4
G#2, B3, D4, F4
A2, G3, C#4, F4
A#2, G#3, D4, G4
B2, A3, D4, F4
C
Cadd9
C3, G3, D4, E4
C#3, C4, D#4, F4
D3, F4, A3, C4
D#3, A#3, D4, G4
E3, C4, D4, G4
F2, A3, E4, G4
F#2, A3, D4, E4
G2, D4, E4, G4
G#2, C4, D4, F4
A2, A3, C4, F4
A#2, A#3, D4, G4
B2, B3, D4, G4
C
C6 9
C3, E3, A3, D4
C#3, F3, B3, E4
D3, F3, C4, E4
D#3, G3, C#4, F#4
E3, G#3, D4, G4
F3, A3, E4, G4
F#3, A#3, E4, A4
G2, F3, B3, E4
G#2, F#3, C4, F4
A2, G3, C4, D4
A#2, G#3, C4, D4
B2, A3, D4, E4
C
C7(9)
C#
D
C#maj9
D-7
C#
D
C#7(#9)
D-9
C#
D
C#7(9)
D7(9)
D#
E
F
D#maj7
Cadd9 (on E)
Fmaj9
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
D#7(#9)
E#7(#9)
Fmaj9
F#7(#9)
G7(13)
G#7(13)
A-7(11)
Bb9
D#
E
F
D#7(9)
E7(#9)
F7(9)
F#
G
G#
A
Dadd9 (on F#)
Cadd9 (on G)
F-6 (on Ab)
F (on A)
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
F#dim7
G7(13)
G#dim7
A7(b13)
Bb7(13)
B-7(b5)
A#
B
G- (on Bb)
G (on B)
A#
B
B-7(11)
2. Pop 2
4. Jazz 2
6. Trad Maj
Assign Chord Name
Key
Constituent Notes of
Chord Forms
Assign Chord Name
Key
Constituent Notes of
Chord Forms
Assign Chord Name
Key
Constituent Notes of
Chord Forms
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
Cmaj9
C#dim7
D-9
D#dim7
E-7
Fmaj9
F#-7 (b5)
G7sus4 (9 13)
G#dim7
A-9
C7(on Bb)
B-7(b5)
C3, E3, B3, D4
C#3, G3, A#3, E4
D3, F3, C4, E4
D#3, A3, C4, F#4
E3, B3, D4, G4
F3, A3, E4, G4
F#3, A3, C4, E4
G2, A3, C4, F4
G#2, B3, D4, F4
A2, B3, C4, G4
A#2, G3, C4, E4
B2, A3, D4, F4
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C6 9
C#9
D-9
D#9
E-9
F-9
F#-7(b5)
G7(b13)
G#7(13)
A7(b13)
Bb7(13)
B-7(11)
C3, E3, A3, D4
C#3, F3, B3, D#4
D3, F3, C4, E4
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C
C3, E4, G4, C5
C#3, E4, G4, A#4
D3, D4, F4, A4
D#3, F#4, A4, C5
E3, E4, G4, B4
F3, F4, A4, C5
F#3, E4, A4, C5
G3, D4, G4, B4
G#3, D4, F4, B4
A2, E4, A4, C5
A#2, D4, F4, A#4
B2, D4, F4, B4
C#dim7
D-
D#dim7
E-
D#3, G3, C#4, F4
E3, G3, D4, F#4
F2, G#3, D#4, G4
F#2, A3, C4, E4
G2, F3, B3, D#4
G#2, F#3, C4, F4
A2, G3, C#4, F4
A#2, G#3, D4, G4
B2, A3, D4, E4
F
F#-7(b5)
G
G#dim7
A-
Bb
Bdim
122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Multi-chord set list
7. Trad Min 1
11. Jazz Min 1
15. 5th Stack
Assign Chord Name
Key
Constituent Notes of
Chord Forms
Assign Chord Name
Key
Constituent Notes of
Chord Forms
Assign Chord Name
Key
Constituent Notes of
Chord Forms
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C-
Db
Ddim
Eb
Edim7
F-
Gbdim7
G-
Ab
A-7(b5)
Bb
Bdim7
C3, D#4, G4, C5
C#3, C#4, F4, G#4
D3, D4, F4, G#4
D#3, D#4, G4, A#4
E3, C#4, G4, A#4
F2, C4, F4, G#4
F#2, C4, D#4, A4
G2, A#3, D4, G4
G#2, C4, D#4, G#4
A2, C4, D#4, G4
A#2, D4, F4, A#4
B2, D4, F4, G#4
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C-7(11)
Db7(#9)
D-7(b5)
Ebaug maj7
E7(9)
F7(9)
Gbdim7
G7(#9)
C3, A#3, D#4, F4
C#3, F3, B3, E4
D3, C4, F4, G#4
D#3, B3, D4, G4
E2, G#3, D4, F#4
F2, A3, D#4, G4
F#2, A3, C4, D#4
G2, B3, F4, A#4
G#2, C4, D4, G4
A2, C4, D#4, G4
A#2, G#3, C#4, F4
B2, G#3, D4, F4
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
C4, G4
C#4, G#4
D4, A4
D#4, A#4
E4, B4
F4, C5
F#4, C#5
G4, D5
G#4, D#5
A4, E5
A#4, F5
B4, F#5
Abmaj7(#11)
A-7(b5)
Bb-7
Bdim7
8. Trad Min 2
12. Jazz Min 2
16. Scale Set
Assign Chord Name
Key
Constituent Notes of
Chord Forms
Assign Chord Name
Key
Constituent Notes of
Chord Forms
Assign Chord Name
Key
Constituent Notes of
Chord Forms
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C-
Db
Ddim
Eaug
E-
C3, D#4, G4, C5
C#3, C#4, F4, G#4
D3, D4, F4, G#4
D#3, D#4, G4, B4
E3, E4, G4, B4
F2, C4, F4, G#4
F#2, C4, D#4, A4
G2, B3, D4, G4
G#2, G#4, D#4, C4
A2, C4, D#4, G4
A#2, D4, F4, A#4
B2, D4, F4, B4
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C-7(9)
Db7(9)
D-7(9)
Eb7(9)
Emaj7(9)
F-7(9)
Gbdim7
G7(13)
Ab-6
C3, D#3, A#3, D4
C#3, F3, B3, D#4
D3, F3, C4, E4
D#3, G3, C#4, F4
E2, G#3, D#4, F#4
F2, G#3, D#4, G4
F#2, A3, C4, D#4
G2, F3, B3, E4
G#2, B3, D#4, F4
A2, C4, D#4, G4
A#2, G#3, C#4, F4
B2, A3, D4, F4
C
C#
Major Scale
Major Penta-
tonic Scale
C4, D4, E4, F4, G4, A4, B4
C4, D4, E4, G4, A4,
D
D#
E
Minor Scale
C4, D4, D#4, F4, G4, G#4,
A#4
C4, D4, D#4, F4, G4, G#4,
B4
Harmonic Mi-
nor Scale
Melodic Minor C4, D4, D#4, F4, G4, A4,
Scale
Whole Tone
Scale
F-
Gbdim7
G
Ab
A-7(b5)
Bb
Bdim
B4
F
C4, D4, E4, F#4, G#4, A#4
A-7(b5)
Bb-7
B-7(b5)
F#
G
Blue note Scale C4, D#4, F4, F#4, G4, A#4
Japanese Minor C4, C#4, F4, G4, A#4
G#
A
A#
Ryukyu Scale
Bari Scale
Spanish Scale
C4, E4, F4, G4, B4
C4, C#4, D#4, G4, G#4
C4, C#4, E4, F4, G4, G#4,
A#4
C4, C#4, E4, F4, G4, G#4,
B4
9. Pop Min 1
Assign Chord Name
Key
13. Oct Stack
Assign Chord Name
Key
Constituent Notes of
Chord Forms
Constituent Notes of
Chord Forms
C4, C5
C#4, C#5
D4, D5
D#4, D#5
E4, E5
B
Gypsy Scale
C
C#
D
D#
E
C-add9
Dbmaj7
D-7(b5)
Ebmaj7
Edim7
C3, D4, D#4, G4
C#3, G#3, C4, F4
D3, C4, F4, G#4
D#3, A#3, D4, G4
E3, A#3, C#4, G4
F2, G#3, D#4, G4
F#2, A3, C4, D#4
G2, A#3, D4, F4
G#2, C4, D#4, G4
A2, C4, D#4, G4
A#2, G#3, C4, D#4
B2, G#3, D4, F4
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
F
F-7(9)
F4, F5
F#
G
Gbdim7
G-7
F#4, F#5
G4, G5
G#4, G#5
A4, A5
A#4, A#5
B4, B5
G#
A
A#
B
Abmaj7
A-7(b5)
Bb7sus4(9 13)
Bdim7
10. Pop Min 2
14. 4th Stack
Assign Chord Name
Key
Constituent Notes of
Chord Forms
Assign Chord Name
Key
Constituent Notes of
Chord Forms
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
C-add9
Eb7(on Db)
D-7(b5)
Ebmaj7
Emaj7(9)
F-7(9)
Gbdim7
G7(b13)
Abmaj7
A-7(b5)
C-7(on Bb)
C-maj7(B)
C3, D4, D#4, G4
C#3, A#3, D#4, G4
D3, G#3, C4, F4
D#3, A#3, D4, G4
E3, G#3, D#4, F#4
F2, G#3, D#4, G4
F#2, A3, C4, D#4
G2, F3, B3, D#4
G#2, C4, D#4, G4
A2, C4, D#4, G4
A#2, C4, D#4, G4
B2, D4, D#4, G4
C
C#
D
D#
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
A#
B
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
C4, F4
C#4, F#4
D4, G4
D#4, G#4
E4, A4
F4, A#4
F#4, B4
G4, C5
G#4, C#5
A4, D5
A#4, D#5
B4, E5
*
If you wish to modify the key of each chord set, use the Transpose function.
123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI implementation chart
SYNTHESIZER
Model JUNO-D
Date : April 1, 2004
Version : 1.00
Function...
Default
Channel Changed
Transmitted
Recognized
Remarks
Basic
1–16
1–16
1–16
1–16
Default
Messages
Altered
Mode 3
X
Mode 3
Mode 3, 4 (M = 1)
* 2
Mode
**************
Note
Number :
0–127
**************
0–127
0–127
True Voice
Note On
Note Off
O
O
O
O
Velocity
After
Touch
Key's
Channel's
X
O
O
O
*1
*1
Pitch Bend
O
O
*1
0, 32
1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
*1
O
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
Bank select
Modulation
O
5
O
Portamento time
Data entry
6, 38
7
O
O
Volume
8
O
Balance
10
11
12
13
64
65
66
67
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
84
91
93
98, 99
O
Panpot
O
Expression
Control
Change
O
Effect control 1
Effect control 2
Hold 1
O
O
O
Portamento
Sostenuto
O
O
Soft
O
Resonance
O
Release time
Attack time
O
O
Cutoff
O
Decay time
O
Vibrato rate
Vibrato depth
Vibrato delay
Portamento control
General purpose effects 1
General purpose effects 3
NRPN LSB, MSB
RPN LSB, MSB
O
O
O
O
O
X
O (Reverb)
O (Chorus)
O
O
100, 101
X
Program
Change
O
O
0–127
*1
**************
: True Number
Program No. 1–128
System Exclusive
O
O
*1
: Song Position
: Song Select
: Tune Request
X
X
X
X
X
X
System
Common
System
Real Time : Commands
: Clock
X
X
O
X
*3
X
X
X
X
O
X
O (120, 126, 127)
: All Sound Off
O
: Reset All Controllers
Aux
Messages
X
: Local On/Off
: All Notes Off
: Active Sensing
: System Reset
O (123–127)
*1
O
X
* 1 O X is selectable.
* 2 Recognized as M=1 even if M≠1.
* 3 Recognized when the Clock Source parameter (SYSTEM) is set to "MIDI."
Notes
Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY
Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY
Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO
Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO
O : Yes
X : No
984
* A separate publication titled “MIDI Implementation” is also available. It provides complete details concerning the way MIDI has been implemented on this
unit. If you should require this publication (such as when you intend to carry out byte-level programming), please contact the nearest Roland Service Center
or authorized Roland distributor.
124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
JUNO-D: Synthesizer Keyboard
Display
(conforms to General MIDI 2 System)
20 characters, 2 lines (Backlit LCD)
Keyboard
Connectors
61 keys (with velocity)
Output Jacks (L/MONO, R)
Headphones Jack
MIDI Connectors (IN, OUT)
Hold Pedal Jack
[Sound Generator]
Maximum Polyphony
Control Pedal Jack
64 voices
Power Supply
Parts
DC 9 V (AC Adaptor)
16
Current draw
* Two Tones can be assigned to each part (Patch), and can be split or
layered.
1000 mA
Dimensions
Wave Memory
1021 (W) x 292 (D) x 103 (H) mm
40-1/4 (W) x 11-1/2 (D) x 4-1/16 (H) inches
32 M bytes (16-bit linear equivalent)
Preset Memory
Weight
Original Tones: 640
5.0 kg/11 lbs 1 oz (excluding AC adaptor)
Patches: 640 (JUNO-D original: 384, General MIDI 2: 256)
Rhythm Sets: 20 (JUNO-D original: 11, General MIDI 2: 9)
Performances: 32
Accessories
Owner’s Manual
AC Adaptor (ACI Series or PSB-1U)
CD-ROM (Editor program for PC/Mac)
User Memory
Patches: 128
* Two Tones can be assigned to each Patch.
Rhythm Sets: 2
Performances: 8
Options
Pedal Switch: DP-2, DP-8
Foot Switch: BOSS FS-5U
Expression Pedal: EV-5
Effects
Multi-Effects: 47 types
Reverb: 8 types
962a
Chorus: 8 types
* In the interest of product improvement, the specifications and/or
appearance of this unit are subject to change without prior notice.
Rhythm Guide
Preset Patterns: 32
Tempo: 5–300 BPM (with tap tempo function)
Multi-Chord Memory
Preset Chord Sets: 16
* 12 chord forms are assigned to each set.
User Chord Sets: 8
* 12 chord forms can be assigned to each set.
Phrase/Arpeggio
Templates: 342
User Templates: 8
Styles (Variations): 473
Controllers
D Beam Controller: 1
Pitch Bend/Modulation Lever: 1
Control Knobs: 5
125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A
Arpeggio Style ............................................................... 62
Arpeggio Variation ....................................................... 62
Decay Time ..................................................................... 28
Edit
Performance Settings ............................................... 55
C
FACTORY RESET .......................................................... 17
Filter LFO (Filter LFO Switch) ..................................... 47
Chorus Delay Time ....................................................... 86
G
Hold Pedal (Hold Pedal Polarity) ............................... 89
Coarse Tune ................................................................... 46
Control Change ............................................................. 93
CONTROLLER .............................................................. 89
Ctrl 1, 2 (Multi-Effects Control 1, 2) ............................ 69
Current Part ................................................................... 40
cursor .............................................................................. 42
CUTOFF .......................................................................... 29
Cutoff Freq (Cutoff Frequency) ................................... 47
JUNO-D Editor .............................................................. 99
K
Kbd Velocity (Arpeggio Keyboard Velocity) ............ 63
Key Mode ................................................................. 44–45
Key Trigger (Arpeggio Key Trigger) .......................... 63
126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L
Level
Reverb Level ............................................................. 87
Rhythm Tone ............................................................ 52
Performance Utility ....................................................... 59
Play
M
MASTER EFFECT SWITCH ........................................ 65
MFX Switch
Motif (Arpeggio Motif) ................................................. 62
Multi-chord Memory .................................................... 24
N
Name ............................................................................... 43
Patch Name .............................................................. 45
Note Off .......................................................................... 92
Note On .......................................................................... 92
Numbers and numerals ................................................ 43
GM/GM2 Music Data ............................................. 98
Portamento Time ........................................................... 47
Power .............................................................................. 15
Pre-LPF ..................................................................... 86–87
Program Change ............................................................ 93
PTN INIT ........................................................................ 59
O
Octave Range (Arpeggio Octave Range) ................... 63
Octave Shift .................................................................... 30
Original Tone Number ................................................. 46
127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
R
Receive Bank Sel (Receive Bank Select Switch) ........ 57
T
Tx Edit Data (Transmit Edit Data Switch) ................. 91
Resonance
Rhythm Set ..................................................................... 22
Rhythm Set Parameters ................................................ 52
Rhythm Set Utility ........................................................ 53
Rx Prog Chg (Receive Program Change Switch) ...... 90
Reverb Type .............................................................. 87
V
Velo Sens Depth (Velocity Sensitivity Depth) ........... 47
Velo Sens Ofs (Velocity Sensitivity Offset) ................ 47
S
Save
W
Wah Effects ..................................................................... 27
Scale Tune
Patch Utility .............................................................. 51
Soft Thru (Soft Through Switch) ................................. 91
Solo Switch ..................................................................... 46
SOLO SYNTH ................................................................ 32
Split Arp ......................................................................... 46
Split Point ....................................................................... 45
Style (Arpeggio Style) ................................................... 62
Sustain level ................................................................... 28
System Function ............................................................ 88
128
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memo
129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memo
130
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For EU Countries
For the USA
This product complies with the requirements of European Directive 89/336/EEC.
FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION
RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee
that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
–
–
–
–
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment.
This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit.
For Canada
NOTICE
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
AVIS
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Information
When you need repair service, call your nearest Roland Service Center or authorized Roland distributor in your country as
shown below.
MEXICO
IRELAND
PHILIPPINES
IRAN
AFRICA
Casa Veerkamp, s.a. de c.v.
Av. Toluca No. 323, Col. Olivar
de los Padres 01780 Mexico D.F.
MEXICO
Roland Ireland
G.A. Yupangco & Co. Inc.
339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue
Makati, Metro Manila 1200,
PHILIPPINES
MOCO, INC.
G2 Calmount Park, Calmount
Avenue, Dublin 12
Republic of IRELAND
TEL: (01) 4294444
No.41 Nike St., Dr.Shariyati Ave.,
Roberoye Cerahe Mirdamad
Tehran, IRAN
EGYPT
Al Fanny Trading Office
9, EBN Hagar A1 Askalany Street,
ARD E1 Golf, Heliopolis,
Cairo 11341, EGYPT
TEL: (55) 5668-6699
TEL: (02) 899 9801
TEL: (021) 285-4169
PANAMA
SINGAPORE
ISRAEL
ITALY
SUPRO MUNDIAL, S.A.
Boulevard Andrews, Albrook,
Panama City, REP. DE PANAMA
TEL: 315-0101
TEL: 20-2-417-1828
Swee Lee Company
150 Sims Drive,
Halilit P. Greenspoon &
Roland Italy S. p. A.
Viale delle Industrie 8,
20020 Arese, Milano, ITALY
TEL: (02) 937-78300
Sons Ltd.
REUNION
SINGAPORE 387381
TEL: 6846-3676
8 Retzif Ha'aliya Hashnya St.
Tel-Aviv-Yafo ISRAEL
TEL: (03) 6823666
Maison FO - YAM Marcel
25 Rue Jules Hermann,
Chaudron - BP79 97 491
Ste Clotilde Cedex,
CRISTOFORI MUSIC PTE
PARAGUAY
NORWAY
LTD
Distribuidora De
JORDAN
Roland Scandinavia Avd.
Blk 3014, Bedok Industrial Park E,
#02-2148, SINGAPORE 489980
TEL: 6243-9555
Instrumentos Musicales
J.E. Olear y ESQ. Manduvira
Asuncion PARAGUAY
TEL: (021) 492-124
REUNION ISLAND
TEL: (0262) 218-429
AMMAN Trading Agency
245 Prince Mohammad St.,
Amman 1118, JORDAN
TEL: (06) 464-1200
Kontor Norge
Lilleakerveien 2 Postboks 95
Lilleaker N-0216 Oslo
NORWAY
SOUTH AFRICA
TAIWAN
That Other Music Shop
TEL: 2273 0074
ROLAND TAIWAN
URUGUAY
(PTY) Ltd.
11 Melle St., Braamfontein,
Johannesbourg, SOUTH AFRICA
KUWAIT
ENTERPRISE CO., LTD.
Room 5, 9fl. No. 112 Chung Shan
N.Road Sec.2, Taipei, TAIWAN,
R.O.C.
Todo Musica S.A.
Francisco Acuna de Figueroa 1771
C.P.: 11.800
Easa Husain Al Yousifi Est.
Abdullah Salem Street,
Safat, KUWAIT
POLAND
MX MUSIC SP.Z.O.O.
UL. Gibraltarska 4.
P.O.Box 32918, Braamfontein 2017
Johannesbourg, SOUTH AFRICA
TEL: (011) 403 4105
Montevideo, URUGUAY
TEL: (02) 924-2335
TEL: 243-6399
PL-03664 Warszawa POLAND
TEL: (022) 679 44 19
TEL: (02) 2561 3339
LEBANON
THAILAND
VENEZUELA
Paul Bothner (PTY) Ltd.
17 Werdmuller Centre,
Main Road, Claremont 7708
SOUTH AFRICA
Chahine S.A.L.
PORTUGAL
Theera Music Co. , Ltd.
330 Verng NakornKasem, Soi 2,
Bangkok 10100, THAILAND
TEL: (02) 2248821
Musicland Digital C.A.
Av. Francisco de Miranda,
Centro Parque de Cristal, Nivel
C2 Local 20 Caracas
Gerge Zeidan St., Chahine Bldg.,
Achrafieh, P.O.Box: 16-5857
Beirut, LEBANON
Tecnologias Musica e Audio,
Roland Portugal, S.A.
Cais Das Pedras, 8/9-1 Dto
4050-465 PORTO
TEL: (01) 20-1441
P.O.BOX 23032, Claremont 7735,
SOUTH AFRICA
TEL: (021) 674 4030
VENEZUELA
TEL: (212) 285-8586
PORTUGAL
TEL: (022) 608 00 60
VIETNAM
QATAR
Saigon Music
Al Emadi Co. (Badie Studio
& Stores)
Suite DP-8
ROMANIA
EUROPE
40 Ba Huyen Thanh Quan Street
Hochiminh City, VIETNAM
Tel: (08) 930-1969
P.O. Box 62, Doha, QATAR
TEL: 4423-554
ASIA
FBS LINES
Piata Libertatii 1,
AUSTRIA
535500 Gheorgheni, ROMANIA
TEL: (266) 364 609
CHINA
Roland Elektronische
Musikinstrumente HmbH.
SAUDI ARABIA
Roland Shanghai Electronics
aDawliah Universal
AUSTRALIA/
NEW ZEALAND
Co.,Ltd.
Austrian Office
RUSSIA
Electronics APL
5F. No.1500 Pingliang Road
Shanghai 200090, CHINA
TEL: (021) 5580-0800
Eduard-Bodem-Gasse 8,
A-6020 Innsbruck, AUSTRIA
TEL: (0512) 26 44 260
MuTek
Corniche Road, Aldossary Bldg.,
1st Floor, Alkhobar,
SAUDI ARABIA
3-Bogatyrskaya Str. 1.k.l
107 564 Moscow, RUSSIA
TEL: (095) 169 5043
AUSTRALIA
Roland Shanghai Electronics
Co.,Ltd.
(BEIJING OFFICE)
10F. No.18 Anhuaxili
Chaoyang District, Beijing 100011
CHINA
Roland Corporation
Australia Pty., Ltd.
38 Campbell Avenue
Dee Why West. NSW 2099
AUSTRALIA
BELGIUM/HOLLAND/
LUXEMBOURG
Roland Benelux N. V.
Houtstraat 3, B-2260, Oevel
(Westerlo) BELGIUM
TEL: (014) 575811
P.O.Box 2154, Alkhobar 31952
SAUDI ARABIA
TEL: (03) 898 2081
SPAIN
Roland Electronics
de España, S. A.
Calle Bolivia 239, 08020
Barcelona, SPAIN
TEL: (93) 308 1000
SYRIA
TEL: (02) 9982 8266
Technical Light & Sound
TEL: (010) 6426-5050
Center
NEW ZEALAND
Roland Shanghai Electronics
Co.,Ltd.
(GUANGZHOU OFFICE)
2/F., No.30 Si You Nan Er Jie Yi
Xiang, Wu Yang Xin Cheng,
Guangzhou 510600, CHINA
Tel: (020) 8736-0428
Rawda, Abdul Qader Jazairi St.
Bldg. No. 21, P.O.BOX 13520,
Damascus, SYRIA
CZECH REP.
K-AUDIO
Kardasovska 626.
CZ-198 00 Praha 9,
CZECH REP.
Roland Corporation Ltd.
32 Shaddock Street, Mount Eden,
Auckland, NEW ZEALAND
TEL: (09) 3098 715
SWEDEN
Roland Scandinavia A/S
SWEDISH SALES OFFICE
Danvik Center 28, 2 tr.
S-131 30 Nacka SWEDEN
TEL: (0)8 702 00 20
TEL: (011) 223-5384
TURKEY
TEL: (2) 666 10529
CENTRAL/LATIN
AMERICA
Ant Muzik Aletleri Ithalat
Ve Ihracat Ltd Sti
Siraselviler Caddesi Siraselviler
Pasaji No:74/20
Taksim - Istanbul, TURKEY
TEL: (0212) 2449624
DENMARK
HONG KONG
SWITZERLAND
Roland Scandinavia A/S
Nordhavnsvej 7, Postbox 880,
DK-2100 Copenhagen
DENMARK
Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.
Roland (Switzerland) AG
Landstrasse 5, Postfach,
CH-4452 Itingen,
Service Division
22-32 Pun Shan Street, Tsuen
Wan, New Territories,
HONG KONG
ARGENTINA
Instrumentos Musicales S.A.
Av.Santa Fe 2055
SWITZERLAND
TEL: (061) 927-8383
TEL: 3916 6200
U.A.E.
(1123) Buenos Aires
ARGENTINA
TEL: (011) 4508-2700
TEL: 2415 0911
Zak Electronics & Musical
FRANCE
UKRAINE
Instruments Co. L.L.C.
Zabeel Road, Al Sherooq Bldg.,
No. 14, Grand Floor, Dubai, U.A.E.
TEL: (04) 3360715
Parsons Music Ltd.
8th Floor, Railway Plaza, 39
Chatham Road South, T.S.T,
Kowloon, HONG KONG
TEL: 2333 1863
Roland France SA
TIC-TAC
4, Rue Paul Henri SPAAK,
Parc de l'Esplanade, F 77 462 St.
Thibault, Lagny Cedex FRANCE
TEL: 01 600 73 500
BRAZIL
Mira Str. 19/108
P.O. Box 180
295400 Munkachevo, UKRAINE
TEL: (03131) 414-40
Roland Brasil Ltda
Rua San Jose, 780 Sala B
Parque Industrial San Jose
Cotia - Sao Paulo - SP, BRAZIL
TEL: (011) 4615 5666
INDIA
FINLAND
NORTH AMERICA
UNITED KINGDOM
Rivera Digitec (India) Pvt. Ltd.
409, Nirman Kendra Mahalaxmi
Flats Compound Off. Dr. Edwin
Moses Road, Mumbai-400011,
INDIA
Roland Scandinavia As,
Filial Finland
Roland (U.K.) Ltd.
Atlantic Close, Swansea
Enterprise Park, SWANSEA
SA7 9FJ,
CANADA
COSTA RICA
Elannontie 5
Roland Canada Music Ltd.
JUAN Bansbach
FIN-01510 Vantaa, FINLAND
TEL: (0)9 68 24 020
(Head Office)
Instrumentos Musicales
Ave.1. Calle 11, Apartado 10237,
San Jose, COSTA RICA
TEL: 258-0211
UNITED KINGDOM
TEL: (01792) 702701
TEL: (022) 2493 9051
5480 Parkwood Way Richmond
B. C., V6V 2M4 CANADA
TEL: (604) 270 6626
GERMANY
INDONESIA
Roland Elektronische
PT Citra IntiRama
J1. Cideng Timur No. 15J-150
Jakarta Pusat
Musikinstrumente HmbH.
Oststrasse 96, 22844 Norderstedt,
GERMANY
Roland Canada Music Ltd.
CHILE
MIDDLE EAST
(Toronto Office)
170 Admiral Boulevard
Mississauga On L5T 2N6
CANADA
Comercial Fancy S.A.
Rut.: 96.919.420-1
INDONESIA
TEL: (021) 6324170
TEL: (040) 52 60090
Nataniel Cox #739, 4th Floor
Santiago - Centro, CHILE
TEL: (02) 688-9540
BAHRAIN
GREECE
Moon Stores
KOREA
TEL: (905) 362 9707
STOLLAS S.A.
No.16, Bab Al Bahrain Avenue,
P.O.Box 247, Manama 304,
State of BAHRAIN
Cosmos Corporation
1461-9, Seocho-Dong,
Seocho Ku, Seoul, KOREA
TEL: (02) 3486-8855
Music Sound Light
155, New National Road
Patras 26442, GREECE
TEL: 2610 435400
U. S. A.
EL SALVADOR
Roland Corporation U.S.
5100 S. Eastern Avenue
Los Angeles, CA 90040-2938,
U. S. A.
TEL: 211 005
OMNI MUSIC
75 Avenida Norte y Final
CYPRUS
Alameda Juan Pablo
Edificio No.4010 San Salvador,
EL SALVADOR
,
MALAYSIA
HUNGARY
Radex Sound Equipment Ltd.
17, Diagorou Street, Nicosia,
CYPRUS
TEL: (323) 890 3700
BENTLEY MUSIC SDN BHD
140 & 142, Jalan Bukit Bintang
55100 Kuala Lumpur,MALAYSIA
TEL: (03) 2144-3333
Roland East Europe Ltd.
Warehouse Area ‘DEPO’ Pf.83
H-2046 Torokbalint, HUNGARY
TEL: (23) 511011
TEL: 262-0788
TEL: (022) 66-9426
As of May 1, 2004 (Roland)
03675101
2MP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|